manualshive.com logo in svg

Canon iR C3200 Series, Service Manual, Page: 13 / 1216

Share
Download
Canon iR C3200 Series Service Manual Download Page 13

Contents

8.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing .................................................................................................... 8-5

8.3.1.1 Turning On/Off the Laser .................................................................................................................... 8-5
8.3.1.2 BD Signal  ............................................................................................................................................ 8-7
8.3.1.3 Controlling Synchronization in Main Scanning Direction .................................................................. 8-8
8.3.1.4 Controlling Synchronization in Sub Scanning Direction  .................................................................... 8-8

8.3.2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light  ..................................................................................................... 8-9

8.3.2.1 APC Control  ........................................................................................................................................ 8-9
8.3.2.2 PWM Control  ...................................................................................................................................... 8-9

8.3.3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor  ....................................................................................................... 8-10

8.3.3.1 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor  ................................................................................................ 8-10

8.3.4 Controlling the Laser Shutter .................................................................................................................... 8-10

8.3.4.1 Controlling the Laser Shutter  ............................................................................................................ 8-10

8.3.5 Correcting Image Displacement ................................................................................................................ 8-11

8.3.5.1 Outline  ............................................................................................................................................... 8-11
8.3.5.2 Timing of Color Displacement Detection/Correction  ....................................................................... 8-12
8.3.5.3 Detecting/Correcting Color Displacement in Sub Scanning Direction ............................................. 8-13
8.3.5.4 Detecting/Correcting the Angle in Main Scanning Direction  ........................................................... 8-14
8.3.5.5 Detecting/Correcting Color Displacement in Main Scanning Direction ........................................... 8-16
8.3.5.6 Detecting/Correcting Changes in the Reproduction Ratio in Main Scanning Direction ................... 8-17

8.4 Parts Replacement Procedure  .......................................................................................................................... 8-19

8.4.1 Laser Unit .................................................................................................................................................. 8-19

8.4.1.1 Removing the Center Delivery Tray  ................................................................................................. 8-19
8.4.1.2 Removing the Laser Unit ................................................................................................................... 8-19
8.4.1.3 After Replacing the Laser Unit .......................................................................................................... 8-20

Chapter 9

Image Formation

9.1 Construction  ...................................................................................................................................................... 9-1

9.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions  ................................................................................. 9-1
9.1.2 Major Components of the Image Formation System  ................................................................................. 9-3
9.1.3 Charging Specifications  ............................................................................................................................. 9-4

9.2 Image Formation Process  .................................................................................................................................. 9-6

9.2.1 Image Formation Process (general) ............................................................................................................ 9-6
9.2.2 Image Formation Process (image formation)  ............................................................................................. 9-7
9.2.3 Image Formation Process (transfer)  ........................................................................................................... 9-7

9.3 Basic Sequence .................................................................................................................................................. 9-8

9.3.1 At Power-On (1)  ......................................................................................................................................... 9-8
9.3.2 At Power-On (2)  ......................................................................................................................................... 9-8
9.3.3 During Copying/Printing Operations (normal speed)  ................................................................................ 9-9
9.3.4 Making Copies/Prints (half speed)  ........................................................................................................... 9-10
9.3.5 After Replacing the Drum Unit (D-UNIT) ............................................................................................... 9-10
9.3.6 Printing Originals Containing a Color Page ............................................................................................. 9-11
9.3.7 Driving and Controlling the Image Formation System and the High-Voltage System ............................ 9-11

9.4 Image Stabilization Control ............................................................................................................................. 9-13

9.4.1 Outline of Image Quality Control  ............................................................................................................ 9-13
9.4.2 Automatic Image Stabilization Control .................................................................................................... 9-13
9.4.3 ATR Control ............................................................................................................................................. 9-17
9.4.4 Discharge Current Level Control  ............................................................................................................. 9-17
9.4.5 ATVC Control (transfer bias level correction) ......................................................................................... 9-18
9.4.6 PASCAL Control (image gradation)  ........................................................................................................ 9-18
9.4.7 SALT-Dmax Control (development characteristics correction)  .............................................................. 9-19
9.4.8 SALT-Dhalf Control (development characteristics correction)  ............................................................... 9-20
9.4.9 Auto Gradation Control ............................................................................................................................ 9-22

9.5 Drum Unit ........................................................................................................................................................ 9-24

Summary of Contents for iR C3200 Series

Page 1: ...Dec 3 2004 Service Manual iR C3200 Series iR C3220N PRT ...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ... need arises In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period Canon will issue a new edition of this manual The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law Trademarks The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies Copyright This ma...

Page 4: ...quiring care to avoid combustion fire Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in question Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question Provides a descri...

Page 5: ...sed to indicate Low The voltage value however differs from circuit to circuit In addition the asterisk as in DRMD indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when 0 In practically all cases the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field Therefore the operations of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed they are explained in terms of from sensors to the in...

Page 6: ......

Page 7: ...stem Control Settings 1 15 1 2 3 6 Copier Specifications Settings 1 16 1 2 3 7 Transmission Reception Specifications Settings 1 16 1 2 3 8 Box Specifications Settings 1 17 1 2 3 9 Printer Specifications Settings 1 18 1 2 3 10 Destinations Table Specifications Settings 1 19 1 2 4 User Maintenance 1 19 1 2 4 1 Cleaning 1 19 1 2 4 2 Inspection 1 20 1 2 5 Safety 1 20 1 2 5 1 Safety of the Laser System...

Page 8: ...g the Images Operations 2 25 2 5 1 Checking the Images Operations 2 25 2 5 2 PASCAL Setting 2 28 2 5 3 Preventing Anti Condensation 2 29 2 6 Relocating the Machine 2 30 2 6 1 Preparing for Relocation 2 30 2 7 Installing the Card Reader 2 31 2 7 1 Checking the Contents 2 31 2 7 2 Installation Procedure 2 31 2 7 3 Making Settings If Net Spot Accountant NSA Is Used 2 33 2 8 Installing the NE Controll...

Page 9: ...D 5 4 5 2 5 Composition of the System Software 5 5 5 3 Start Up Sequence 5 7 5 3 1 Outline 5 7 5 3 2 Startup Sequence 5 7 5 4 Actions when HDD Error 5 9 5 4 1 E602 in Detail 5 9 5 5 Image Processing 5 14 5 5 1 Flow of Images 5 14 5 5 2 Construction of the Image Processing Module 5 15 5 5 3 Reader Input Image Processing 5 16 5 5 4 Compression Decompression and Edit Processing Black 5 17 5 5 5 Print...

Page 10: ...5 31 5 7 3 4 Removing the SRAM PCB 5 31 5 7 3 5 When Replacing the SRAM PCB 5 31 5 7 4 UFR Board 5 32 5 7 4 1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 5 32 5 7 4 2 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 5 32 5 7 4 3 Removing the Controller Box Cover 5 32 5 7 4 4 Removing the UFR Board 5 32 5 7 5 Ethernet Board 5 33 5 7 5 1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 5 33 5 7 5 2 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 5 33 5 7 5 3...

Page 11: ...n original size 6 11 6 3 4 3 Outline of Detection Operations 6 11 6 4 Parts Replacement Procedure 6 14 6 4 1 Copyboard Glass 6 14 6 4 1 1 Removing the Copyboard Glass 6 14 6 4 1 2 After Replacing the Copyboard Glass 6 14 6 4 2 Exposure Lamp 6 15 6 4 2 1 Removing the Copyboard Glass 6 15 6 4 2 2 Removing the Reader Left Cover Reader Right Cover Reader Front Cover 6 15 6 4 2 3 Removing the CCD Unit ...

Page 12: ...Base Home Position Sensor 6 30 6 4 11 Original Sensor 6 30 6 4 11 1 Removing the Copyboard Glass 6 30 6 4 11 2 Removing the CCD Unit Cover 6 31 6 4 11 3 Removing the Original Size Detection Unit 6 31 6 4 11 4 Removing the Original Size Sensor 6 31 6 4 12 Reader Heater option 6 31 6 4 12 1 Removing the Copyboard Glass 6 31 6 4 12 2 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 6 32 6 4 12 3 Removing the Fuse PCB ...

Page 13: ... 4 1 2 Removing the Laser Unit 8 19 8 4 1 3 After Replacing the Laser Unit 8 20 Chapter 9 Image Formation 9 1 Construction 9 1 9 1 1 Specifications Control Mechanisms and Functions 9 1 9 1 2 Major Components of the Image Formation System 9 3 9 1 3 Charging Specifications 9 4 9 2 Image Formation Process 9 6 9 2 1 Image Formation Process general 9 6 9 2 2 Image Formation Process image formation 9 7 ...

Page 14: ...ary External Roller 9 45 9 7 3 3 Collecting Waste Toner 9 45 9 7 4 Separation Mechanism 9 46 9 7 4 1 Separation 9 46 9 8 Parts Replacement Procedure 9 48 9 8 1 Drum ITB Motor 9 48 9 8 1 1 Slide Out the Drum Unit 9 48 9 8 1 2 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 9 48 9 8 1 3 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 9 48 9 8 1 4 Removing the Controller Box Cover 9 48 9 8 1 5 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 9 48 ...

Page 15: ...e Lower Rear Cover 9 65 9 8 5 3 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 9 65 9 8 5 4 Removing the Controller Box Cover 9 65 9 8 5 5 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 9 66 9 8 5 6 Opening the Main Controller Box 9 66 9 8 5 7 Removing the DC Controller Mounting 9 67 9 8 5 8 Removing the Developing Motor Y M C 9 67 9 8 6 Secondary Transfer Unit 9 68 9 8 6 1 Removing the Fixing Unit 9 68 9 8 6 2 Removin...

Page 16: ... 15 3 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 9 87 9 8 15 4 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 9 87 9 8 15 5 Removing the Controller Box Cover 9 87 9 8 15 6 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 9 87 9 8 15 7 Opening the Main Controller Box 9 88 9 8 15 8 Removing the DC Controller Mounting 9 89 9 8 15 9 Removing the Toner Container Drive Unit 9 89 9 8 15 10 Removing the Toner Container Drive Assembly Upper P...

Page 17: ...7 Route of Dive 10 7 10 2 Basic Sequence 10 8 10 2 1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power On 10 8 10 2 2 Basic Sequence of Operations in Response to a Press on the Start Key 10 8 10 3 Detecting Jams 10 9 10 3 1 Delay Jams 10 9 10 3 1 1 Delay Jam in the Cassette Pickup Assembly 10 9 10 3 1 2 Delay Jam Outside the Cassette Pickup Assembly 10 9 10 3 2 Stationary Jams 10 10 10 3 2 1 Stationary Jams 1...

Page 18: ...6 3 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 10 39 10 10 6 4 Removing the DC Power Supply Unit 10 39 10 10 6 5 Removing the Controller Box Cover 10 39 10 10 6 6 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 10 39 10 10 6 7 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan 10 40 10 10 6 8 Removing the Developing Drive Unit 10 40 10 10 6 9 Removing the Lattice Controller Base 10 41 10 10 6 10 Removing the High Voltage Unit 1...

Page 19: ...d Unit Cover 10 53 10 10 12 2 Removing the Manual Feed Tray Unit 10 54 10 10 13 Manual Feed Unit 10 54 10 10 13 1 Removing the Manual Feed Unit 10 54 10 10 14 Manual Feed Roller 10 55 10 10 14 1 Removing the Manual Feed Unit 10 55 10 10 14 2 Removing the Manual Feed Unit Cover 10 55 10 10 14 3 Removing the Manual Feed Roller 10 56 10 10 15 Manual Feed Separation Roller 10 57 10 10 15 1 Removing th...

Page 20: ...ation Sensor 10 75 10 10 24 Fixing Feeder Unit 10 75 10 10 24 1 Removing the Fixing Unit 10 75 10 10 24 2 Removing the Fixing Feeder Unit 10 75 10 10 25 Vertical Path Roller 10 76 10 10 25 1 Removing the Cassette 10 76 10 10 25 2 Removing the Front Right Cover 10 76 10 10 25 3 Removing the Rear Right Cover 10 76 10 10 25 4 Removing the Pickup Vertical Path Cover 10 76 10 10 25 5 Removing the Picku...

Page 21: ...moving the Fixing Feeder Assembly Back Sheet 10 96 10 10 34 4 Removing the Duplex Registration Sensor 10 97 10 10 35 Duplex Horizontal Registration Sensor 10 97 10 10 35 1 Removing the Fixing Unit 10 97 10 10 35 2 Removing the Fixing Feeder Unit 10 98 10 10 35 3 Removing the Fixing Feeder Assembly Back Sheet 10 98 10 10 35 4 Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor Support Plate 10 98 10 10 35 5...

Page 22: ...elivery Sensor Flag 10 119 10 10 40 7 Removing the Face Down Delivery Roller 1 10 120 10 10 41 Face Up Delivery Roller 10 120 10 10 41 1 Removing the Fixing Feeder Unit 10 120 10 10 41 2 Removing the Fixing Feeder Unit Cover 10 121 10 10 41 3 Removing the Inside Delivery Roller 10 121 10 10 41 4 Removing the Face Up Delivery Roller 10 122 10 10 42 Delivery Vertical Path Roller 1 10 123 10 10 42 1 ...

Page 23: ...y Tray 10 154 10 10 49 3 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit Old 10 154 10 10 49 4 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit New 10 156 10 10 49 5 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Cover Open Closed Sensor 10 158 10 10 50 Delivery Path Switching Solenoid 1 10 158 10 10 50 1 Removing the Upper Left Cover 10 158 10 10 50 2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray 10 158 10 10 50 3 Removing the Delive...

Page 24: ... the Delivery Upper Guide 11 18 11 5 2 3 Removing the Fixing Upper Frame 11 19 11 5 2 4 After Disassembling the Fixing Unit 11 20 11 5 3 Fixing Roller 11 21 11 5 3 1 Removing the Fixing Unit 11 21 11 5 3 2 Removing the Delivery Upper Guide 11 21 11 5 3 3 Removing the Fixing Upper Frame 11 22 11 5 3 4 Remove the Fixing Main Heater and the Fixing Sub Heater 11 23 11 5 3 5 Removing the Fixing Roller ...

Page 25: ...Guide 11 51 11 5 12 Delivery Lower Guide 11 52 11 5 12 1 Removing the Fixing Unit 11 52 11 5 12 2 Removing the Delivery Upper Guide 11 52 11 5 12 3 Removing the Fixing Upper Frame 11 53 11 5 12 4 Removing the Fixing Temperature Retainer Heater 11 54 11 5 12 5 Removing the Pressure Roller 11 55 11 5 12 6 Remove the Delivery Lower Guide 11 55 11 5 12 7 After Disassembling the Fixing Unit 11 56 11 5 ...

Page 26: ...otection Function 12 12 12 4 3 1 Protective Mechanisms 12 12 12 4 4 Backup Battery 12 12 12 4 4 1 Backup Power Supply 12 12 12 4 5 Energy Saving Function 12 13 12 4 5 1 Outline 12 13 12 5 Parts Replacement Procedure 12 15 12 5 1 Fixing Drive Unit 12 15 12 5 1 1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 12 15 12 5 1 2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 12 15 12 5 1 3 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 12 15 12 5 1 ...

Page 27: ...ontrol Panel 12 25 12 5 7 4 Removing the Control Panel Back Plate 12 26 12 5 7 5 Removing the Control Panel LCD Unit 12 26 12 5 8 DC Controller PCB 12 26 12 5 8 1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 12 26 12 5 8 2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 12 26 12 5 8 3 Removing the Controller Box Cover 12 27 12 5 8 4 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 12 27 12 5 8 5 Removing the DC Controller PCB 12 27 12 5 8 6 ...

Page 28: ...5 16 2 Removing the Inside Cover 12 37 12 5 16 3 Removing the Control Panel 12 37 12 5 16 4 Removing the Control Panel Back Plate 12 38 12 5 16 5 Removing the Control Panel Inverter PCB 12 38 12 5 17 Environment Sensor 12 38 12 5 17 1 Pressure Release of the Intermediate Transfer Unit 12 38 12 5 17 2 Removing the Upper Right Cover 12 39 12 5 17 3 Removing the Environment Sensor 12 39 12 5 18 Manua...

Page 29: ...22 Front Cover Open Closed Detecting Switch 12 51 12 5 22 1 Removing the Tonner Container release Lever 12 51 12 5 22 2 Removing the Cleaner Fan Cover 12 51 12 5 22 3 Removing the Inside Cover 12 51 12 5 22 4 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 12 51 12 5 22 5 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 12 51 12 5 22 6 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 12 52 12 5 22 7 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 12 52 12 5 ...

Page 30: ...r 12 63 12 5 28 4 Removing the Controller Box Cover 12 63 12 5 28 5 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 12 63 12 5 28 6 Opening the Main Controller Box 12 63 12 5 28 7 Removing the Machine Heat Discharge Fan 12 64 12 5 29 Drum Unit Drive Belt 12 65 12 5 29 1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 12 65 12 5 29 2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 12 65 12 5 29 3 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 12 65 12 5 29...

Page 31: ...he Drum Unit 15 7 15 4 2 After Replacing the Transfer Unit 15 7 15 4 3 After Replacing the Pattern Reading Unit 15 7 15 5 Fixing System 15 8 15 5 1 After Disassembling the Fixing Unit 15 8 15 6 Electrical Components 15 9 15 6 1 When Replacing the Reader Controller PCB 15 9 15 6 2 When Replacing the DC Controller PCB 15 9 15 6 3 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB main 15 10 15 6 4 When Replacin...

Page 32: ...ching Shrinking 16 65 16 3 3 Faulty Feeding 16 66 16 3 3 1 Double Feed Multiple Feed 16 66 16 3 3 2 Skew Feed 16 66 16 3 3 3 Wrinkle 16 67 16 3 3 4 Ripple Curl 16 67 16 3 3 5 Wrap 16 68 16 3 4 Malfunction 16 68 16 3 4 1 No Power 16 68 16 3 4 2 Control Panel Related 16 70 16 3 4 3 Counter Malfunction 16 72 16 3 4 4 Malfunction Faulty Detection 16 72 16 3 4 5 Noise 16 77 16 3 4 6 User Warning Messag...

Page 33: ... 16 126 16 3 10 11 E012 0001 Error code ITB motor not rotating 16 126 16 3 10 12 E012 0001 Error code At about 37 sec after the power is turned ON due to a drum ITB motor failure 16 126 16 3 10 13 E012 0001 Error code At about 37 sec after the power is turned ON due to a microswitch PCB failure 16 127 16 3 10 14 E012 0001 Error Code Drum ITB Motor DC Power Supply PCB and Fuse PCB work normally 16 ...

Page 34: ...here is a fault in stack size detection 16 148 16 3 10 59 E505 Error code detail There is a fault in the backup RAM 16 148 16 3 10 60 E512 Error code detail There is a fault in delivery Finisher N1 16 149 16 3 10 61 E512 Error code detail There is a fault in delivery Finisher M1 16 149 16 3 10 62 E514 Error code detail There is a fault in stack processing clockwise direction 16 150 16 3 10 63 E530...

Page 35: ...e pedestal 16 171 16 3 10 105 E716 Error code detail There is a fault in the communication between the cassette pedestal and the printer unit 16 172 16 3 10 106 E716 0000 Error code Recorded only in the error history 16 172 16 3 10 107 E717 Error code detail The communication with the NE controller is faulty 16 172 16 3 10 108 E719 Error code detail The coin vendor is faulty 16 173 16 3 10 109 E71...

Page 36: ... 1 Reader Unit 16 185 16 4 1 2 Printer Unit 16 185 16 4 2 Motor 16 186 16 4 2 1 Reader Unit 16 186 16 4 2 2 Printer Unit 16 186 16 4 3 Fan 16 188 16 4 3 1 Reader Unit 16 188 16 4 3 2 Printer Unit 16 188 16 4 4 Sensor 16 189 16 4 4 1 Reader Unit 16 189 16 4 4 2 Printer Unit 16 190 16 4 5 Switch 16 192 16 4 5 1 Reader Unit 16 192 16 4 5 2 Printer Unit 16 192 16 4 6 Lamps Heaters and Others 16 194 16...

Page 37: ...EEDSIZE 18 26 18 2 3 DISPLAY Level 2 18 26 18 2 3 1 DISPLAY Status Display Mode Level 2 18 26 18 2 4 DISPLAY Status Display Mode Level 2 18 28 18 2 4 1 COPIER 18 28 18 3 I O I O Display Mode 18 32 18 3 1 I O display mode 18 32 18 3 2 DC CON 18 33 18 3 3 R CON 18 42 18 3 4 FEEDER 18 44 18 3 5 SORTER 18 46 18 3 6 MN CON 18 63 18 4 ADJUST Adjustment Mode 18 65 18 4 1 COPIER 18 65 18 4 1 1 ADJ XY 18 6...

Page 38: ... 18 112 18 7 TEST Test Print Mode 18 113 18 7 1 COPIER 18 113 18 7 1 1 NETWORK 18 113 18 8 COUNTER Counter Mode 18 115 18 8 1 COPIER 18 115 18 8 1 1 Overview 18 115 18 8 1 2 TOTAL 18 116 18 8 1 3 PICK UP 18 118 18 8 1 4 FEEDER 18 118 18 8 1 5 JAM 18 119 18 8 1 6 DRBL 1 18 119 18 8 1 7 DRBL 2 18 120 Chapter 19 Upgrading 19 1 Outline 19 1 19 1 1 Construction of Firmware 19 1 19 1 2 Outline of the Se...

Page 39: ...Procedure 19 44 19 4 4 Downloading the Dcon and Rcon Software 19 50 19 4 4 1 Outline 19 50 19 4 4 2 Downloading Procedure 19 51 19 4 5 Downloading the G3 FAX Software 19 58 19 4 5 1 Outline 19 58 19 4 5 2 Downloading Procedure 19 59 19 5 Uploading and Downloading Backup Data 19 65 19 5 1 Outline 19 65 19 5 2 Uploading Procedure 19 66 19 5 3 Downloading Procedure 19 72 Chapter 20 Service Tools 20 1...

Page 40: ...Contents ...

Page 41: ...Chapter 1 Introduction ...

Page 42: ......

Page 43: ... 1 2 3 3 Adjustments and Cleaning 1 13 1 2 3 4 Report Generation 1 14 1 2 3 5 System Control Settings 1 15 1 2 3 6 Copier Specifications Settings 1 16 1 2 3 7 Transmission Reception Specifications Settings 1 16 1 2 3 8 Box Specifications Settings 1 17 1 2 3 9 Printer Specifications Settings 1 18 1 2 3 10 Destinations Table Specifications Settings 1 19 1 2 4 User Maintenance 1 19 1 2 4 1 Cleaning 1...

Page 44: ......

Page 45: ...f 4 and 5 1 Finisher M1 10 Slide Paper Deck P1 2 Saddle Finisher N2 11 Card Reader D1 3 Finisher N1 12 Plain Pedestal C1 4 Copy Tray H1 13 2 Cassette Pedestal X1 5 Delivery Tray standard 14 Anti Condensation Heater 100 230V 6 NE Controller A1 15 Cassette Heater Kit A1 7 DADF K1 16 Cassette Heater Unit 24 8 Copyboard Cover 17 Cassette Heater Unit 25 9 Original Tray 1 4 6 7 8 9 2 3 13 12 11 10 17 5 ...

Page 46: ...sion Board A2 6 PS Print Server Unit C1 7A PDL Expansion Kit LIPS A2 boot ROM for LIPS model 100V model only 7B PDL Expansion Kit LIPS PS Kanji A2 Boot Rom for LIPS PS Kanji model 100V machine only 8A Color iR256 MB Expansion RAM if 100V optional 8B Color iR512MB Expansion RAM if 100V optional 9 SEND Expansion Kit B2 B2U dongle for functional expansion 10 iR Security Kit A2P A2U 11 USB Application...

Page 47: ...g transmitting UFR Printer and Scanner Kit A2 PDL Expansion Kit LIPS A2 iR256MB Expansion RAM or iR512MB Expansion RAM LISP printing faxing UFR Printer and Scanner Kit A2 PDL Expansion Kit LIPS A2 Super G3 Fax Board M2 Image Conversion Board A2 iR256MB Expansion RAM or iR512MB Expansion RAM LIPS PS kanji printing transmitting UFR Printer and Scanner Kit A2 PDL Expansion Kit LIPS PS Kanji A2 iR512M...

Page 48: ...s are added 5 SEND Expansion Kit B2P B2U Adds transmitting functions It requires setup work using a PC Select B2P for use of a PC parallel port or B2U for use of a PC USB port 6 Image Conversion Board A2 Addition of transmitting faxing functions requires the Image Conversion Board A2 7 USB Interface Board A3 Adds printing functions through local connection of PC USB Requires a UFR board 8 Super G3...

Page 49: ...t cover 10 Delivery cover 2 2 Copyboard cover 11 Lower left cover 3 Reader front cover 12 Rear left cover lower 4 Upper left cover small 13 Delivery cover 1 5 Center delivery tray 14 Rear left cover upper 6 Control panel 15 Upper left cover 7 Front cover 16 Upper cover 8 Cassette 1 17 Inside upper cover 9 Cassette 2 ...

Page 50: ...er 8 Right cover 2 Copyboard glass 9 Front right cover 3 Reader rear cover 10 Manual feed tray 4 Upper right cover small 11 Manual feed unit cover 5 Upper rear cover 12 Model right cover 6 Lower rear cover 13 Upper right cover 7 Rear right cover ...

Page 51: ...r 5 CCD unit 28 Duplex roller 2 6 Toner container 29 Intermediate transfer belt tension roller 7 Laser unit 30 Cassette 2 8 Primary transfer roller 31 Transfer cleaning unit 9 Registration detention unit 32 Fixing lower roller pressure roller 10 Manual feed pickup tray unit 33 Fixing upper roller fixing roller 8 7 6 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36...

Page 52: ...Pre registration roller 35 Internal delivery roller 13 Manual feed separation roller 36 Face up delivery roller 14 Re pick up roller 37 Delivery vertical path roll 15 Pickup vertical path roller 38 Delivery vertical path roller 2 16 Feed roller 39 Photopositive drum 17 Pickup roller 40 Developing cylinder 18 Separation roller 41 Drum unit 19 Pickup assembly 1 42 Charging roller 20 Pickup assembly ...

Page 53: ...wer Switch 0000 4260 Be sure to turn off the control panel power switch before turning off the main power switch When the Printer Is in Operation Fax Data Is Being Sent Received Be sure that the Execution Memory lamp on the control panel is OFF before touching the main power switch Otherwise the data being processed can be lost 1 Control panel power switch 3 Main power switch 2 Main power lamp Sta...

Page 54: ...ing Is Under Way Never turn off the main power switch or the control panel power switch If you turn off the main power switch while downloading is under way the machine may fail to operate F 1 9 ID Error 0 7 8 9 Execution Memory ON OFF ...

Page 55: ...ting dial 10 User mode key 2 Counter check key 11 Numeric keypad 3 Power Save Key 12 Execute Memory lamp 4 Control panel power switch 13 Error lamp 5 Touch pen holder 14 ID key 6 Clip holder 15 Clear key 7 Touch panel 16 Main power lamp 8 Reset key 17 Start key 9 Help key 18 Stop key ...

Page 56: ...alert ON OFF alert ON OFF job end ON OFF residual original ON OFF priority on text photo upon selection of auto color text photo inch input enable inch input ON OFF ON if 120 V paper type registration upon cassette auto selection copier printer box fax other registration paper type yes change power save mode 10 5 0 immediate recovery power consumption in sleep state little much select special tray...

Page 57: ...high average low gamma value at remote scan g1 0 g1 4 g1 8 g2 2 initialize common settings yes no Mode Description set date time if fax is installed 10 digit number auto sleep time 10 min 15 min 20 min 30 min 40 min 50 min 1 hr 90 min 2 hr to 3 hr to 4 hr change auto clear time 0 none 1 to 9 min 2 min set weekly timer 00 00 to 23 59 1 min increments shift to low power consumption mode 10 min 15 mi...

Page 58: ...ion setup transmission transmission results report only if error ON OFF communication control report auto print at 100 communications ON OFF print at specified time ON OFF setup fax fax transmission results report only if error ON OFF fax communication control report auto print at 40 communications ON OFF print at specified time ON OFF fax reception results report only if error ON OFF fax box rece...

Page 59: ...able set device info device name site of installation set network TCP IP setup IP address DNS PING command SINS LPD RAW IPP print off HTTP on IP address settings range NetWare setup AppleTalk setup SMB settings SNMB settings special port settings ON OFF spool function ON OFF start up time settings 0 to 300 sec 60 sec e mail i fax set transfer yes auto online offline shift auto online shift ON OFF ...

Page 60: ...ngs Yes No Mode Description common setup transmission function setup register sending party name 100 max register user abbreviation for FTP transmission permit non ASCII code on off clear error file ON OFF JPEG compression rate high standard low process transfer error file print always store print OFF number of retries 0 to 5 3 transmission function standard mode change read mode file contraction ...

Page 61: ...on user telephone number registration telephone number line type selection 120 230V push tone dial 10PPS 100V 20PPS 10PPS push tone volume control alarm 0 8 4 communication volume 0 8 4 fax setup transmission function setup ECM transmission ON OFF pause length set 1 15 sec 4 11 sec 3 6 sec auto redial on off number of redials 100V 1 15 2 230V 1 10 2 redial interval 2 99 min 2 redial at transmissio...

Page 62: ...l position 0 horizontal position 0 secure print deletion time 1 hr 2 3 6 12 24 time out time out time 5 to 300 sec 15 no post RIP printing yes no sorter no sort rotation sort rotation group transparency interleaf disable use blank paper use print paper set reception function common settings color mode auto switchover full color monochrome gradation setup gradation standard smooth 1 smooth 2 applic...

Page 63: ...e face of the copyboard glass and the back of the copyboard cover at least once a month Cleaning Procedure Using a cloth moistened with water or solution of mild detergent well wrung clean the face of the copyboard glass 1 and the back of the copyboard cover 2 then dry wipe the surfaces F 1 11 F 1 12 Mode Description register destination yes register name of destination yes register one touch butt...

Page 64: ...r the like 3 Check to see that the breaker switch shits to the OFF side and the power goes OFF F 1 13 4 Turn off the main power switch 5 Shift the breaker switch 1 to the ON side F 1 14 6 Turn on the main power switch 1 2 5 Safety 1 2 5 1 Safety of the Laser System 0000 4274 Laser Light in General Laser light can prove to be very harmful to the human body requiring full care About the Machine Lase...

Page 65: ...icated by a label obtained from the organization 1 2 5 3 Handling the Laser Assembly 0000 4276 Points to Note When Servicing the Area Around the Laser Optical System Do not put an object with a high reflectance e g screwdriver into the path of the laser light Do not wear a watch or ring during work They can reflect the laser light causing damage to your eyes The machinelaser light is red in color ...

Page 66: ...Dry 2 component Cassette pickup method Separation retard Multifeeder pickup method Simple retard Transfer method Intermediate transfer belt Transfer method primary transfer by charging roller Transfer method secondary transfer by charging roller Separation method Curvature separation static eliminator Drum cleaning method None Trasnsfer cleaning method Blade equalizing operation used Fixing method...

Page 67: ...uplex model unit prints min Paper size Cassette single sided Manual feeder single sided Side paper deck single sided Face down double sided Face up double sided B5 32 19 32 13 5 10 25 A5R 16 16 7 5 7 A4 32 19 32 13 5 10 25 STMT R 16 16 8 8 LTR 32 19 13 5 10 25 B5R 16 16 7 5 7 LTR R 16 16 7 5 7 A4R 16 16 7 5 7 LGL 16 14 6 5 5 5 B4 16 14 6 5 5 5 A3 16 13 6 5 5 5 279mm x 432mm 11 x 17 16 13 6 5 5 5 3...

Page 68: ...A5R 16 9 5 6 75 5 13 A4 16 9 5 16 6 75 5 13 STMT R 16 9 5 6 75 5 13 LTR 16 9 5 16 6 75 5 13 B5R 11 8 3 75 3 5 LTR R 11 8 3 75 3 5 A4R 11 8 3 75 3 5 LGL 9 5 7 3 25 2 75 B4 9 5 7 3 25 2 75 A3 8 6 5 3 25 2 75 279mm x 432mm 11 x 17 8 6 5 3 25 2 75 305mm x 457mm 12 x 18 7 5 6 5 3 25 2 75 A5 9 5 Jpn postcard 9 5 Tab paper 9 320mm x 450mm 12 6 x 17 7 9 5 unit prints min Paper size Cassette single sided M...

Page 69: ...ck Cassette Pedestal Duplexing Unit 2 Paper Size A5R yes yes no yes yes B5 yes yes yes yes yes B5R yes yes no yes yes A4 yes yes yes yes yes A4R yes yes no yes yes B4 yes yes no yes yes A3 yes yes no yes yes 279x432 mm 11x17 yes yes no yes yes 305x457 mm 12x18 yes yes no yes yes 320x450 mm 12 6x17 7 no yes no no no LGL yes no no yes yes LTR yes no no yes yes LTR R yes no yes yes yes STMT R yes no ...

Page 70: ...es yes yes yes recycled paper yes yes yes yes yes transparency 1 A4 LTR yes yes no yes no bond paper 1 no yes no no yes gloss paper 1 no yes no no no label paper 1 no yes no no no Japanese paper 1 no yes no no no tracing paper 1 no yes no no no tab paper 1 no yes no no no postcard no yes no no no 2 pane postcard no yes no no no 4 pane postcard no yes no no no 1 support limited to single sided prin...

Page 71: ... or less In standby 50 dB or less Power supply 100 V 120 V 230 V Power consumption maximum 1500 W or less if equipped with cassette pedestal In standby 100V 344W 120V 273W 230V 350W When equipped with all accessories Ozone Maximum 0 05 ppm or less Average 0 02 ppm or less Dimensions Width W 620 mm Depth D 786 mm Height H 1040 mm including cassette pedestal Weight Total 118 5 kg including duplex un...

Page 72: ... 0 611 Reduce IV 1 0 707 Reduce V 1 0 816 Reduce VI 1 0 865 Enlarge I 1 1 154 Enlarge II 1 1 224 Enlarge III 1 1 414 Enlarge IV 1 2 000 Enlarge V 1 4 000 Zoom 1 0 250 to 4 000 25 to 400 in 1 increments Reading resolution Main scanning direction 600 dpi Sub scanning direction 600 dpi Number of gradations Reading maximum 256 Main scanning direction 0 to 2 mm against 297 mm Sub scanning direction 0 t...

Page 73: ...Chapter 2 Installation ...

Page 74: ......

Page 75: ...ddress 2 23 2 4 Troubleshooting the Network 2 24 2 4 1 Troubleshooting the Network 2 24 2 4 2 Checking the Connection of the Network Cable 2 24 2 4 3 Making Checks Using a Loopback Address 2 24 2 4 4 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address 2 24 2 5 Checking the Images Operations 2 25 2 5 1 Checking the Images Operations 2 25 2 5 2 PASCAL Setting 2 28 2 5 3 Preventing Anti Condensation 2 29 2 6 R...

Page 76: ...s 2 59 2 12 2 Installation Procedure 2 60 2 12 3 Installing the Cassette Heater Kit to a Copier 2 61 2 12 4 Installing the Cassette Heater Kit to a 2 Cassette Pedestal X1 2 63 2 13 Replacing the Drum Unit 2 64 2 13 1 Preparing for the Work 2 64 2 13 2 Installation Procedure 2 65 ...

Page 77: ...er humidifier or refrigerator F 2 1 3 The site must not be near a source of fire or subject to dust or ammonium gas If exposed to direct rays of the sun provide curtains 4 The amount of ozone generated by the machine in operation is not of a level that would harm the health of individuals around it Some however may find its order unpleasant requiring good ventilation for the work place 5 Be sure t...

Page 78: ...Chapter 2 2 2 F 2 2 Without Options F 2 3 100 mm min 1110 mm 1225 mm 500 mm min 500 mm min 500 mm min 500 mm min 1120 mm 2000 mm 500 mm min 100 mm min 500 mm min ...

Page 79: ...Take care so that the machine will not be installed near a vent from which air is taken into the room 2 1 2 Site Space 0006 4577 1 Be sure the will be 10 cm or more between the machine and any wall and there will be enough space for operating the machine F 2 5 500 mm min 1120 mm 2210 mm 500 mm min 100 mm min 500 mm min 100 mm min 1110 mm 1225 mm 500 mm min 500 mm min 500 mm min ...

Page 80: ...h Accessories Installed F 2 6 With a Finisher M1 Side Paper Deck P1 and NEW Controller A1 Installed 500 mm min 1120 mm 2000 mm 500 mm min 100 mm min 500 mm min 500 mm min 1120 mm 2210 mm 500 mm min 100 mm min 500 mm min ...

Page 81: ...talling the machine and its accessories at the same item be sure to go through the work in the following sequence 1 Cassette Heater Kit A1 to the pedestal 2 2 Cassette Pedestal X1 or Plain Pedestal C1 3 Machine 4 Anti condensation heater 5 DADF K1 or copyboard cover 6 Cassette Heater Kit A1 to the machine 7 Card Reader D1 8 NE Controller A1 9 Deck heater 10 Side Paper Deck P1 11 Key Switch Unit A1...

Page 82: ...t or pickup feeder unit leading to image faults If such is the case leave the machine alone without unpacking for 1 hr or more before starting the work The term condensation refers to the phenomenon that occurs on a metal surface when it is brought from a cold to warm location as the result of rapidly cooled vapor It is seen as droplets of water on the metal surface 2 The machine weighs about 120 ...

Page 83: ...t the upper and lower cassettes and remove all tape then detach the holding plate 1 F 2 11 1 Drum unit Y M C K 1 pc each 1 pc each 10 Cable clamp round 6 pc 2 Toner cartridge Y M C K 1 pc each 11 Cable clamp angular 2 pc 3 Transfer cleaning unit 1 pc 12 Size plate label 2 pc 4 Secondary transfer outside roller unit 1 pc 13 User s Manual 1 pc 5 Delivery tray 1 pc 14 Installation Procedure 100 V mod...

Page 84: ...em to the appropriate index F 2 13 7 Attach the size label 2 to the cassette size plate 1 then fit it to the cassette F 2 14 8 Put paper in the cassette and put the cassette back into the machine 2 2 3 Connecting the Reader Unit 0000 4366 1 Remove the 2 mirror fixing screws 1 from the left side of the reader unit Be sure to store them away for possible future transport F 2 15 2 Connect the reader ...

Page 85: ... controller communication cable 4 in place F 2 17 F 2 18 2 2 4 Removing the Fixing Members from the Printer 0006 4646 1 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 1 from the left side of the machine F 2 19 2 Shift down the fixing roller releasing lever 1 to unlock the fixing roller then remove the releasing spacers 2 from the front and the rear These members will no longer be used F 2 20 ...

Page 86: ... two separate units printer and reader go through the following steps 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 from the printer unit and detach the center delivery tray 2 Save all for later F 2 23 2 Remove the face cap 1 Save it for later F 2 24 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the inside cover 2 Save it for later F 2 25 4 Remove the screw 1 and detach the upper right cover small 2 Save the screw for later put away...

Page 87: ...ater put away the cover F 2 27 6 Fit the included joint 1 in the hole in the machine s top as shown 2 locations at front and rear F 2 28 7 Fit it so that the sheet 1 attached to the joint plate is under the joint 2 F 2 29 Wrong The sheet is above the joint Place the included joint plate front rear 1 on the front rear joint F 2 30 front F 2 31 rear ...

Page 88: ...and rear F 2 32 front F 2 33 rear 9 Where the upper right cover small has been removed fit the positioning pin A for the bottom of the reader connection unit 1 F 2 34 10 Secure the reader connection unit 1 using the 2 included screws 2 F 2 35 11 Then use the included 2 screws 1 to further secure it in place F 2 36 12 Shift down the arm 1 of the reader connection unit by 90 deg C then hook it on th...

Page 89: ...e center delivery tray using the 2 previously removed screws F 2 41 15 Unpack the reader unit 16 Place the reader unit on the printer unit 7 to 8 cm displaced to the side temporarily F 2 42 17 Fit the included supports into the 2 holes in the bottom of the reader unit then tighten them firmly using a screwdriver so that they are fully fitted with the joints F 2 43 7 to 8cm ...

Page 90: ...ve all for later F 2 46 20 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the upper left cover 2 Save all for later F 2 47 21 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the reader left cover 2 Save all for later F 2 48 22 Hook the reader unit retainer 1 on the hole in the reader unit then while pushing it down from above secure it in place using the 2 included screws 2 F 2 49 ...

Page 91: ...all using the 2 previously removed screws F 2 52 25 Attach the reader left cover using the 2 previously removed screws F 2 53 26 Remove the 2 mirror fixing screws 1 from the left side of the reader unit Store away the removed mirror fixing screws for later i e for possible relocation of the machine F 2 54 27 Lift the reader unit slightly and push into the tip of the positioning pin 1 into the hole...

Page 92: ...ondary Transfer Outside Roller Unit 0006 4664 Do not touch the roller area of the secondary transfer outside roller 1 Open the package and open the cardboard used to protect the secondary transfer outside roller unit 2 Slide out the machine s fixing feeding unit 3 Picking the tabs at both ends of the secondary transfer outside roller 1 place the roller in the secondary transfer unit 2 inside the f...

Page 93: ...grounding terminal of power outlet iron rod buried 75 cm or more in ground terminal wired to specification F 2 62 2 2 8 Mounting the Transfer Cleaning Unit 0000 4367 1 Open the front cover 2 Turn the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever 1 in the direction of the arrow F 2 63 3 Remove the waste toner container 1 F 2 64 4 Remove the screw 1 and remove the dummy transfer cleaning unit Be sure t...

Page 94: ...hift back the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever back to its initial position 2 2 9 Fitting the Toner Container 0000 4368 Each toner container has its specific position according to color viewing from the control panel and starting at the left Y M C and Bk Do not force the wrong container into place 1 Take out the toner container Y from the packing box 2 Take out the toner container Y from...

Page 95: ...the same way 2 2 10 Fitting the Drum Unit 0000 4369 1 Take out the drum unit Y from the packing box 2 Take out the drum unit H 1 from the packing bag then take out the drying agent silica gel F 2 70 3 Do not remove the protective cover It serves as a rail Pull out the pressure releasing hook 1 at the front and the rear F 2 71 4 Remove the anti interference sheet 1 F 2 72 5 Turn the intermediate tr...

Page 96: ...cover after fitting the drum cartridge While supporting the protective cover 2 with you hand push in the cartridge Y 3 thereby setting it in place Y M C and Bk starting from left F 2 76 9 When pulling out the sealing tape be sure to hold the drum cartridge with your hand so that the cartridge will not slip off Pull out the sealing tape 1 F 2 77 10 Fit the M C and Bk drum cartridges in the same way...

Page 97: ... Turn off the main power switch 3 Connect the network cable to the machine and turn on the main power switch 4 Inform the user s system administrator that the installation work is over and ask him her to set up the machine for use on the user s network 5 When network settings have been made turn off the control power switch and then turn off and then on the main power switch ...

Page 98: ...the following steps only if the machine is connected to a network If the user s network environment is based on TCP IP use the PING function to see that the Ethernet PCB has been correctly mounted and the network settings have been correctly made If the user s network environment is based on IPX SPX or AppleTalk on the other hand you need not make a PING based check 1 Make the following selections...

Page 99: ...twork environment to which the machine belongs 1 Inform the system administrator that you will be checking the connection to the network using PING 2 Check with the system administrator to find out the remote host address 3 Enter the remote host address you obtained in PING 4 If the indication is OK the machine is correctly connected to the network 5 If the indication is NG the machine is not corr...

Page 100: ... out whether the TCP IP settings of the machine are correct 1 Enter the loopback address 127 0 0 1 to PING if the machine indicates NG check the TCP IP settings of the machine once again and then execute PING once again if the machine indicates OK check the local host address 2 4 4 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address 0000 8238 The local host address is the IP address of the machine therefore...

Page 101: ... then make copies and check the images If a 2 cassette pedestal is used try cassette 3 4 to check images Check to be sure there is no abnormal noise Check to be sure that the images are free of faults at all default reproduction ratios Check to make sure that as many copies as are specified are made without a problem Check to make sure that the margin L2 to the front of the copies made with each o...

Page 102: ...ht front stay and loosen the screw 1 to adjust the position of the adjusting plate 2 Do the same for cassette 3 4 F 2 81 F 2 82 Making Adjustments for Cassette 2 3 Remove the grip 1 on the front right image L2 the margin to the front of the paper will decrease If the adjusting plate is moved to the right ...

Page 103: ...2 F 2 84 F 2 85 Check to make sure that the margin L1 along the leading edge of paper picked from each of the cassettes is 2 5 1 5 mm otherwise make the following adjustments 1 Make the following selections in service mode COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REGIST image L2 the margin to the front of the paper will decrease If the adjusting plate is moved to the right ...

Page 104: ...e screen 3 Make the following selections in service mode COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ S 4 Change the setting to adjust the shading position 2 5 2 PASCAL Setting 0000 4380 1 Make the following selections in service mode COPIER OPTION BODY PASCAL 2 Check to make sure that the setting is 1 3 Press the Reset key several times to end service mode 4 Make the following selections in user mode adjust clean au...

Page 105: ...19 If condensation is expected at the site of installation enable or disable the sleep mechanism on a monthly basis to prevent it Service Mode Category 2 COPIER OPTIONAL BODY SLPOFF01 to 12 Setting 0 enable sleep mode 1 disable sleep mode prevent condensation ...

Page 106: ...k before relocation Do not use the machine s grips when moving it over a step while it is on a pedestal otherwise the machine and the pedestal may separate Be sure to hold the pedestal 1 Fix the scanner in place using the scanner fixing screw 1 removed and stored at time of installation F 2 87 2 Be sure to put about 10 sheets of paper 1 over the copyboard glass F 2 88 1 ...

Page 107: ...ssing F 2 89 1 Card Reader D1 1 unit 2 Pan head screw small 1 pc 3 Binding screw M4 4 pc 2 7 2 Installation Procedure 0000 8502 1 Remove the face cap 1 and 2 screw 2 then detach the upper left cover small 3 F 2 90 2 Remove the 3 screws 1 from behind the upper left cover small and detach the inside cover 2 then attach it as shown by changing its orientation ...

Page 108: ...Chapter 2 2 32 F 2 91 F 2 92 3 When attaching be sure that a card may be inserted with the label on the face side Using the 4 included binding screws 1 mount the card reader 2 to the inside cover F 2 93 ...

Page 109: ...Making Settings If Net Spot Accountant NSA Is Used 0000 8503 1 Check to make sure that IDs from ID00000001 through ID00001000 i e if 1 is entered in COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CARD in service mode have been prepareed in user mode system control settings group ID control count control 2 Set up the following in user mode system control settings network settings TCP IP settings IP address IP address gat...

Page 110: ...been installed before starting the work 3 Be sure to disconnect its host machine s power plug before starting the work 4 Be sure to identify the screws by type length diameter and location 5 Be sure to prepare the appropriate settings data on a PC at the service station 1 Remove the 2 screws 2 and detach the upper cover 1 F 2 95 2 Connect the connector 3 of the power supply unit to the connector 4...

Page 111: ... 2 2 35 F 2 97 4 Connect the cable 7 to the connector J1511 8 of the host machine s power distribution PCB F 2 98 5 Secure the controller to the host machine s rear cover using the 4 included screws F 2 99 8 8 ...

Page 112: ... used to communicate with the host machine will be IPC F 2 101 8 If IC6 11 is found on the PCB shift bit 7 of the DIP switch SW2 12 to ON otherwise shift bit 7 of the DIP switch SW2 16 to OFF If IC6 11 is not found you need not mount it newly If you must mount or replace a ROM IC6 11 for upgrading the controller be sure to shift bit 7 of the DIP switch SW2 12 to ON 9 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 L...

Page 113: ... the modem to 16 dBm ON OFF sets the signal transmission level of the modem to 14 dBm OFF ON sets the signal transmission level of the modem to 12 dBm ON ON ets the signal transmission level of the modem to 10 dBm LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW2 12 11 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 1 2 3 4 5 ...

Page 114: ... that LED5 17 red goes ON F 2 105 SW3 3 OFF sets it to OFF at all times SW3 4 ON sets the line setting to tone pulse OFF sets the line setting to dial pulse SW3 5 ON sets the dial pulse speed to 20 pps OFF sets the dial pulse speed to 10 pps SW3 6 not used Notation Setting Description LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 SW2 14 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED...

Page 115: ...h SW4 16 so that LED5 17 red goes OFF indicating the end of RAM initialization F 2 106 T 2 4 SW2 bits Setting SW2 1 OFF SW2 2 OFF SW2 3 ON SW2 4 ON SW2 5 OFF SW2 6 OFF SW2 7 See step 8 SW2 8 OFF SW2 bits Setting SW2 1 OFF SW2 2 OFF SW2 3 OFF SW2 4 ON LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW2 15 16 17 ...

Page 116: ...9 If the controller s extension function is to be used connect the existing telephone or fax to the connector TEL 2 and then connect the telephone line to the connector LINE 19 F 2 108 SW2 5 OFF SW2 6 ON SW2 7 See step 8 SW2 8 OFF SW2 bits Setting LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW2 18 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 ...

Page 117: ...e LED goes OFF when the transmission ends successfully otherwise it will start to flash When the push switch SW4 16 is pressed while LED6 22 is flashing a transmission will be initiated once again If the push switch SW1 23 is pressed while LED6 22 is flashing the ongoing transmission will be cancelled F 2 110 18 Check to make sure that the communication with its host machine is normal Connect the ...

Page 118: ...gs label 26 on the top cover and record the switch settings 21 Secure the upper cover 1 using 2 screws 2 When doing so check to make sure that the power unit cable is secured to the cable guide inside the controller and is not trapped by the upper cover 1 F 2 113 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 SW2 25 2 1 2 26 ...

Page 119: ...0 8545 Open the shiping box and check to make sure that none of the fllowing is missing F 2 114 1 Original base 1 pc 2 Stepped screw M4 2 pc 3 Washer 2 pc 2 9 2 Installation Procedure 0000 8546 1 Fit the 2 included washers 1 and 2 stepped screws 2 to the upper right cover F 2 115 ...

Page 120: ... tray into top and lower parts and hook the cut off 2 of the reinforcing plate of the original tray upper 1 on the stepped screw 3 previously fitted F 2 116 3 Fit it to the original tray lower 1 together with the original tray upper F 2 117 ...

Page 121: ...0 8548 Open the shipping box and check to make sure that none of the following is missing F 2 118 1 Key switch unit 1 pc 2 Control key 1 pc 3 Binding screw M4 1 pc 2 10 2 Installation Procedure 0000 8550 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the host machine s center delivery tray 2 F 2 119 ...

Page 122: ...Cut out the excess 1 of the upper right cover F 2 120 3 Slide out the manual feed tray then remove tha screw 1 and detach the middle right cover F 2 121 4 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the upper right cover 2 F 2 122 ...

Page 123: ... 6 Connect the connector 1 F 2 124 7 Attach the upper right cover using the 2 previously removed screws 8 Attach the printer upper right cover using the 2 right screws 2 10 3 Making Checks After Installation 0006 0710 1 Start service mode 2 Make the following selections in service mode and enter COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL KEY 3 Turn OFF and then ON the host machine ...

Page 124: ...e points to note indicated on the next page Open the shipping box and check none of the following is missing F 2 125 T 2 5 1 Reader heater 1 pc 6 Wire saddle 2 pc 2 Fuse PCB unit 1 pc 7 Gounding cord 100v model only 1 pc 3 RS tightening screw M4x8 5 pc 8 Power supply label 100v model only 1 pc 4 Power cable for wall outlet 1 pc 5 Power cable for copier outlet 1 pc ...

Page 125: ...llwing 1 Turn off the control panel power switch 2 Turn off the main power switch 3 Disconnect the power cable for wall outlet F 2 126 1 Remove the copyboard cover If an ADF is used you need not remove it 2 Release the 2 cable clamps 1 to free the reader power cable F 2 127 ON O FF 1 OFF 2 OFF 3 Pull out 1 ...

Page 126: ...communication cable 4 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the reader unit rear cover 2 Save it for later F 2 128 5 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the face plate Save it for later F 2 129 6 Using the 2 included screws 1 mount the fuse PCB unit 2 F 2 130 ...

Page 127: ...onnector 2 of the interface PCB F 2 131 8 When removing the copyboard glass take care not to touch the glass face and the white plate found on the back of it Dirt can cause black lined in the images If soiled clean it with lint free paper moistened with alcohol F 2 132 ...

Page 128: ...ove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right glass retainer 2 then detach the copyboard glass 3 F 2 134 9 When moving the No 1 mirror base be sure to hold it by the bend A of the cut out in the mirror stay shown in the figure F 2 135 ...

Page 129: ...pter 2 2 53 F 2 136 Move the No 1 mirror base 1 fully to the right F 2 137 When shifting the mirror unit be sure not to touch the mirror unit Otherwise clean it with lint free papaer moistened with aocohol ...

Page 130: ...ing so be sure that the harness guide of the heater is above the harness of the fuse PCB F 2 138 11 Using 2 included screws 1 secure the longer segment silver coloured of the Reader heater 2 F 2 139 12 Holding it where indicated A shift the No 1 mirror base to the left F 2 140 2 1 ...

Page 131: ...right to secure then fit the harness band 2 F 2 141 14 Secure the shorter segment black of the Reader heater 1 using 2 included screws 2 To do so insert a screwdriver through the hole in the lens cover F 2 142 15 Connect the connector 1 of the Reader heater to the connector 2 of the fuse PCB unit F 2 143 ...

Page 132: ...h the reader unit rear cover 18 When removing the copyboard glass be sure not to touch the glass face or the white plate found on its back Dirt can cause black lines in the images If soiled clean it with lint freee paper moistened with alcohol F 2 144 Attach the copyboard glass F 2 145 ...

Page 133: ...power cable If a pedestal 2 cassette pedestal or plain pedestal is connected to the host machine remove the 2 face stickers 1 from the upper rear cover F 2 146 Connect the power cable for wall outlet 1 and the inlet terminal and the outlet terminal topmost of the 3 of the pedestal then secure it in place using the 2 included wire saddles F 2 147 1 ...

Page 134: ...nnect the power cable for wall outlet 1 to the inlet terminal F 2 148 Only if 100v Model 21 Remove the screw 1 found under the inlet terminal and connect the included gounding wire 1 i e if no pedestal is connected F 2 149 22 Attach the included power supply label 1 to the reader unit rear cover F 2 150 ...

Page 135: ...e starting the work be sure to turn off the host machine for installation keep in mind the points to note indicated on the next page Open the shipping box and check to make sure that none of the following is missing Cassette Heater Kit A1 F 2 151 T 2 6 Cassette Heater Unit 24 F 2 152 T 2 7 1 Heater PCB unit 1 pc 2 RS tightening screw M4 2 pc 1 Heater unit 1 pc 2 Binding screw M4 1 pc ...

Page 136: ...ontrol panel power switch 2 Turn off the main power switch 3 Disconnect the power cable for power outlet F 2 153 MEMO The Cassette Heater Kit A1 is designed for installation to either a copying machine or a 2 cassette pedestal using the same installation procedure The following steps images are based on installation to a 2 cassette pedestal ON O FF 1 OFF 2 OFF 3 Pull out ...

Page 137: ...ach the heater PCB unit cover 1 attached to the rear side plate of the copier F 2 154 3 MEMO When detaching the heater unit PCB cover slide it upward while pulling the stop 1 mounted to the cover toward the front F 2 155 4 Before installing the heater PCB unit be sure to turn off the host machine Using the 2 included RS tightening screws 1 mount the heater PCB unit 2 and connect the 2 connectors 3...

Page 138: ...eater PCB unit F 2 157 6 When mounting the heater unit be sure to securely fit the 3 protrusions and check to make sure there is no gap Fit the 3 protrusions 2 of the heater unit 1 into the slits in the base plate match the holes and secure it to the cassette heater unit using the included binding screw 3 ...

Page 139: ... unit cover using the previously removed screw 2 12 4 Installing the Cassette Heater Kit to a 2 Cassette Pedestal X1 0006 0720 1 Slide out both cassettes from the cassette pedestal Hereafter go through the same steps used for the installation to a copier ...

Page 140: ... 1 Take out the drum unit Y from its shipping box then take out the drum unit Y 1 from its packing bag and also take out the drying agent 2 F 2 160 2 Do not remove the protective cover It serves as a rail for installation Pull out the releasing hook 1 at the front and the rear F 2 161 ...

Page 141: ...lation Procedure 0006 0728 Before starting the work be sure to perform the following on the host machine in the order indicated 1 Turn of the control panel power switch 2 Turn off the main power switch 3 Pull out the power cable for wall outlet F 2 163 ON O FF 1 OFF 2 OFF 3 Pull out ...

Page 142: ... the direction of the arrow F 2 164 2 Turn the open closed lever of the drum unit cover 1 counterclockwise by 90 deg to open the drum unit cover F 2 165 3 Match the dent 1 found in the back of the drum unit cover and the protrusion 2 on the bottom face of the protective cover and secure it in place F 2 166 4 ...

Page 143: ...its are Y M C and Bk starting from the left F 2 167 5 When pulling out the sealing tape be sure to hold the drum unit in place so that the drum unit will not slide out Pull out the sealing tape 1 F 2 168 6 Set the drum units for other colors M C Bk in the same way 7 Close the drum unit cover and shift the open close lever back to its initial position 8 Shift the intermediate transfer unit releasin...

Page 144: ...Chapter 2 2 68 ...

Page 145: ...Chapter 3 Basic Operation ...

Page 146: ......

Page 147: ...ontents 3 1 Construction 3 1 3 1 1 Functional Construction 3 1 3 1 2 Arrangement of Major PCBs 3 2 3 2 Basic Sequence 3 5 3 2 1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power On 3 5 3 2 2 Basic Sequence of Operations 3 7 ...

Page 148: ......

Page 149: ...m Y 11 Duplexing feed 4 Photosensitive drum M 12 Cassette 1 5 Photosensitive drum C 13 Cassette 2 6 Photosensitive drum Bk 14 Cassette 3 7 Delivery system 15 Cassette 4 8 Fixing system 7 8 2 10 11 12 13 14 15 3 4 5 6 Original exposure system Reader control system 1 9 General control system Main controller Printer control system DC controller Side paper deck option Image formation system Pickup fee...

Page 150: ...5 Control panel CPU PCB 17 HV2 SUBY PCB 6 BD detection PCB 18 HV4 PCB 7 Laser driver PCB 19 HV3 PCB 8 DC controller PCB 20 Fuse PCB Reader unit Printer unit 1 2 3 4 6 7 9 10 11 20 22 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 21 23 8 5 flat cable PCB to PCB connector J115 J114 J607 J608 J511 J1209 J1303 J1301 J303 J206 J601 J203 J204 J205 J102 J103 J307 J64 J441 J53 J153 J155 J154 J158 J58 J69 J50 J59 J60 J74 J54 J9...

Page 151: ...ontroller are connected as follows F 3 3 9 Main controller PCB sub 21 Heater control PCB 10 Main controller PCB main 22 DC power supply PCB 1 11 Drive PCB 23 DC power supply PCB 2 12 Duplex driver PCB 1 4 13 2 12 8 5 6 7 9 10 11 3 Flat cable signal PCB to PCB connector J1303 J1204 J1342 J1203 J1201 J1202 J1207 J1205 J1206 J1301 J1210 J1318 J1513 J1507 J1213 J1400 ...

Page 152: ...f signals 1 Main controller PCB sub 8 Ethernet board 2 SRMA PCB 9 UFR board or Open I F 3 HDD 10 USB interface board or TokenRing board 4 Main controller PCB main 11 Image conversion board 5 Image memory SDRAM 512 MB standard 12 Power distribution PCB 6 Image memory SDRAM 512 MB expansion 13 Differential PCB 7 Boot ROM Fiash ROM ...

Page 153: ...SSTBY scanner standby From when shading correction ends until the Start key is turned on or the main power switch is turned off WMUPR warm up rotation From when the surface temperature of the fixing roller reaches 90 deg C until it reaches 190 deg C i e the drive system has started up and in addition bias adjustment and image stabilization correction control are under way PSTBY printer standby Fro...

Page 154: ...fixing roller must have reached 190 C Starts here if when the main power is turned ON the surface temperature of the fixing roller is 90 C or more Printer unit Reader unit if less than 100 C if 100 C or higher 1 discharge current control 1 discharge current control 2 ATVC control 2 ATVC control 3 ATR control 3 image position control 4 SALT Dmax control 5 image position correction 6 SALT Dhalf cont...

Page 155: ...ess on the Start key SCFW While an originals is being read scanner forward SCRV While the scanner is returning to the home position after the original is read scanner in reverse PSTBY print standby While the machine is ready to review a print request signal PINTR printer initial rotation From when a print request signal is received until the image leading signal is sent PRINT Until all toner is tr...

Page 156: ...ing the main heater or the sub heater according to the difference in the readings of the main thermistor TH1 and the sub thermistor TH2 control at 190 C 1 1 ITOP signal Used to stabilize rotation Bk 2 5 sec Y M C 3 5 sec Image formation ready timing Start key ON Toner container motor M20 to 23 Y M C Bk Developing motor M12 to 15 Y M C Bk Cassette 1 pickup motor M6 Cassette 1 pickup solenoid SL3 Pr...

Page 157: ...ng bias Primary charging roller Cassette 1 pickup motor M6 Cassette 1 pickup solenoid SL3 Laser ON Pre registration motor M9 Registration motor M8 Fixing motor M24 Fixing main heater H1 Fixing sub heater H2 Fixing heat retention heater H3 1 1 1 The machine uses the main heater or the sub heater for temperature control according to the difference in the readings of the main thermistor TH1 and the s...

Page 158: ...Chapter 3 3 10 ...

Page 159: ...Chapter 4 Basic Operations As a Printer ...

Page 160: ......

Page 161: ...ctional Construction 4 1 4 2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry 4 2 4 2 1 Arrangement of Major PCBs 4 2 4 2 2 DC Controller PCB 4 4 4 3 Basic Sequence 4 5 4 3 1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power On 4 5 4 3 2 Basic Sequence of Operations 4 7 ...

Page 162: ......

Page 163: ...up control 4 Photosensitive drum M 12 Duplex feeder 5 Photosensitive drum C 13 Cassette 1 6 Photosensitive drum Bk 14 Cassette 2 7 Delivery system 15 Cassette 3 8 Fixing system 16 Cassette 4 7 8 2 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 3 4 5 6 Original exposure system Reader control system 1 10 General control system Main controller Printer control system DC controller Side paper deck option Image formation system P...

Page 164: ...2 BD detection PCB 12 HV2 PCB 3 Laser driver PCB 13 HV2 SBU PCB 4 DC controller PCB 14 HV4 PCB 5 Main controller PCB sub 15 HV3 PCB Printer unit 2 3 5 6 7 16 18 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 19 4 1 J115 J114 J607 J608 J511 J1209 J1303 J1301 J64 J441 J53 J153 J155 J154 J158 J58 J69 J50 J59 J60 J74 J54 J90 J95 J1501 J1502 J1508 J1509 J3 J5 J75 J92 J131 J102 J100 J105 J814 flat cable PCB to PCB connector ...

Page 165: ...m ITB motor 17 Heater control PCB 8 Duplex driver PCB 18 DC power supply PCB 1 9 High voltage unit 19 DC power supply PCB 2 10 HV1 PCB 1 Main controller PCB sub 8 Ethernet board 2 SRAM PCB 9 UFR board or Open interface board 3 HDD 10 USB interface board TokenRing board or USB application interface board 4 Main controller PCB main 1 4 13 2 12 8 5 6 7 9 10 11 3 J1204 J1342 J1203 J1201 J1202 J1207 J1...

Page 166: ...control signals sent to D A converter 3 3V 5V Retains various data parameters for image formation margin color displacement laser adjustment value etc Retains settings data e g service mode SRAM IC30 IC12 IC25 IC15 J100 IC14 IC48 IC43 IC42 IC41 IC40 IC24 IC1018 IC1019 IC1016 IC1017 BAT IC27 IC49 24 VDC 15 VDC 5 VDC 3 3 VDC Stores firmware Flash ROM Laser activation control Converts signals from CP...

Page 167: ...n WMUP warm up While the drive system is at rest and in addition until the surface temperature of the fixing roller reaches 90 deg C WMUPR warm up rotation After the drive system starts up and in addition bias adjustment is under way PSTBY printer standby While the machine is ready for a copy print request signal ...

Page 168: ...fixing roller must have reached 190 C Starts here if when the main power is turned ON the surface temperature of the fixing roller is 90 C or more Printer unit Reader unit if less than 100 C if 100 C or higher 1 discharge current control 1 discharge current control 2 ATVC control 2 ATVC control 3 ATR control 3 image position control 4 SALT Dmax control 5 image position correction 6 SALT Dhalf cont...

Page 169: ...r ON 1 1 1 The machine executes temperature control using the main heater or the sub heater according to the difference in the readings of temperature between the main thermistor TH1 and the sub thermistor TH2 controlled to 190 C 1 1 ITOP signal Used to stabilize rotation Bk 2 5 sec Y M C 3 5 sec Image formation ready timing Start key ON Toner container motor M20 to 23 Y M C Bk Developing motor M1...

Page 170: ...ment motor Bk M15 Developing basis Primary charging roller Cassette pickup motor M6 Cassette pickup solenoid SL3 Laser activation Pre registration motor M9 Registration motor M8 Fixing motor M24 Fixing main heater H1 Fixing sub heater H2 Fixing heat retention motor H3 1 1 1 The machine uses the main heater or the sub heater for temperature control according to the difference in the readings of tem...

Page 171: ...Chapter 5 Main Controller ...

Page 172: ......

Page 173: ...nctions 5 22 5 6 5 Flow of Image Data for Fax Reception Functions 5 23 5 6 6 Flow of Image Data for PDL Functions 5 24 5 7 Parts Replacement Procedure 5 25 5 7 1 Main Controller PCB main 5 25 5 7 1 1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 5 25 5 7 1 2 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 5 25 5 7 1 3 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 5 25 5 7 1 4 Removing the Controller Box Cover 5 25 5 7 1 5 Removing the...

Page 174: ...Upper Rear Cover 5 33 5 7 5 3 Removing the Controller Box Cover 5 33 5 7 5 4 Removing the Ethernet Board 5 33 5 7 6 Differential PCB 5 34 5 7 6 1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 5 34 5 7 6 2 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 5 34 5 7 6 3 Removing the Controller Box Cover 5 34 5 7 6 4 Removing the Differential PCB 5 34 5 7 7 Power Distribution PCB 5 35 5 7 7 1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 5 35 5 7 ...

Page 175: ...TokenRing board or USB interface board connection PCI slot Image memory J1201 IC1012 IC1015 LSI LSI J1202 J1203 J1204 J1207 J1205 J1206 IC1018 IC1003 Flash ROM for boot program 512 MB standard 256 MB expanded Ethernet board connector slot for support of 10BASE T 100BASE Tx IDE hard disk 40 GB f or support of ultra TA 66 connector IC1029 Main controller PCB main PCI slot for connection of USB appli...

Page 176: ...oller indicated with shading F 5 3 Main controller PCB main Main controller PCB sub DC controller PCB HDD Reader unit Printer unit system control memory control printer output image processing Image memory SDRAM Retention of service mode settings HDD control information SRAM board Reader input image processing Accessory boards Boot ROM ...

Page 177: ...oing to the printer and memory 5 2 2 Main Controller PCB 0000 4284 Main Controller PCB main T 5 1 Main Controller PCB sub T 5 2 IC No Description IC1012 CPU system control network controller PCI bus controller serial communications controller ROM RAM controller IC1015 image input output and image processing IC1003 1018 image processing control of output image data to printer unit IC1029 HDD contro...

Page 178: ... the HDD service mode settings data Partition Description DOSDEV stores multipurpose data FSTDEV stores image data DOSDEV2 stores thumbnail display data image data FSPTDEV stores image data DOSDEV3 temporarily stores multipurpose file e g PDL spool PDLDEV stores PDL related files e g font stored firmware ICC Profile PDL color correction information file DOSDEV4 stores user data address book transf...

Page 179: ... as a whole HDD BOOTDEV Language language module controls LCD indication HDD BOOTDEV RUI language module controls remote UI HDD BOOTDEV BOOT starts up the machine BootROM DIMM G3FAX controls G3FAX G3FAX board DIMM Dcon controls the DC controller DC controller PCB soldered in place Rcon controls the reader controller reader controller PCB soldered in place HDD FSTDEV DOSDEV2 DOSDEV DOSDEV3 PDLDEV D...

Page 180: ...Chapter 5 5 6 F 5 5 Main controller PCB DC controller PCB RCON DCON BOOT Reader controller PCB HDD G3Fax board G3FAX BOO BOOTDEV TDEV BOOTDEV SYSTEM Language RUI ...

Page 181: ...ning off the power can cause a fault E602 on the HDD 5 3 2 Startup Sequence 0000 4286 Boot ROM Area Self Diagnosis Program When the main power is turned on the CPU on the main controller PCB executes the start up sequence In the course of the sequence the state of the image memory SDRAM and the HDD is checked and an error code will be indicated if a fault is detected Boot Program When the self dia...

Page 182: ...e memory SDRAM CPU HDD System area Image area BootROM Self diagnos is program Boot program Access to the program at time of execution Main controller PCB main Self Diagnosis Program Is Under Way Image memory SDRAM CPU HDD System area Image area BootROM Main controller PCB main Self diagnos is program Boot program access to program at time of execution flow of system program Systems software Boot P...

Page 183: ...The machine cannot find BOOTDEV at time of start up Action Turn off the main power Check the 2 types of cable power IDE coming from the HDD then turn the power back on At this time check to see that the HDD is rotating and it is supplied with power 02 The machine cannot find the system software of the main controller main CPU in BOOTDEV 06 The machine cannot find the system software for the main c...

Page 184: ...tarting the work xxyy 0801 FF01 Action 02 There is a file system error Action xxyy 0702 Action Ask the user to collect address book data transfer settings and user mode data using RUI before starting the work if xxyy 0802 FF02 Action 03 There is an HDD contact fault or an OS system error Action Turn off the main power Check the 2 types of cable power IDE coming from the HDD then turn the power bac...

Page 185: ... turn on the main power while holding down the 1 and 7 keys then make the following selections and press the OK key COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DOWNLOAD 2 Execute DOSDEV4 formatting using the SST 3 Turn off and then on the main power 11 21 The HDD has poor contact Action Turn off the main power Check the 2 types of cable power IDE coming from the HDD then turn the power back on At that time check to se...

Page 186: ...2 Execute the following COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM HD CLEAR Make these selections and press the OK key 3 Turn off and then on the main power H 1 Turn off the main power and turn on the main power while pressing the 1 and 9 keys In response the machine will automatically start its recovery program and the control panel will turn completely black 2 When the screen has turned white turn off and then on t...

Page 187: ...Chapter 5 5 13 DOSDEV4 4 user data address book data transfer settings system software BOOTDEV DOSDEV5 5 unselected 0 HDD Format Partition CHK TYPE Data items that will be lost ...

Page 188: ... Flow of Images 0000 4288 The following diagram shows the flow of images in relation to the machine s various functions F 5 9 SEND FAX PullScan E Mail SEND FAX PDL Print BOX PC Original Copy A A A Print output Scan Image data Other iR machine ...

Page 189: ...ntroller PCB sub Reader input image processing block DC controller PCB HDD Reader unit Printer unit JPEG conversion enlargement reduction rotation color space conversion binary processing resolution conversion CPU communications control memory access control IC10 IC1012 IC1015 IC1003 IC1018 Processes the image data read by the reader unit Processes image data from IC1015 for output to the printer ...

Page 190: ...ader unit Edge emphases Smoothing Framing Blanking Frame erasing RG phase correction Input γ correction Input direct mapping Black text identification ACS identification Image signal generation See through prevention BE Bk generation monochrome mode IC1015 Processing that takes the place of conventional input masking executes color correction for the CCD s RGB filters Applicable to monochrome mode...

Page 191: ...t processing F 5 12 Main controller PCB sub Main controller PCB main RGB 24 4 Reader unit Image area signal Resolution conversion Enlargement reduction Rotation Color conversion Binary processing SDRAM HDD PC PDL input JPEG compression JPEG compression JPEG decompression JPEG decompression IC1012 IC1015 RGB 24 IC1003 IC1018 C M Y Bk For fax transmission ...

Page 192: ...CMYK 24 4 Background removal AE Bk generation F value adjustment Color balance correction Output direct mapping Framing Blanking RGB to CMY conversion Output λ correction Optimum screen selection Smoothing If ACS identifies the original as being black and white the Bk signal is generated here if color passed through For the text area UCR processing The LUT for correction is generated using PASCAL ...

Page 193: ...000 4296 The following shows the flow of image data when copier functions are used F 5 14 RGB 24 RGB 24 SDRAM HDD Reader unit Main controller PCB sub Main controller PCB main DC controller PCB image area signal JPEG compression Rotation Color conversion JPEG decompression Magnification ...

Page 194: ... The following shows the flow of image data when Box functions are used F 5 15 RGB 24 RGB 24 SDRAM HDD Reader unit Main controller PCB sub Main controller PCB main DC controller PCB image area signal JPEG compression JPEG decompression Decompression conversion Rotation ...

Page 195: ...w of image data for SEND functions F 5 16 RGB 24 RGB 24 SDRAM HDD Main controller PCB main Main controller PCB sub Reader unit Image conversion board for B Wimage image area signal Rotation Resolution conversion JPEG compression JPEG decompression Ethernet board Binary processing MMR compression ...

Page 196: ...is the flow of image data for fax transmission functions F 5 17 RGB 24 RGB SDRAM HDD Main controller PCB main Main controller PCB sub Reader unit Image conversion board Fax board image area signal JPEG decompression MMR compression JPEG compression Resolution conversion Rotation Binary processing ...

Page 197: ... Data for Fax Reception Functions 0000 4300 The following is the flow of image data for fax reception functions F 5 18 SDRAM HDD DC controller PCB Main controller PCB main Resolution conversion Rotation Image conversion board Fax board ...

Page 198: ...in controller PCB main Main controller PCB sub PS Printer Server Unit C1 UFR board Option interface board DC controller PCB SDRAM Printer unit Printer output image processing block Reader unit IC1003 IC1018 JPEG compression IC1015 IC1012 HDD JPEG decompression LIPS data CMYK CMYK RGB RGB RGB PC LIPS GDI UFR Display list data PS PS data ...

Page 199: ...ve the 8 screws 1 and detach the DC controller PCB cover 2 F 5 20 When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover When attaching the cover take care so that the cut off will not come into contact with the latch of the flat cable Otherwise the flat cable can come loose F 5 21 5 7 1 4 Removing the Controller Box Cover 0000 4310 1 Disconnect the connector J1512 1 from the power distribution PCB and free t...

Page 200: ...the flat cable 2 and disconnect the connector 3 then detach the HDD 4 F 5 23 5 7 1 6 Removing the Hard Disk Mounting Plates 0000 4312 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the 2 hard disk mounting plates 2 F 5 24 5 7 1 7 Removing the Ethernet Board 0000 4313 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the Ethernet board 2 together with its mounting plate F 5 25 2 Removing the 2 screws 1 and detach the Etherne...

Page 201: ...ews 1 and detach the UFR board 3 from its mounting plate 2 F 5 28 5 7 1 9 Removing the SRAM PCB 0000 4315 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the SRAM PCB 2 F 5 29 5 7 1 10 Removing the Main Controller PCB sub 0000 4316 1 Disconnect all connectors from the PCB and remove the flat cable 1 F 5 30 2 Remove the 7 screws 1 and remove the main controller PCB sub 2 F 5 31 ...

Page 202: ...use the image memory SDRAM 1 PCB and the boot ROM 2 from the old PCB on the new main controller PCB main F 5 34 F 5 35 5 7 2 Main Controller PCB sub 5 7 2 1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 0000 4321 1 Remove the upper rear cover 5 7 2 2 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 0000 4322 1 Removing the left rear upper cover 5 7 2 3 Removing the Controller Box Cover 0000 4323 1 Disconnect the connector J151...

Page 203: ...take full care against damage by static discharge Moreover do not subject the HDD to impact 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 and the flat cable 2 and disconnect the connector 3 then detach the HDD 4 F 5 37 5 7 2 5 Removing the Hard Disk Mounting Plates 0000 4325 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the 2 hard disk mounting plates 2 F 5 38 ...

Page 204: ... Main Controller PCB sub 0000 4327 1 Disconnect all connectors from the PCB and remove the flat cable 1 F 5 40 2 Remove the 7 screws 1 and remove the main controller PCB sub 2 F 5 41 5 7 2 8 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB sub 0000 4329 Be sure to use the SRAM PCB 1 from the old PCB on the new main controller PCB sub 2 F 5 42 ...

Page 205: ...static discharge Moreover do not subject the HDD to impact 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 and the flat cable 2 and disconnect the connector 3 then detach the HDD 4 F 5 44 5 7 3 4 Removing the SRAM PCB 0000 4334 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the SRAM PCB 2 F 5 45 5 7 3 5 When Replacing the SRAM PCB 0000 4335 When the SRAM PCB is replaced all data in its memory will be lost file related user mode rela...

Page 206: ...x will be lost and obtain his her consent 5 7 4 UFR Board 5 7 4 1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 0000 4338 1 Remove the upper rear cover 5 7 4 2 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 0000 4339 1 Removing the left rear upper cover 5 7 4 3 Removing the Controller Box Cover 0000 4340 1 Disconnect the connector J1512 1 from the power distribution PCB and free the harness from the wire saddle 2 then remove...

Page 207: ...troller Box Cover 0000 4345 1 Disconnect the connector J1512 1 from the power distribution PCB and free the harness from the wire saddle 2 then remove the 6 screws 3 and detach the main controller cover 4 F 5 49 5 7 5 4 Removing the Ethernet Board 0000 4346 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the Ethernet board 2 together with its mounting plate F 5 50 2 Removing the 2 screws 1 and detach the Ether...

Page 208: ...ft rear upper cover 5 7 6 3 Removing the Controller Box Cover 0000 4350 1 Disconnect the connector J1512 1 from the power distribution PCB and free the harness from the wire saddle 2 then remove the 6 screws 3 and detach the main controller cover 4 F 5 52 5 7 6 4 Removing the Differential PCB 0000 4351 1 Remove the flat cable 1 F 5 53 2 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the differential PCB 2 ...

Page 209: ...Remove the upper rear cover 5 7 8 2 Removing the Controller Box Cover 0000 4358 1 Disconnect the connector J1512 1 from the power distribution PCB and free the harness from the wire saddle 2 then remove the 6 screws 3 and detach the main controller cover 4 F 5 56 5 7 8 3 Removing the HDD 0000 4359 Points to Note When Removing the HDD When removing the HDD be sure to take full care against damage b...

Page 210: ...the machine has started up perform the following in user mode Make the following selections user mode system control settings group ID control count control then check to see that IDs from 00000001 through 00001000 have been prepared Make the following selections user mode system control settings network settings TCP IP settings IP address then set up IP address gateway address and subnet mask Mak...

Page 211: ...r Box Cover 0000 8192 1 Disconnect the connector J1512 1 from the power distribution PCB and free the harness from the wire saddle 2 then remove the 6 screws 3 and detach the main controller cover 4 F 5 58 5 7 9 3 Removing the Controller Fan 0000 4302 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 4 screws 2 then detach the controller fan 3 F 5 59 ...

Page 212: ...Chapter 5 5 38 ...

Page 213: ...Chapter 6 Original Exposure System ...

Page 214: ......

Page 215: ...he Size of Originals 6 10 6 3 4 1 Outline 6 10 6 3 4 2 Points of Detection original size 6 11 6 3 4 3 Outline of Detection Operations 6 11 6 4 Parts Replacement Procedure 6 14 6 4 1 Copyboard Glass 6 14 6 4 1 1 Removing the Copyboard Glass 6 14 6 4 1 2 After Replacing the Copyboard Glass 6 14 6 4 2 Exposure Lamp 6 15 6 4 2 1 Removing the Copyboard Glass 6 15 6 4 2 2 Removing the Reader Left Cover ...

Page 216: ...8 6 4 9 1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 6 28 6 4 9 2 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open Closed Sensor Mounting 6 28 6 4 9 3 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open Closed Sensor Cover 6 29 6 4 9 4 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open Closed Sensor 6 29 6 4 10 Scanner HP Sensor 6 29 6 4 10 1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 6 29 6 4 10 2 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open Closed Sensor Mounting 6 29 6 4 10 3 R...

Page 217: ... Lens lens array single focus fixed Enlargement reduction zoom in copyboard cover mode 100 in ADF mode 100 in main scanning direction image processing in the controller unit in sub scanning direction image processing in the controller unit Scanner drive control No 1 No 2 mirror mount control by a pulse motor M1 Scanning lamp 1 activation control by an inverter circuit Activation control 2 detectio...

Page 218: ...nal size sensor AB Inch Anti condensation heater Available as option only for 100 230V model Scanning lamp LA1 Reader controller PCB Interface PCB Scanner HP sensor Fuse PCB Copyboard cover open closed sensor Scanner motor Original Copyboard glass w integrated white plate No 1 mirror Lens CCD No 1 mirror base No 2 mirror base No 2 mirror No 3 mirror White plate Image leading edge Start position Ho...

Page 219: ...se Scanner motor M1 Scanner HP sensor PS2 No 2 mirror base Light blocking plate Scanning lamp LA1 forward reverse No 1 mirror base Scanner motor M1 Scanner HP sensor SR2 No 2 mirror base Light blocking plate Scanning lamp LA1 forward reverse ...

Page 220: ...ntrol J308 Inverter PCB Scanning lamp LA1 To DF To printer main controller CCD unit Scanner motor M1 Scanner motor drive control Scanner HP sensor Copyboard cover open closed sensor Reader controller PCB Interface PCB J203 J202 J210 IC7 IC5 CPU IC16 J201 DF J204 J207 J205 J206 J208 IC14 Original size sensor CCD unit Inverter PCB DC24V DC15V DC5V DC3 3V Printer unit Scanner motor Not used Original ...

Page 221: ...on Reverse Forward Forward ON to stabilize lamp intensity CCD output gain adjustment for color original CCD output gain adjustment for black and white original No 1 mirror base position Original size HP sensor 2 The scanner is moved to the scanner size detection position 1 The main power switch is turned on The scanner is moved to the shading position Start position Shading position Image leading ...

Page 222: ...correction for 1st sheet Shading correction for 2nd sheet 1 The Start key is pressed The scanner moves to the shading position 2 After shading correction the scanner moves to the start position 3 The scanner scans the original 4 The scanner moves to the shading position 5 After shading correction the scanner moves to the start position 6 The scanner moves to the start position No 1 mirror base pos...

Page 223: ...otor and controls the direction speed of its rotation 2 Scanner HP Detection Signal indicates that the No 1 mirror base is in the home position 3 Copyboard Cover Detection Signal identifies the state open closed of the copyboard cover Copyboard cover open closed sensor PS1 1 2 3 Reader controller PCB Interface PCB No 1 mirror base Scanner motor M1 Scanner HP sensor PS2 No 2 mirror base Light block...

Page 224: ... The scanner is moved at the following speed to suit the selected mode in full color copy mode 117 mm sec in black and white copy black and white SEND mode 234 mm sec full color SEND mode 234 mm sec 300 dpi or less 117 mm sec more than 300 dpi Reader controller PCB Motor driver Interface PCB 24V 15V J306 A A B B CPU 1 2 3 4 6 5 J308 J202 Scanner motor M1 1 1 Scanner motor control signal Start posi...

Page 225: ...nning direction is at 100 at all times and the reproduction ratio is changed through data processing in the main controller 6 3 2 3 Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Sub Scanning Direction 0000 4392 In copyboard cover mode and ADF mode reading in sub scanning direction is at 100 at all times and the reproduction ratio is changed through data processing in the main controller 6 3 3 Controlling the...

Page 226: ...n failure i e activation error caused by lack of intensity E220 lamp activation error at power on Indicates a fault in the inverter PCB reader controller PCB or scanning 6 3 4 Detecting the Size of Originals 6 3 4 1 Outline 0000 4397 The machine identifies the size of originals with reference to the combinations of the outputs of reflection type sensors and the intensities of the CCD measured at s...

Page 227: ...base at original detection position xenon lamp OFF original sensor 2 The copyboard cover is opened No 1 mirror base at original detection point xenon lamp OFF original sensor OFF Original sensor 1 Original detection position3 Original detection position4 Original detection position1 Original detection position2 B5 A4 B5R A4R B4 A3 CCD original detection position Original detection position 1 Origi...

Page 228: ...he machine turns on the xenon lamp for main scanning direction and checks the reflected light by the CCD at 4 points For sub scanning direction the machine efers to the outputs of original sensors 4 The copyboard cover is fully down The machine monitors the outputs of the sensors for 5 sec after the copyboard cover sensor has identified a closed state If there is no change in the level the machine...

Page 229: ... B4 A4R A4 B5 B5R None Original sensor 1 CCD detection position 1 2 3 4 AB configuration Original size 11 X 17 LGL LTRR LTR None Original sensor 1 CCD detection position 1 2 Inch configuration change absent change present Original sensor 2 ...

Page 230: ...ind it The presence of dirt will cause lines in the images If dirt is found be sure to remove it using lint free paper moistened with alcohol F 6 18 F 6 19 3 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right glass retainer 2 then detach the copyboard glass 3 F 6 20 6 4 1 2 After Replacing the Copyboard Glass 0000 4401 Enter the value indicated on the copyboard glass F01 301 04 using the following service...

Page 231: ... dirt will cause lines in the images If dirt is found be sure to remove it using lint free paper moistened with alcohol F 6 22 F 6 23 3 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right glass retainer 2 then detach the copyboard glass 3 F 6 24 6 4 2 2 Removing the Reader Left Cover Reader Right Cover Reader Front Cover 0000 4424 1 Remove the reader left cover reader right cover and reader front cover 6 4...

Page 232: ...dle 2 of the frame F 6 27 3 Slide the No 1 mirror base 1 until it matches against the cut off in the frame then remove the 3 screws 2 and remove the scanning lamp 3 F 6 28 Points to Note When Attaching the Scanning Lamp To mount the scanning lamp route the harness 1 of the lamp unit through the white guide 2 of the No 2 mirror base and then the black harness guide 3 thereafter connect the connecto...

Page 233: ...ot to touch the surface of the glass or the white plate behind it The presence of dirt will cause lines in the images If dirt is found be sure to remove it using lint free paper moistened with alcohol F 6 30 F 6 31 3 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right glass retainer 2 then detach the copyboard glass 3 F 6 32 6 4 3 2 Removing the CCD Unit Cover 0000 8292 1 Remove the 8 screws 1 and detach t...

Page 234: ...edge position COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ Y Use it to adjust the CCD read start cell position COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ S Use it to enter an adjustment value for the scanner shading measurement point COPIER ADJUST CCD W PLT X Use it to enter white level data for the standard while plate COPIER ADJUST CCD W PLT Y Use it to enter white level data for the standard white plate COPIER ADJUST CCD W PLT Z Us...

Page 235: ...or displacement correction value for sub scanning direction COPIER ADJUST CCD FCCDU RG Use it to enter a color displacement correction value for sub scanning direction COPIER ADJUST CCD FCCDU GB Use it to enter a color displacement correction value for sub scanning direction 6 4 4 Interface PCB 6 4 4 1 Removing the Copyboard Glass 0006 0814 1 Open the ADF or the copyboard cover 2 Points to Note Wh...

Page 236: ...r cable F 6 40 2 Disconnect the reader controller communications cable 3 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the reader rear cover 2 F 6 41 6 4 4 3 Removing the Interface PCB 0000 4403 Points to Note Before Removing the Interface PCB Without detaching the motor unit mark its position of the rear side plate using a scriber A F 6 42 1 Remove the 2 RS tightening screws and 4 binding screws 2 then detach...

Page 237: ...e PCB unit 4 F 6 45 6 4 5 Inverter PCB 6 4 5 1 Removing the Copyboard Glass 0000 8287 1 Open the ADF or the copyboard cover 2 Points to Note When Removing the Copyboard Glass When removing the copyboard glass take care not to touch the surface of the glass or the white plate behind it The presence of dirt will cause lines in the images If dirt is found be sure to remove it using lint free paper mo...

Page 238: ... connector 1 and remove the flat cable then remove the screw 3 and detach the inverter PCB 4 F 6 50 6 4 6 CCD Unit 6 4 6 1 Removing the Copyboard Glass 0000 8284 1 Open the ADF or the copyboard cover 2 Points to Note When Removing the Copyboard Glass When removing the copyboard glass take care not to touch the surface of the glass or the white plate behind it The presence of dirt will cause lines ...

Page 239: ...ch the copyboard glass 3 F 6 53 6 4 6 2 Removing the CCD Unit Cover 0000 8285 1 Remove the 8 screws 1 and detach the CCD unit cover 2 F 6 54 6 4 6 3 Removing the Original Size Detection Unit 0000 8286 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 4 screws 2 then detach the original size detection unit 3 ...

Page 240: ...ted on the label attached to the unit in service mode COPIER ADJUST CCD CCDU RG GB Use it to enter the image position correction value dependent on the CCD unit 6 4 7 Fuse PCB option 6 4 7 1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 0000 4411 1 Remove the 2 cable clamps 1 to free the reader power cable F 6 57 2 Disconnect the reader controller communications cable 3 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the reade...

Page 241: ...6 7342 1 Open the ADF or the copyboard cover 2 Points to Note When Removing the Copyboard Glass When removing the copyboard glass take care not to touch the surface of the glass or the white plate behind it The presence of dirt will cause lines in the images If dirt is found be sure to remove it using lint free paper moistened with alcohol F 6 61 F 6 62 3 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right...

Page 242: ...d detach the reader rear cover 2 F 6 65 6 4 8 3 Removing the Interface PCB 0000 4420 Points to Note Before Removing the Interface PCB Without detaching the motor unit mark its position of the rear side plate using a scriber A F 6 66 1 Remove the 2 RS tightening screws and 4 binding screws 2 then detach the I F PCB cover 3 F 6 67 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and disconnect the 2 connectors 2 then detach...

Page 243: ...base 2 F 6 70 2 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the scanner motor 2 F 6 71 6 4 8 5 Mounting the Scanner Motor 0000 4422 1 Fit the scanner motor from the machine s rear and attach the belt 1 on the pulley 2 of the motor unit through the space front side vacated by the copyboard glass F 6 72 2 With the belt on the pulley pull the motor unit 1 as far as the marking A you have drawn with a scriber th...

Page 244: ... 6 4 9 Original Cover Sensor 6 4 9 1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 0000 4404 1 Remove the 2 cable clamps 1 to free the reader power cable F 6 74 2 Disconnect the reader controller communications cable 3 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the reader rear cover 2 F 6 75 6 4 9 2 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open Closed Sensor Mounting 0006 7327 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the sensor base 2 F 6 ...

Page 245: ...e the copyboard cover open closed sensor 1 F 6 78 6 4 10 Scanner HP Sensor 6 4 10 1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 0000 4408 1 Remove the 2 cable clamps 1 to free the reader power cable F 6 79 2 Disconnect the reader controller communications cable 3 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the reader rear cover 2 F 6 80 6 4 10 2 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open Closed Sensor Mounting 0000 4409 1 Remove ...

Page 246: ...pen the ADF or the copyboard cover 2 Points to Note When Removing the Copyboard Glass When removing the copyboard glass take care not to touch the surface of the glass or the white plate behind it The presence of dirt will cause lines in the images If dirt is found be sure to remove it using lint free paper moistened with alcohol F 6 83 F 6 84 3 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the right glass ret...

Page 247: ...etection unit 3 F 6 87 6 4 11 4 Removing the Original Size Sensor 0000 4428 1 While freeing the claw at the edge detach the original size sensor 1 F 6 88 6 4 12 Reader Heater option 6 4 12 1 Removing the Copyboard Glass 0000 8933 1 Open the ADF or the copyboard cover 2 Points to Note When Removing the Copyboard Glass When removing the copyboard glass take care not to touch the surface of the glass...

Page 248: ...screws 1 and detach the right glass retainer 2 then detach the copyboard glass 3 F 6 91 6 4 12 2 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 0000 4415 1 Remove the 2 cable clamps 1 to free the reader power cable F 6 92 2 Disconnect the reader controller communications cable 3 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the reader rear cover 2 F 6 93 1 ...

Page 249: ...tion of the arrow F 6 94 When moving the mirror base be sure to hold the cut up A on the mirror stay F 6 95 F 6 96 2 Remove the 3 screws used to secure the Reader heater 1 in place and remove the harness band 3 F 6 97 3 Shift the mirror base to the farthest right and free the harness guide 1 at one location then while shifting it to the left detach the harness guide and detach the Reader heater 2 ...

Page 250: ...Chapter 6 6 34 ...

Page 251: ...Chapter 7 Image Processing System ...

Page 252: ......

Page 253: ...7 1 2 Functional Construction of the PCBs 7 1 7 2 Analog Image Processing 7 2 7 2 1 Outline 7 2 7 2 2 CCD Drive 7 3 7 2 3 CCD Output Gain Correction and Offset Correction 7 3 7 2 4 A D Conversion of CCD Putput 7 3 7 3 Digital Image Processing 7 4 7 3 1 Outline 7 4 7 3 2 Shading Correction 7 4 ...

Page 254: ......

Page 255: ...functions T 7 2 1 CCD image sensor number of lines 3 RGB 1 line each number of pixels 7350 size of pixel 9 3X9 3 um 2 Shading Correction shading adjustment executed in service mode shading correction executed for each copy 1 CCD P PCB CCD drive analog image processing A D conversion 2 Reader Controller PCB shading correction CCD AP PCB Reader controller PCB CCD A D conversion Shading processing An...

Page 256: ...ve 2 CCD output gain correction offset correction 3 CCD output A D conversion CCD RGB 1 line each Analog image signal Analog image processing gain correction offset correction A D conversion CCD drive control A12V A5V J101 J204 J204 J102 J205 CCD control signal Gain correction data Digital image signal Reader controller PCB Odd numbered pixel Even numbered pixels Odd numbered pixel Even numbered p...

Page 257: ... video signals from the CCD are modified so that the rate of its amplitude is of a specific level gain correction it is also modified so that its output voltage in the absence of incident light is a specific level offset correction 7 2 4 A D Conversion of CCD Putput 0000 4439 The odd numbered and even numbered analog video signals after correction are further converted into 10 bit digital signals ...

Page 258: ... which a target value is determined in service mode or shading correction in which a target value is determined for each scan of the original Shading Adjustment In shading adjustment the density of the standard white plate is measured and the result is stored in memory as density data the data is then computed to obtain the target value for shading correction Shading Correction Shading correction ...

Page 259: ...Chapter 7 7 5 F 7 5 CCD output Density of original Standard white plate Characteristics before correction Target value Measurement taken Characteristics after correction White ...

Page 260: ...Chapter 7 7 6 ...

Page 261: ...Chapter 8 Laser Exposure ...

Page 262: ......

Page 263: ...trolling the Laser Scanner Motor 8 10 8 3 3 1 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor 8 10 8 3 4 Controlling the Laser Shutter 8 10 8 3 4 1 Controlling the Laser Shutter 8 10 8 3 5 Correcting Image Displacement 8 11 8 3 5 1 Outline 8 11 8 3 5 2 Timing of Color Displacement Detection Correction 8 12 8 3 5 3 Detecting Correcting Color Displacement in Sub Scanning Direction 8 13 8 3 5 4 Detecting Correct...

Page 264: ......

Page 265: ...DC brush less Number of revolutions 23000 rpm approx Type of bearing Oil Polygon mirror Number of facets 4 facets f20 Control mechanisms Sync control main scanning direction sub scanning direction Light intensity APC control PWM control Color displacement correction reproduction ratio in main scanning direction displacement in main scanning direction Others scanner motor control laser shutter cont...

Page 266: ...ens corrects displacement of laser light coming from the guide mirror in main scanning direction displacement correction motor moves the corrective lens to correct displacement in main scanning direction BD detection PCB detects laser light as a BD signal BD mirror reflects the laser light in the direction of the BD detection PCB Displacement correction motor Photosensitive drum Polygon mirror Gui...

Page 267: ...BD mirror APC control PWM signal ON OFF control Main scanning direction correction control Laser scanner motor control Front cover Fixing feeder unit Manual feed unit PWMIC PWM control IC for control DC controller PCB Main controller PCB Image data Laser shutter control J117 J115 J117 J113 J129 J1216 J114 Y J116 M J118 C J120 Bk Main scanning direction sync control ...

Page 268: ...e printer side to generate the sync signal PTOP The machine uses the signal to generate the sub scanning direction signals Y TOP M TOP C TOP K TOP for individual colors and turns on the lasers of the corresponding colors F 8 4 PSTBY PSTBY PINTR LSTR PRINT Laser Y ON Laser M ON Laser C ON Laser Bk ON PTOP signal Y TOP signal M TOP signal C TOP signal Bk TOP signal Polygon motor Y M C Bk Used to sta...

Page 269: ... 8 6 CTR L2 CTR L1 CTR L0 Status of laser A Status of laser B 0 0 0 OFF OFF 0 0 1 OFF bias current applied APC control 0 1 0 APC control OIFF bias current applied 0 1 1 OFF bias current applied OFF bias current applied 1 0 0 ON for factory adjustment ON for factory adjustment 1 0 1 OFF bias current applied ON for factory adjustment 1 1 0 ON for factory adjustment OFF bias current applied 1 1 1 ON ...

Page 270: ...0 Y CRL 1 Y CRL 2 Image equivalent of 1 line Image equivalent of 1 line For laser B BD detection APC control ON For laser A BD detection APC control ON Polygon motor Y M C Bk PTOP signal Y TOP signal Laser ON Print request signal Start key ON Image formation enable timing PSTBY PINTR PRINT ...

Page 271: ... The machine is equipped with a laser unit that can generate 2 channels of laser light A and B These 2 channels of laser light are based on separate BD signals F 8 7 A B separation DC controller PCB BD for laser A BD for laser B BD signal J115 ...

Page 272: ...OP signal image formation start signal When the mechanism becomes ready for image formation the PTOP signal image formation start signal is generated turning on the individual lasers based on the signal BD detection PCB The BD signal is separated into 2 channels for laser A and laser B Clock signals sync signals based on the BD signal are generated Video signals are generated in keeping with the s...

Page 273: ...8 10 PSTBY PSTBY PINTR LSTR PRINT Laser Y ON Laser M ON Laser C signal Laser Bk ON PTOP signal Y TOP signal M TOP signal C TOP signal Bk TOP signal Laser scanner motor Y M C Bk Used to stabilize rotation 3 5sec Print request signal Start key ON Image formation enable timing Pixels Lowest intensity Highest intensity ON ON ON ON ON ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 27 28 29 30 3...

Page 274: ...e signal accelerate if ahead decelerates F 8 11 8 3 4 Controlling the Laser Shutter 8 3 4 1 Controlling the Laser Shutter 0000 4463 The laser light is turned off whenever a cover indicated that can let laser light to escape is opened front cover manual feed unit fixing feeder unit If any of the covers units is opened the operation voltage applied to the latest driver is turned off and in addition ...

Page 275: ...h caused by changes in temperature inside machine variation in magnification To correct the discrepancies in images the machine executes corrective control for image position it detects displacement in color by forming a pattern of a specific color on the transfer belt and reading it against the correct position DC controller PCB PWMIC Control IC J129 J127 PS5 PS28 PS23 Image signal Front cover op...

Page 276: ... Displacement in sub scanning direction corrects the write start position in sub scanning direction Reads the individual pattern of different colors using the pattern reader photo sensors Identifies displacement in color with reference to the pattern signals in the DC controller Forms an image position correction pattern on the transfer belt direct transfer Displacement in main scanning direction ...

Page 277: ... in response to changes in the environment when replacing the toner cartridge 8 3 5 3 Detecting Correcting Color Displacement in Sub Scanning Direction 0000 4466 The Y pattern is used as the reference The machine identifies the degree of color displacement in sub scanning direction with reference to the timing at which other color patterns are checked after a check on the Y pattern If the timing i...

Page 278: ...ed as the reference The machine identifies the angle in main scanning direction with reference to front rear discrepancies of individual colors F 8 17 F 8 18 If the machine detects any angle it turns on the main scanning direction angle correction motor located inside the laser unit front rear Displacement Angle ...

Page 279: ...Chapter 8 8 15 F 8 19 Main scanning direction angle correction lens Main scanning direction correction motor ...

Page 280: ...rrection pattern front and the length of the center line of the image position correction pattern front of individual colors and identifies the difference between the two as the degree of color displacement in main scanning direction When the machine detects color displacement it corrects the timing at which the laser is started in main scanning direction F 8 20 F 8 21 Displacement in main scannin...

Page 281: ...nter line of the Bk image correction pattern rear and the center line of the individual image position correction patterns rear and identifies the difference between the two as the change in the reproduction ratio in main scanning direction When the machine detects any change it corrects the timing at which the video signals are transferred to the laser unit F 8 22 Bk C M Y rear ...

Page 282: ...IC The machine changes the frequency of the image clock to change the reproduction ratio in main scanning direction Video signal for laser A Video signal for laser B Frequency control block Change in reproduction ratio in main scanning direction ...

Page 283: ...ve the 2 screws 1 and detach the reader ink unit cover 2 F 8 25 2 Remove the stepped screw 1 and detach the positioning pin 2 from the reader link unit F 8 26 3 Remove the face cap 1 and the screw 2 then while lifting the rear reader unit 3 slightly detach the upper inside cover 4 F 8 27 4 Shift the arm 1 of the reader link unit 90 deg to support the reader unit F 8 28 5 Disconnect the 8 connector...

Page 284: ...nect the connector 1 and remove the 4 screws 2 then detach the laser unit 3 F 8 31 MEMO When mounting the laser unit tighten the screws in diagonal sequence for proper balance 8 4 1 3 After Replacing the Laser Unit 0000 4291 If you have replaced the laser unit execute the following service mode COPIER FUNCTION LASER L ADJ 0 Use it to execute automatic adjustment of laser intensity ...

Page 285: ...Chapter 9 Image Formation ...

Page 286: ......

Page 287: ... correction 9 18 9 4 6 PASCAL Control image gradation 9 18 9 4 7 SALT Dmax Control development characteristics correction 9 19 9 4 8 SALT Dhalf Control development characteristics correction 9 20 9 4 9 Auto Gradation Control 9 22 9 5 Drum Unit 9 24 9 5 1 Outline of the Drum Unit 9 24 9 5 1 1 Outline of the Drum Unit 9 24 9 5 1 2 Controlling the Drive of the Drum Unit D UNIT 9 25 9 5 2 Developing A...

Page 288: ...3 9 8 2 1 Slide Out the Drum Unit 9 53 9 8 2 2 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 9 53 9 8 2 3 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 9 53 9 8 2 4 Removing the Controller Box Cover 9 53 9 8 2 5 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 9 54 9 8 2 6 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 9 54 9 8 2 7 Opening the Main Controller Box 9 54 9 8 2 8 Removing the DC Controller Mounting 9 55 9 8 2 9 Removing the Fixing Heat Dis...

Page 289: ...sfer Unit 9 73 9 8 10 2 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit 9 73 9 8 10 3 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Belt 9 74 9 8 10 4 Removing the Primary Transfer Roller 9 76 9 8 11 Secondary Transfer External Roller 9 77 9 8 11 1 Removing the Fixing Unit 9 77 9 8 11 2 Removing the Secondary Transfer External Roller 9 77 9 8 12 Secondary Transfer Internal Roller 9 78 9 8 12 1 Pressure Release of th...

Page 290: ...ounting 9 93 9 8 16 9 Removing the Toner Container Drive Unit 9 93 9 8 16 10 Removing the Toner Container Drive Assembly Upper Plate 9 93 9 8 16 11 Removing the Toner Container Motor 9 94 9 8 17 Waste Toner Feedscrew Case 9 94 9 8 17 1 Removing the Waste Toner Container 9 94 9 8 17 2 Removing the Transfer Cleaning Unit 9 95 9 8 17 3 Removing the Waste Toner Feedscrew Case 9 95 9 8 18 Pattern Reade...

Page 291: ...Contents ...

Page 292: ......

Page 293: ...Process speed 130 mm sec plain paper 65 mm sec thick paper special paper transparency Developing assembly Diameter of developing cylinder 16 mm Method of development dry 2 component Toner non magnetic negative S toner Detection of toner inside ATR sensor magnetic sensor developing assembly Starter held by drum unit Primary charging assembly Method of charging roller contact charging Diameter of ch...

Page 294: ...er supply control Toner container Detection of toner level in reference to number of rotations made by toner feedscrew Toner volume Y 490 g M 470 g C 470 g Bk 530 g Others Items of control by internal memory color of toner inside toner container data on life of toner container Inter mediate transfer unit Intermediae transfer belt ITB seamless Drive for belt through gears from drum ITB motor Feedin...

Page 295: ...ut PASCAL control to correct image gradation characteristics SALT Dmax control to correct development density maximum density characteristics SALT Dhalf control to correct development density gradation characteristics Auxiliary brushes Primary charging roller Developing cylinder Intermediate transfer belt Developing assembly Toner container Bk Photosensitive drum Primary transfer rollers Secondary...

Page 296: ...nsor Auxiliary charging Method of charging fur brush upstream downstream Upstream auxiliary brush AC component rating specifications range 200 Vp p Upstream auxiliary brush DC component rating specifications range 200 to 300 V standard 250 V Downstream brush DC component rating specifications range 700 to 800 V standard 750 V Voltage correction factor environment sensor Developing bias AC componen...

Page 297: ...00 V Voltage correction factor paper type environment sensor reading print mode Full color or monochrome mode Primary transfer 750V 0V 300V 0V 1800Vp p 450V 0V 1500Vp p 250V 0V 200Vp p 400V 0V 0V 2000V Downstream auxiliary brush Primary charging roller Upstream auxiliary brush Primary transfer roller Secondary transfer external roller Developing cylinder Full color Plain paper Normal temperature h...

Page 298: ...ible image Transfer block 4 5 6 moves the toner image to the ITB or paper Intermediate transfer belt ITB cleaning block 7 collects residual toner from the ITB Photosensitive drum cleaning block 8 9 10 collects residual toner from the photosensitive drum Y M C Bk 2 Laser beam exposure 1 Charging 9 Charging roller cleaning 8 Auxiliary charging 10 Toner collection 3 Development Photosensitive drum De...

Page 299: ...tial by the upstream auxiliary brush Transfer residual toner 3 Development block Primary transfer block Photosensitive drum cleaning block 1 1 reducing negative charges on toner removal of charges 2 evening out charge to a specific level 3 toner left behind from secondary transfer mix of positive and negative charges 2 ITB cleaning block Waste tone container Transfer residual toner Primary transfe...

Page 300: ...s been forced off and then on or after its front cover has been opened and then closed while an imaged is made Characteristics the same control timing is used for the Y M C and Bk drum units the machine takes about 80 sec before it enters PSTBY the machine executes image stabilization in the following order while it is warming up discharge current level control ATVC control Main power switch ON WM...

Page 301: ...ond ary transfer roller Scraping off toner by auxiliary brush Scraping off toner by auxiliary brush Start up sequence of the drum unit Y with surface temperature of fixing roller at 100 C or more Drum ITB motor M1 Exposure Y Charging DC bias Y Development motor Y Developing DC bias Y Developing AC bias Y Upstream auxiliary DC bias Y Upstream auxiliary AC bias Y Downstream auxiliary DC bias Y Prima...

Page 302: ... 9 3 5 After Replacing the Drum Unit D UNIT 0000 4483 When a new drum unit D UNIT has been installed Characteristics when a drum unit is fitted and the machine s front cover is closed the developing cylinder starts to rotate so that the developing cylinder may be coated evenly with developer the cylinder is rotated for 30 sec at the beginning if the drum unit is not new this sequence is not execut...

Page 303: ...veloping motor and drum ITB motor through gears For details see the appropriate sections color original full color mode sequence monochrome original for 3rd and subsequent copies prints after color page full color mode sequence for 4th and subsequent copies prints after color page monochrome sequence WMUPR Approx 120sec Y Drum Unit Initialization Sequence Approx 30sec Approx 120sec CNTR PSTBY New ...

Page 304: ...B Drum ITB motor Drum ITB motor drive signal Developing motor Toner drive motor DC controller PCB Toner container motor drive signal Developing motor drive signal HV1 1 each for YMCBk HV2 HV3 HV4 1 for YM 1 for CBk High voltage unit Secondary transfer high voltage unit Downstream auxiliary brush Upstream auxiliary brush Primary charging roller Photosensitive drum Secondary transfer external roller...

Page 305: ...es in toner density toner consumption Discharge Current Level Control to prevent faulty images in a high humidity environment correction of charging AC bias ATVC Control to ensure good transfer correction of transfer bias level PASCAL Control SALT Control to suit changes in image density and gradation correctionofcharging developing transferbias correction of image correction table Operation Disch...

Page 306: ...0 7 Cover 1 opened closed if fixing roller surface temperature 100 deg C 2 NO NO NO NO NO NO about 20 if fixing roller surface temperature 100 deg C YES YES YES YES YES YES about 240 7 Number of pages 10 cumulative output number of pages is 100 or more and less than 200 LSTR 3 YES YES YES NO YES 300 pages 9 NO about 30 50 cumulative output number of pages is 100 or more and less than 200 INTR 3 YE...

Page 307: ...ading for image position correction is 300 or higher image position correction is executed together with other image stabilization control mechanisms 10the counters used in relation to a specific number of pages are of the following 3 types used to set up discharge current level control ATVC control ATR control used to set up discharge current level control ATVC control ATR control SALT Dmax contr...

Page 308: ...nge the intervals of execution sessions for image stabilization control for standby Default at shipment upon RAM initialization 2 COPIER OPTION BODY ADJ LVL Use it to change the execution mode settings for image stabilization control for a specific number of pages Default at shipment upon RAM initialization 0 Cumulative output is 100 pages or more and less than 200 pages Cumulative output is 200 p...

Page 309: ...e same time permits collection of toner remaining from transfer to the developing assembly Operation 1 An AC bias is applied to the primary charging assembly the level of current occurring at the time is measured by the high voltage PCB HV1 SUB and is sent to the CPU on the DC controller PCB as feedback 2 The roller is charged using the AC charging bias corrected by the CPU If thick paper special ...

Page 310: ...ccurring in response to changes in temperature humidity or as the machine is used over time PASCAL Control for Half Speed The mechanism is used to correct the changes in the gradation characteristics that otherwise would occur when thick paper special paper or transparency is used The test print used for the mechanism is the same as the test print used for plain paper Description of Control Start ...

Page 311: ...est Print 3 It shows 64 gradations expressed by means of screening with a high number of lines which is suitable for the achievement of a high resolution and is therefore used when priority is placed on PDL resolution F 9 16 9 4 7 SALT Dmax Control development characteristics correction 0000 4492 This mechanism is used to stabilize the maximum resolution on the intermediate transfer belt ITB It is...

Page 312: ...tion characteristics that occur in response to the deterioration in developer or photopositive drum changes in temperature humidity and changes that occur as the machine is used over time Gradation Density Control for Half Speed The control mechanism is used to make up for the changes in the gradation in images when thick paper special paper or transparency is used When the mechanism is enabled in...

Page 313: ...ction table B C data processing V End Non AutomaticThe mechanism is executed when full correction or quick correction is under way in user mode COPIER OPTION BODY CAL SW Use it to change the conditions that initiate automatic control default 0 disable gradation density control for half speed F 9 18 SALT sensor Bk C M Y ...

Page 314: ...e machine knows the actual gradation characteristics based on the 64 gradation density data collected from the scanner Quick Correction The machine knows the actual gradation characteristics based on the 9 gradation density data Full correction Quick correction Description Start up Start up v v SALT Dmax control determines developing DC charging DC primary current levels SALT Dmax control determin...

Page 315: ...repares image correction table C v v End End Image correction table for use at time of image formation Image correction table A Table prepared by the result of including the contents of the table A to the result of compari son between image correction tables B and C Characteristics A test print must be printed and read by the machine The machine does not use print a test print Full correction Quic...

Page 316: ...oping assembly photosensitive drum auxiliary brush and charging mechanism As many as 4 units are used Y M C Bk and all of them have the same construction F 9 20 Downstream auxiliary brush Upstream auxiliary brush Primary charging roller Photosensitive drum Developing blade ATR sensor Developing cylinder Cleaning sheet Developing assembly ...

Page 317: ...ugh gears Charging roller Linked to photosensitive drum Photosensitive drum Drum ITB motor M1 driven through gears Auxiliary brush cleaning Drum ITB motor M1 reciprocating movement in sheet drum axial direction M M Drum ITB motor DC Cleaning sheet Primary changing roller Developing cylinder Development motor drive signal Auxiliary brushes Photosensitive drum Toner stirring screw ATR sensor Develop...

Page 318: ...r on the photosensitive drum collects toner from the photosensitive drum coming from upstream Developing blade serves to coat the developing cylinder with a uniform layer of developerserves to coat the developing cylinder with a uniform layer of developer Toner stirring screw stirs the toner and the developer inside the developing assembly thus charging the toner to a negative potential ATR sensor...

Page 319: ... the environment sensor SALT sensor changes the median voltage of the AC bias to adjust the image density a 1 Route of the Developing Bias F 9 23 High voltage unit HV1 Y J70 J71 J72 HV1 M J70 J71 J72 HV1 C J70 J71 J72 HV1 Bk J70 J71 J72 J76 HV2 J81 J82 HV1 SUB HV2 SUB J87 J91 J85 J86 J75 J77 J73 J79 AC DC bias for developing cylinder DC power supply unit 1kV 24V ...

Page 320: ...DC controller PCB J131 A J109 J131 B High voltage unit J75 J77 J73 J79 DEV_AC_CLK1_Y DEV_AC_CLK2_Y _M _M _C _C _K _K DEV_DC_CTRL_K DEV_VIN _C DEV_VIN _M DEV_VIN _Y DEV_VIN DEV_CLK A DEV_CLK B DEV_CLK C DEV_CLK A DEV_CLK B DEV_CLK C DEV_AC_CTRLT_Y M DEV_DC_CTRL_Y M DEV_MODE_Y M DEV_AC_CTRLT_C K DEV_DC_CTRL_C K DEV_MODE_C K Environment sensor SALT sensor control signal ...

Page 321: ... 9 25 Component Upstream auxiliary brush removes charge from the photosensitive drum in preparation for the next image formation session the latent static image from the previous session is removed charges the residual toner to a positive potential to increase the effects of charging by the downstream brush as part of the upcoming operation Downstream auxiliary brush charges the photosensitive dru...

Page 322: ...upstream auxiliary brush DC Component level of output suited to the reading of the environment sensor upstream downstream auxiliary brush High voltage unit HV1 Y J70 J71 HV1 M J70 J71 HV1 C J70 J71 HV1 Bk J70 J71 J76 J74 J78 HV4 C Bk J93 J94 HV4 Y M J93 J94 HV2 J81 J82 HV1 SUB HV2 SUB J87 J91 J85 J86 DC bias for upstream auxiliary brush DC bias for upstream auxiliary brush DC power supply unit 1kV...

Page 323: ...C J70 J71 HV1 Bk J70 J71 HV1 SUB J97 J98 J74 J78 DC controller PCB J131 A J131 B High voltage unit HV4 Y M J93 J94 Environment sensor SUB_UP_DC_CTRL_K C SUB_UP_AC_CTRL_K C SUB_UP_DC_CTRL_Y M SUB_UP_AC_CTRL_Y M SUB_UP_DC_CTRL_K C SUB_UP_AC_CTRL_K C SUB_UP_DC_CTRL_Y M SUB_UP_AC_CTRL_Y M HV4 C Bk J93 J94 control signal ...

Page 324: ...xiliary Brush Bias F 9 28 High voltage unit J76 HV2 J81 J82 HV1 SUB HV2 SUB J87 J91 J85 J86 J75 J77 J73 J79 HV1 Y J70 J71 J72 HV1 M J70 J71 J72 HV1 C J70 J71 J72 HV1 K J70 J71 J72 DC bias for downstream auxiliary brush DC power supply unit 1kV 24V ...

Page 325: ...nal F 9 29 Environment sensor HV1 Y J70 J72 HV1 M J70 J72 HV1 C J70 J72 HV1 Bk J70 J72 HV1 SUB J73 J75 J77 J79 J97 J98 DC controller PCB J131 A J131 B High voltage unit SUB_LO_CTRL_Y SUB_LO_CTRL_M SUB_LO_CTRL_C SUB_LO_CTRL_K SUB_LO_DC_CTRL_C K SUB_LO_DC_CTRL_Y M control signal ...

Page 326: ...he need for a cleaning mechanism for the photosensitive drum Component Primary charging roller 1 in preparation for the next image formation session the photosensitive drum is evenly charged to a negative potential 2 returns the toner changed to a negative potential to the photosensitive drum for collection in the developing assembly Primary charging roller cleaning sheet charges residual toner to...

Page 327: ...suited to discharge current control DC Component level of output suited to the reading of the environment sensor SALT sensor High voltage unit J76 HV2 J81 J82 HV1 SUB HV2 SUB J87 J91 J85 J86 J75 J77 J73 J79 AC DC bias for primary charging roller HV1 Y J70 J71 J72 HV1 M J70 J71 J72 HV1 C J70 J71 J72 HV1 Bk J70 J71 J72 DC power supply unit 1kV 24V ...

Page 328: ...V2 SUB J87 J88 DC controller PCB J109 High voltage unit J75 J77 J73 J79 CHRG_AC_CLK CH_CLK CHRG_AC _CLK CHRG_AC _CLK CHRG_AC _CLK CHRG_AC _CLK CHRG_AC_CTRL _Y M CHRG_AC_CTRL _C K CHRG_DC_CTRL _Y M CHRG_DC_CTRL _C K CHRG_DC_CTRL _Y CHRG_AC_CTRL _Y_SND _M _M_SND _C _C_SND _K _K_SND Environment sensor SALT sensor J98 J97 J131 A J131 B control signal ...

Page 329: ...33 9 6 2 Controlling the Toner Container Drive 0000 4504 T 9 37 F 9 34 Part Source of drive Remarks Stirring blade Toner container motor M20 to 23 driven through gars Toner feedscrew Toner container motor M20 to 23 driven through gears Stirring blade Toner feedscrew supplies toner from the container to the developing assembly Toner M20 M21 M22 M23 Toner stirring blade Toner container motor drive s...

Page 330: ... changes to identify the level of toner SALT Sensor photo sensor Description checks the sample toner formed on the intermediate transfer belt ITB at such times as programmed checks the density of the toner image after development Toner container Toner feedscrew rotation sensor photosensor Description checks the number of revolutions made by the toner feedscrew the amount of toner supplied to the d...

Page 331: ...s control of toner supply from the toner container to the developing assembly F 9 36 DC controller PCB SALT sensor ATR sensor Y M C Bk Feedscrew rotation sensor J126 J125 J129 J124 control signal T CRG_PULSE_Y M C K ATR_CTRL_Y M ATR_SIG_Y M ATR_CTRL_Y M ATR_SIG_Y M PATCH_P PATCH_S Developing assembly Toner container Y DC controller PCB J124 J126 Toner feedscrew Y drum unit M20 ATR sensor ...

Page 332: ...Transfer Unit secondary transfer external roller static eliminator feed guide F 9 37 9 7 1 2 Controlling the Drive of the Transfer Unit 0000 4508 T 9 39 Part Source of drive Remarks Drive roller Drum ITB motor M1 Intermediate transfer belt ITB Linked to drive roller Primary transfer roller Linked to ITB ITB cleaning blade ITB Primary transfer roller Secondary transfer internal roller Secondary tra...

Page 333: ...n through gears Tension roller Linked to ITB Waste toner feedscrew Tension roller driven through gears Part Source of drive Remarks ITB Primary transfer roller Drive roller Secondary transfer external roller Secondary transfer internal roller Waste toner feedscrew Tension roller Drum ITB motor M1 DC controller PCB J105 Drum ITB motor drive signal ...

Page 334: ...Transfer Bias output in keeping with the type of paper reading of the environment sensor color mode full color monochrome ATVC control e Route of the Primary Transfer Bias Bias Control Signal F 9 39 HV2 J83 J80 DC controller PCB J109 DC power supply unit High voltage unit HV2 SUB J89 J88 J91 Primary transfer roller Environment sensor 1_TR_CTRL_Y M C K TR1_CTRL_Y M C K 1kV 24V control signal DC bia...

Page 335: ... 40 DC bias for secondary transfer HV3 T801 J95 DC controller PCB J109 DC power supply unit HV2 SUB J90 J88 J91 Environment sensor Secondary transfer external roller High voltage unit Secondary transfer high voltage unit 2TR_CTRL_P N 2TR_SEL NCTL PCTL PSEN 1kV 24V control signal ...

Page 336: ...es a cleaning blade to clean the intermediate transfer belt ITB T 9 40 F 9 41 Cleaning belt remains in contact with the ITB at all times and used to scrape off toner from the ITB Scoop up sheet used to prevent fall of toner Cleaning blade Scoop up sheet Waste toner feedscrew ITB ...

Page 337: ...ds 2 after recovery from a jam 3 when a sample image or test pattern is formed as part of image stabilization control 9 7 3 3 Collecting Waste Toner 0000 4512 The machine uses the following mechanism to collect waste toner Waste Toner The waste toner is scraped off by the cleaning blade and is moved to the waste toner box by the waste toner feedscrew Waste Toner Box Full Detection The waste toner ...

Page 338: ...to lower the potential occurring on the back of paper thus facilitating the separation of paper from the ITB 2 Separate Auxiliary Mechanism Feed Guide It is used to prevent increases in the potential occurring on the back of paper because of friction used when it is moved to the fixing assembly It is used to prevent image faults caused by contact with the attraction plate Attraction Plate It is gr...

Page 339: ... Feed guide ITB Paper The eccentric arrangement of the 2 rollers causes the paper to separate by taking advantage of the rigidity of paper curvature separation Static eliminator Secondary transfer external roller Feed guide Attraction plate ...

Page 340: ... the connector J1512 1 from the power distribution PCB and free the harness from the wire saddle 2 then remove the 6 screws 3 and detach the main controller cover 4 F 9 44 9 8 1 5 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 0000 4618 1 Remove the 8 screws 1 and detach the DC controller PCB cover 2 F 9 45 When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover When attaching the cover take care so that the cut off wil...

Page 341: ...ntroller PCB and the main controller PCB F 9 47 2 Remove the 9 screws 1 of the main controller box F 9 48 F 9 49 3 Free the controller box from the hook A B at the top of the main controller box F 9 50 4 Engage the hook 1 found on the right side of the main controller box on the stay 2 of the machine and open it F 9 51 ...

Page 342: ...PCB 2 together with its base F 9 52 9 8 1 9 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan 0000 4622 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the fixing heat discharge fan 3 F 9 53 9 8 1 10 Removing the Machine Heat Discharge Fan 0000 4623 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fan duct 2 F 9 54 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the heat exhaust fan ...

Page 343: ...ess 3 from the cable clamp 4 F 9 56 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the main controller base 2 F 9 57 3 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the developing drive assembly 2 F 9 58 9 8 1 12 Removing the Lattice Connector Mounting 0000 4625 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and disconnect all connectors then detach the lattice connector Mounting 2 F 9 59 ...

Page 344: ...r 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 to detach the manual feed cooling fan duct 3 F 9 62 9 8 1 15 Removing the Drum ITB Motor Mounting 0000 4628 Points to Note When Removing the Drum ITB Motor Mounting To remove put your hand into the inside where you have slid out the manual feed unit then while holding down the swing plate 1 found to the rear of the drum drive unit remove from the machine s rear side p...

Page 345: ...t the Drum Unit 0006 7762 1 Open the front cover and slide out the drum unit to the front 9 8 2 2 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 0006 7769 1 Remove the upper rear cover 9 8 2 3 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 0000 4632 1 Remove the lower rear cover 9 8 2 4 Removing the Controller Box Cover 0000 4633 1 Disconnect the connector J1512 1 from the power distribution PCB and free the harness from the wire ...

Page 346: ...are so that the cut off will not come into contact with the latch of the flat cable Otherwise the flat cable can come loose F 9 69 9 8 2 6 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 0000 4635 1 Removing the left rear upper cover 9 8 2 7 Opening the Main Controller Box 0000 4636 1 Remove the 2 flat cables 1 used to connect the DC controller PCB and the main controller PCB F 9 70 2 Remove the 9 screws 1 of ...

Page 347: ...ok 1 found on the right side of the main controller box on the stay 2 of the machine and open it F 9 74 9 8 2 8 Removing the DC Controller Mounting 0000 4637 1 Disconnect all connectors from the PCB and free all harnesses from the cable clamps then remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the DC controller PCB 2 together with its base F 9 75 ...

Page 348: ... Heat Discharge Fan 0000 4639 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fan duct 2 F 9 77 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the heat exhaust fan unit 3 F 9 78 9 8 2 11 Removing the Developing Drive Unit 0000 4640 1 Disconnect the connector 2 of the developing motor 1 and free the harness 3 from the cable clamp 4 F 9 79 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the main controll...

Page 349: ...ve the 2 screws 1 and disconnect all connectors then detach the lattice connector Mounting 2 F 9 82 9 8 2 13 Removing the High Voltage Unit 0000 4642 1 Disconnect all connectors of the high voltage unit then remove the 5 screws 1 and detach the high voltage unit 2 F 9 83 2 Remove the 6 screws 1 and remove the base plate 2 then detach the high voltage unit 3 ...

Page 350: ...ve unit remove from the machine s rear side plate The drum drive unit is hooked on the protrusion from the rear side plate lift it slightly to detach F 9 85 1 Free the DC harness 1 found at the front of the drum ITB motor base from the cable clamp 2 F 9 86 2 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 and remove the 3 screws 2 then detach the drum ITB motor base 3 F 9 87 9 8 2 15 Removing the Drum Drive Unit 00...

Page 351: ...easing lever to unlock it 2 Slide out the manual feed unit 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the middle right cover 2 F 9 89 4 Release the escape lever 1 F 9 90 9 8 3 2 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0000 4527 1 While picking the tabs at the front and the rear slide out the intermediate transfer unit 1 then detach it by holding it by the indicated area 2 F 9 91 F 9 92 ...

Page 352: ... screw 1 and detach the transfer guide plate 2 F 9 95 4 Remove the 4 screws 1 at the rear and pull out the link plate rear 2 F 9 96 5 Fit the boss 1 on the frame at the rear into the recess A in the middle right cover so that the unit is upright F 9 97 6 Be sure that the rear link plate 1 is on the opposite of the middle right cover so that the intermediate transfer unit will not fall down F 9 98 ...

Page 353: ...t the secondary transfer internal roller is free of soiling If dirt is found clean it with alcohol Points to Note When Attaching the Intermediate Transfer Belt 1 Attach the intermediate transfer belt so that the marking on its surface is to the rear F 9 101 2 When fitting the belt place the unit in a low position so that the belt may be fitted from above and straight down F 9 102 3 Check to make s...

Page 354: ...el pin 6 gear butting spacer 7 bearing 8 and 2 E rings 9 F 9 104 2 At the front remove the following E ring 1 washer 2 bearing 3 E ring 4 washer 5 spring 6 washer 7 bearing 8 grounding plate 9 F 9 105 3 Remove the bearing 1 found at the rear and free the drive roller 2 from the cut off A of the frame found at the front F 9 106 Points to Note When Attaching When attaching the washer spring and wash...

Page 355: ...ox Cover 0000 4576 1 Disconnect the connector J1512 1 from the power distribution PCB and free the harness from the wire saddle 2 then remove the 6 screws 3 and detach the main controller cover 4 F 9 108 9 8 4 5 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 0000 4577 1 Remove the 8 screws 1 and detach the DC controller PCB cover 2 F 9 109 When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover When attaching the cover ...

Page 356: ...ontroller PCB and the main controller PCB F 9 111 2 Remove the 9 screws 1 of the main controller box F 9 112 F 9 113 3 Free the controller box from the hook A B at the top of the main controller box F 9 114 4 Engage the hook 1 found on the right side of the main controller box on the stay 2 of the machine and open it F 9 115 1 ...

Page 357: ...then detach the developer motor Bk 3 F 9 117 9 8 5 Developing Motor Y M C 9 8 5 1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 0006 7767 1 Remove the upper rear cover 9 8 5 2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 0006 7772 1 Remove the lower rear cover 9 8 5 3 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 0006 7716 1 Removing the left rear upper cover 9 8 5 4 Removing the Controller Box Cover 0000 4568 1 Disconnect the connector J...

Page 358: ...r When attaching the cover take care so that the cut off will not come into contact with the latch of the flat cable Otherwise the flat cable can come loose F 9 120 9 8 5 6 Opening the Main Controller Box 0006 7725 1 Remove the 2 flat cables 1 used to connect the DC controller PCB and the main controller PCB F 9 121 2 Remove the 9 screws 1 of the main controller box F 9 122 F 9 123 1 ...

Page 359: ...Mounting 0006 7744 1 Disconnect all connectors from the PCB and free all harnesses from the cable clamps then remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the DC controller PCB 2 together with its base F 9 126 9 8 5 8 Removing the Developing Motor Y M C 0000 4572 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the main controller base 2 F 9 127 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the develop...

Page 360: ... Remove the duplex open close guide 1 F 9 130 9 8 6 3 Removing the Secondary Transfer Unit 0000 4670 1 Remove the screw 1 at the front and detach the secondary transfer unit retainer 2 F 9 131 When removing the secondary transfer unit be sure to take care not to lose the tension spring 1 found behind it F 9 132 2 Hold the grips at the front and the rear and slide the front side to the right to pul...

Page 361: ...ight cover 2 F 9 134 4 Release the escape lever 1 F 9 135 9 8 7 2 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0000 4517 1 While picking the tabs at the front and the rear slide out the intermediate transfer unit 1 then detach it by holding it by the indicated area 2 F 9 136 F 9 137 9 8 8 Transfer Cleaning Unit 9 8 8 1 Removing the Waste Toner Container 0000 4646 1 Open the front cover and turn the int...

Page 362: ...4518 1 Open the front cover and turn the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever to unlock it 2 Slide out the manual feed unit 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the middle right cover 2 F 9 141 4 Release the escape lever 1 F 9 142 9 8 9 2 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0000 4521 1 While picking the tabs at the front and the rear slide out the intermediate transfer unit 1 then detach it b...

Page 363: ...2 F 9 145 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the varistor 2 F 9 146 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the transfer guide plate 2 F 9 147 4 Remove the 4 screws 1 at the rear and pull out the link plate rear 2 F 9 148 5 Fit the boss 1 on the frame at the rear into the recess A in the middle right cover so that the unit is upright F 9 149 ...

Page 364: ...ht or place it on paper to avoid damage After bending the transfer frame pull out the transfer belt 1 upward F 9 152 Check to make sure that the secondary transfer internal roller is free of soiling If dirt is found clean it with alcohol Points to Note When Attaching the Intermediate Transfer Belt 1 Attach the intermediate transfer belt so that the marking on its surface is to the rear F 9 153 2 W...

Page 365: ...e front cover and turn the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever to unlock it 2 Slide out the manual feed unit 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the middle right cover 2 F 9 156 4 Release the escape lever 1 F 9 157 9 8 10 2 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0000 4651 1 While picking the tabs at the front and the rear slide out the intermediate transfer unit 1 then detach it by holding it ...

Page 366: ... 2 F 9 160 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the varistor 2 F 9 161 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the transfer guide plate 2 F 9 162 4 Remove the 4 screws 1 at the rear and pull out the link plate rear 2 F 9 163 5 Fit the boss 1 on the frame at the rear into the recess A in the middle right cover so that the unit is upright F 9 164 ...

Page 367: ...ht or place it on paper to avoid damage After bending the transfer frame pull out the transfer belt 1 upward F 9 167 Check to make sure that the secondary transfer internal roller is free of soiling If dirt is found clean it with alcohol Points to Note When Attaching the Intermediate Transfer Belt 1 Attach the intermediate transfer belt so that the marking on its surface is to the rear F 9 168 2 W...

Page 368: ... over the edge of the sheet 1 at the rear while picking the edge 3 of the primary transfer roller 2 detach it upward F 9 171 Points to Note When Mounting the Primary Transfer Roller 1 Bend over the edge of the sheet 1 at the front and fit the edge 2 of the roller and then fit its rear side F 9 172 2 Check to make sure that the edge of the sheet 1 is on the inner side of the rib 2 1 2 A 2 2 A ...

Page 369: ...are not to touch the surface of the secondary transfer external roller Holding the tabs 1 at both ends remove the secondary transfer roller 2 F 9 175 1 If the white spacer 2 of the secondary transfer roller 1 becomes soiled with toner or the like the roller can fail to rotate causing lines Be sure to see to it that the spacer moves F 9 176 2 When mounting the roller 1 be sure that the edge of the ...

Page 370: ... Release of the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0000 4654 1 Open the front cover and turn the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever to unlock it 2 Slide out the manual feed unit 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the middle right cover 2 F 9 179 4 Release the escape lever 1 F 9 180 9 8 12 2 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0000 4657 1 While picking the tabs at the front and the rear slide out ...

Page 371: ... 2 F 9 183 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the varistor 2 F 9 184 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the transfer guide plate 2 F 9 185 4 Remove the 4 screws 1 at the rear and pull out the link plate rear 2 F 9 186 5 Fit the boss 1 on the frame at the rear into the recess A in the middle right cover so that the unit is upright F 9 187 ...

Page 372: ...the transfer frame pull out the transfer belt 1 upward F 9 190 Check to make sure that the secondary transfer internal roller is free of soiling If dirt is found clean it with alcohol Points to Note When Attaching the Intermediate Transfer Belt 1 Attach the intermediate transfer belt so that the marking on its surface is to the rear F 9 191 2 When fitting the belt place the unit in a low position ...

Page 373: ...ng block 2 at the rear F 9 194 3 Remove the E ring 1 gear 2 and bushing 3 F 9 195 4 Remove the E ring 1 and the bushing 2 at the front then remove the secondary transfer internal roller 3 F 9 196 Points to Note When Attacing the Secondary Transfer Internal Roller When Attaching the bushing at the front be sure to fit the bushing 2 while avoiding the spring 1 found on the inner side of the frame 1 ...

Page 374: ...ng the Upper Rear Cover 0000 4582 1 Remove the upper rear cover 9 8 13 3 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 0000 4583 1 Remove the lower rear cover 9 8 13 4 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 0000 4584 1 Removing the left rear upper cover 9 8 13 5 Removing the Controller Box Cover 0000 4585 1 Disconnect the connector J1512 1 from the power distribution PCB and free the harness from the wire saddle 2 th...

Page 375: ...PCB Cover When attaching the cover take care so that the cut off will not come into contact with the latch of the flat cable Otherwise the flat cable can come loose F 9 202 9 8 13 7 Opening the Main Controller Box 0000 4587 1 Remove the 2 flat cables 1 used to connect the DC controller PCB and the main controller PCB F 9 203 2 Remove the 9 screws 1 of the main controller box F 9 204 1 ...

Page 376: ...rs from the PCB and free all harnesses from the cable clamps then remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the DC controller PCB 2 together with its base F 9 208 9 8 13 9 Removing the Toner Container Drive Unit 0000 4589 1 Disconnect the connector from the relay PCB 1 and feed the harness of the developer motor from the cable clamp then remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the relay PCB 1 together with its ba...

Page 377: ...er unit releasing lever 1 to detach the waste toner container 2 F 9 211 F 9 212 9 8 14 2 Removing the Front Cover 0000 4560 1 Remove the screw 1 and the 2 hinge pins 2 then detach the front cover F 9 213 9 8 14 3 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit Releasing Lever 0000 4561 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever 2 F 9 214 ...

Page 378: ...9 216 9 8 14 6 Removing the Waste Toner Detection PCB 0000 4564 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 found behind the fixing feeder unit then detach the waste toner detection PCB cover 2 F 9 217 2 Detach the waste toner detection PCB 1 from the cover and disconnect the connector 2 for replacement F 9 218 9 8 15 Feedscrew Rotation Sensor 9 8 15 1 Removing the Waste Toner Container 0006 0802 1 Open the front cov...

Page 379: ...r 0000 4606 1 Disconnect the connector J1512 1 from the power distribution PCB and free the harness from the wire saddle 2 then remove the 6 screws 3 and detach the main controller cover 4 F 9 221 9 8 15 6 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 0000 4607 1 Remove the 8 screws 1 and detach the DC controller PCB cover 2 F 9 222 When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover When attaching the cover take c...

Page 380: ...ontroller PCB and the main controller PCB F 9 224 2 Remove the 9 screws 1 of the main controller box F 9 225 F 9 226 3 Free the controller box from the hook A B at the top of the main controller box F 9 227 4 Engage the hook 1 found on the right side of the main controller box on the stay 2 of the machine and open it F 9 228 1 ...

Page 381: ...om the cable clamp then remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the relay PCB 1 together with its base 2 F 9 230 2 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 and remove the 3 screws 2 then detach the toner container drive unit 3 F 9 231 9 8 15 10 Removing the Toner Container Drive Assembly Upper Plate 0000 4611 1 Remove the screw 1 2 E rings 2 and 2 bushings 3 then free the harness from the edge saddle 4 then free th...

Page 382: ...m plate F 9 233 F 9 234 F 9 235 9 8 15 11 Removing the Feedscrew Rotation Sensor 0000 4612 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the feedscrew rotation sensor 2 F 9 236 9 8 16 Tone Container Motor 9 8 16 1 Removing the Waste Toner Container 0006 0803 1 Open the front cover and turn the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever 1 to detach the waste toner container 2 F 9 237 ...

Page 383: ...00 4594 1 Disconnect the connector J1512 1 from the power distribution PCB and free the harness from the wire saddle 2 then remove the 6 screws 3 and detach the main controller cover 4 F 9 239 9 8 16 6 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 0000 4595 1 Remove the 8 screws 1 and detach the DC controller PCB cover 2 F 9 240 When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover When attaching the cover take care ...

Page 384: ...ontroller PCB and the main controller PCB F 9 242 2 Remove the 9 screws 1 of the main controller box F 9 243 F 9 244 3 Free the controller box from the hook A B at the top of the main controller box F 9 245 4 Engage the hook 1 found on the right side of the main controller box on the stay 2 of the machine and open it F 9 246 1 ...

Page 385: ...om the cable clamp then remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the relay PCB 1 together with its base 2 F 9 248 2 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 and remove the 3 screws 2 then detach the toner container drive unit 3 F 9 249 9 8 16 10 Removing the Toner Container Drive Assembly Upper Plate 0000 4599 1 Remove the screw 1 2 E rings 2 and 2 bushings 3 then free the harness from the edge saddle 4 then free th...

Page 386: ...ontainer Motor 0000 4600 1 Remove the gear 2 that is engaged with the gear 1 found at the tip of the toner container motor F 9 254 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the toner container motor 3 F 9 255 9 8 17 Waste Toner Feedscrew Case 9 8 17 1 Removing the Waste Toner Container 0000 4556 1 Open the front cover and turn the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever...

Page 387: ...ew only when a jam has occurred and the sheet 1 attached to the feedscrew has become damaged or bent rendered useless F 9 259 1 Turn the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever 1 slightly counterclockwise and remove the screw 2 then remove the waste toner feedscrew case 3 F 9 260 9 8 18 Pattern Reader Unit 9 8 18 1 Pressure Release of the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0000 4530 1 Open the front co...

Page 388: ...de out the intermediate transfer unit 1 then detach it by holding it by the indicated area 2 F 9 263 F 9 264 9 8 18 3 Removing the Upper Right Cover 0000 4533 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the upper right cover 2 F 9 265 9 8 18 4 Removing the Pattern Reader Unit 0000 4534 1 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 and remove the screw 2 then free the plate 4 from the hook of the upper right stay 3 and d...

Page 389: ...f the machine s side plate F 9 268 3 Connect the connector 1 then while pulling the escape lever 2 toward the front hook the plate 3 on the left right claw 4 and secure it in place with a screw 5 over the screw hole F 9 269 9 8 19 Auto Registration Sensor PCB 9 8 19 1 Pressure Release of the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0000 4546 1 Open the front cover and turn the intermediate transfer unit releasi...

Page 390: ...sfer unit 1 then detach it by holding it by the indicated area 2 F 9 272 F 9 273 9 8 19 3 Removing the Upper Right Cover 0000 4550 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the upper right cover 2 F 9 274 9 8 19 4 Removing the Pattern Reader Unit 0000 4551 1 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 and remove the screw 2 then free the plate 4 from the hook of the upper right stay 3 and detach the pattern reader uni...

Page 391: ...hit the slide rail 2 of the intermediate transfer unit on the side of the machine s side plate F 9 277 3 Connect the connector 1 then while pulling the escape lever 2 toward the front hook the plate 3 on the left right claw 4 and secure it in place with a screw 5 over the screw hole F 9 278 9 8 19 5 Removing the Auto Registration Sensor PCB 0000 4553 1 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the plate fo...

Page 392: ...e Auto Registration Sensor PCB When Attaching the plate 1 be sure that its edge is farther on the inner side than the cleaning member 2 F 9 281 9 8 20 SALT Sensor 9 8 20 1 Pressure Release of the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0000 4536 1 Open the front cover and turn the intermediate transfer unit releasing lever to unlock it 2 Slide out the manual feed unit 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the middle...

Page 393: ...h it by holding it by the indicated area 2 F 9 284 F 9 285 9 8 20 3 Removing the Upper Right Cover 0000 4540 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the upper right cover 2 F 9 286 9 8 20 4 Removing the Pattern Reader Unit 0000 4541 1 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 and remove the screw 2 then free the plate 4 from the hook of the upper right stay 3 and detach the pattern reader unit 5 F 9 287 ...

Page 394: ...ng member 1 to the right fit it in while taking care so that it will not hit the slide rail 2 of the intermediate transfer unit on the side of the machine s side plate F 9 289 3 Connect the connector 1 then while pulling the escape lever 2 toward the front hook the plate 3 on the left right claw 4 and secure it in place with a screw 5 over the screw hole F 9 290 ...

Page 395: ...rom the rear of the pattern reader unit 2 F 9 291 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the SALT sensor 3 F 9 292 Points to Note When Attaching the Plate When Attaching the plate 1 be sure to position it so that it is farther on the inner side than the cleaning member 2 F 9 293 ...

Page 396: ...Chapter 9 9 104 ...

Page 397: ...Chapter 10 Pickup Feeding System ...

Page 398: ......

Page 399: ... 10 16 10 5 1 Outline 10 16 10 5 2 Basci Sequence of Operations 10 17 10 6 Manual Feed Pickup Unit 10 18 10 6 1 Outline 10 18 10 6 2 Basic Sequence of Operations 10 19 10 6 3 Identifying the Size of Paper 10 20 10 6 4 Detecting the Presence Absence of Paper 10 21 10 6 5 Detecting the Last paper 10 22 10 7 Registration Unit 10 23 10 7 1 Outline 10 23 10 8 Duplex Feeding Unit 10 25 10 8 1 Outline 10...

Page 400: ...sette Pickup Motor 10 42 10 10 7 Cassette Retry Paper Sensor 10 43 10 10 7 1 Removing the Cassette 10 43 10 10 7 2 Removing the Front Right Cover 10 43 10 10 7 3 Removing the Rear Right Cover 10 43 10 10 7 4 Removing the Pickup Vertical Path Cover 10 43 10 10 7 5 Removing the Pickup Unit 10 44 10 10 7 6 Removing the Pick up System Sensor Mounting Plate 10 44 10 10 7 7 Removing the Cassette Retry P...

Page 401: ...al Feed Roller 10 58 10 10 15 5 Removing the Manual Feed Separation Roller 10 59 10 10 16 Manual Feed Last Paper Sensor 10 60 10 10 16 1 Removing the Manual Feed Unit 10 60 10 10 16 2 Removing the Manual Feed Tray Unit 10 61 10 10 16 3 Removing the Manual Feed Tray Upper Cover Lower Cover 10 61 10 10 16 4 Removing the Manual Feed Last Paper Sensor 10 62 10 10 17 Manual Feed Sensor 10 62 10 10 17 1...

Page 402: ... 78 10 10 26 Inside Delivery Roller 10 78 10 10 26 1 Removing the Inside Delivery Roller 10 78 10 10 27 Fixing Feeder Unit Open Closed Sensor 10 79 10 10 27 1 Removing the Upper Left Cover 10 79 10 10 27 2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray 10 79 10 10 27 3 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit Old 10 79 10 10 27 4 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit New 10 80 10 10 27 5 Removing the Fixing...

Page 403: ... 36 3 Removing the Inside Cover lower 10 100 10 10 36 4 Removing the Cassette 10 100 10 10 36 5 Removing the Manual Feed Unit 10 100 10 10 36 6 Removing the Front Cover 10 100 10 10 36 7 Removing the Rear Right Cover 10 101 10 10 36 8 Removing the Pickup Vertical Path Cover 10 101 10 10 36 9 Removing the Pickup Unit 10 101 10 10 36 10 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 10 101 10 10 36 11 Removing the L...

Page 404: ...livery Vertical Path Unit New 10 125 10 10 42 5 Removing the Face Down Delivery Sensor 2 10 127 10 10 42 6 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Roller 1 10 128 10 10 43 Delivery Vertical Path Roller 2 10 128 10 10 43 1 Removing the Upper Left Cover 10 128 10 10 43 2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray 10 128 10 10 43 3 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit Old 10 129 10 10 43 4 Removing the Delive...

Page 405: ...g the Delivery Vertical Path Unit New 10 156 10 10 49 5 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Cover Open Closed Sensor 10 158 10 10 50 Delivery Path Switching Solenoid 1 10 158 10 10 50 1 Removing the Upper Left Cover 10 158 10 10 50 2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray 10 158 10 10 50 3 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit Old 10 159 10 10 50 4 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit New 10 160...

Page 406: ...Contents ...

Page 407: ... Paper feed reference Center Size of paper accommodation Cassette 1 2 550 sheets 80 g m2 Manual feed tray 100 sheets 80 g m2 Size of paper Cassette 1 2 A3 A4 A4R B4 B5 B5R A5R 12x18 11x17 LGL LTR LTRR STMTR Manual feed tray 98 to 320 mm main scanning direction 148 to 457 2 mm sub scanning direction Type of paper Plain Heavy transparency 64 g m2 to 209 g m2 from cassette 64 g m2 to 253 g m2 from ma...

Page 408: ... 2 Arrangement of he Units 0000 4672 F 10 1 T 10 2 1 Delivery assembly 5 Pickup unit 2 Fixing unit 6 Registration unit 3 Duplex unit 7 Manual feed unit 4 Secondary transfer unit 8 Intermediate transfer unit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ...

Page 409: ...ical path roller 5 Face up delivery roller 17 Re pickup roller 6 Internal delivery roller 18 Manual feed separation roller 7 Fixing roller fixing upper roller 19 Manual feed roller 8 Pressure roller fixing lower roller 20 Pre registration roller 9 Duplex roller 1 21 Lower registration roller 10 Duplex roller 2 22 Upper registration roller 11 Duplex roller 3 23 Secondary transfer roller 12 Duplex r...

Page 410: ...4674 F 10 3 Face down delivery copy tray Face up delivery side delivery tray Face down delivery center delivery tray Pickup from cassette 2 Pickup from cassette 3 Pickup from cassette 4 Pickup from manual feeder Pickup from paper deck Pickup from cassette 1 ...

Page 411: ... 6 Fixing delivery sensor PS25 19 Pickup vertical path cover open closed sensor PS11 7 Fixing inlet sensor PS27 20 Manual feed last paper sensor PS9 8 Duplex registration sensor PS21 21 Manual fed unit open closed sensor PS28 9 Duplex horizontal registration sensor PS22 22 Manual feed paper sensor PS10 10 Duplex pick sensor PS24 23 Front cover open closed sensor PS23 11 Cassette 1 paper level sens...

Page 412: ... 10 5 1 Delivery path switching solenoid 1 SL2 5 Cassette 1 pickup solenoid SL3 2 Delivery path switching solenoid 2 SL5 6 Duplex pickup solenoid CL2 3 Duplex registration clutch CL1 7 manual feed pickup solenoid SL1 4 Cassette 2 pickup solenoid SL4 CL CL SL SL SL SL SL 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 ...

Page 413: ...ckup clutch M11 face down delivery motor M1 drum ITB motor M24 fixing motor M6 cassette 1 pickup motor M26 duplex feeder motor M7 caste 2 pickup motor SL1 manual feed pickup solenoid M8 registration motor SL3 caste 1 pickup solenoid M9 pre registration motor SL4 cassette 2 pickup solenoid M7 SL3 SL4 M11 M10 M24 M26 CL1 CL2 M1 M8 M9 SL1 M6 ...

Page 414: ...riod Main power switch ON WMUPR WMUP PSTBY Drum ITB motor M1 Cassette 1 pickup motor M6 Cassette 2 pickup motor M7 Registration motor M8 Pre registration motor M9 Delivery vertical path motor M10 Face down delivery motor M11 Duplex feeder motor M26 Fixing motor M24 360 sec approx Printer unit Print start 2 76sec approx 1 3sec approx PRINT LSTR Cassette 1 pickup motor M6 Cassette pickup solenoid SL...

Page 415: ...ring which paper is moved form the sensor N 1 to the delay jam sensor N in question is controlled and a delay jam will be identified if the delay jam sensor N in question does not go ON within a specific period of time after the sensor N 1 has gone ON F 10 10 Source Motor Sensor Cassette 1 Pickup motor M6 Cassette 1 retry paper sensor PS16 Cassette 2 Pickup motor M7 Cassette 2 retry paper sensor P...

Page 416: ...n delivery sensor 1 PS12 Face down delivery sensor 2 PS6 Duplex registration sensor PS21 Duplex pickup sensor PS24 Sensor Cassette 1 retry paper sensor PS16 Caste 2 retry paper sensor PS17 Registration sensor PS26 Fixing delivery sensor PS25 Face down delivery sensor 1 PS12 Face down deliver y sensor 2 PS6 Duplex registration sensor PS21 Duplex pickup sensor PS24 Jam check Sensor N Normal L paper ...

Page 417: ...ore it starts initial multiple rotations at power on T 10 10 Sensor Caste 1 retry paper sensor PS16 Cassette 2 retry paper sensor PS17 Registration sensor PS26 Fixing delivery sensor PS25 Face down delivery sensor 1 PS12 Face down delivery sensor 2 PS6 Duplex registration sensor PS21 Duplex pickup sensor PS24 Fixing inlet sensor PS27 ...

Page 418: ...ication of the cassette size found on the machine side goes ON OFF according to the position of the slide guide permitting the machine to identify 15 settings In the absence of a cassette all 4 actuators will go OFF F 10 12 T 10 11 4 in a row actuator Rear Front Paper size Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 1 STMT R ON 2 LTR ON 3 LTR R ON ON Paper size slide guide Cassette Size detecting actuator Cassette open C...

Page 419: ...ON 9 A3 ON ON ON 10 B5 ON ON ON 11 B5 R ON ON ON 12 B4 ON ON ON ON 13 12X18 2 ON ON ON 14 U1 ON ON 15 U2 ON 16 no cassette ON actuator pressed i e 0 in reference to a check in I O mode 1 279 x 431 8 mm 2 305 x 457 mm 4 in a row actuator Rear Front Paper size Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 ...

Page 420: ...evel of paper inside the cassette is detected using the following three sensors F 10 13 T 10 12 1 Flag 6 Paper level sensor flag 2 Cassette paper sensor 7 Lifter gear 3 Gear 8 Tray 4 Cassette paper level sensor A 9 Paper 5 Cassette paper level sensor B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ...

Page 421: ...s ON No paper OFF OFF If the cassette is full of paper Paper If the cassette has little paper OFF ON If the cassette is half full of paper Paper Cassette paper level sensor B Cassette paper level sensor A Paper Cassette paper level sensor B Cassette paper level sensor A If the cassette has no paper Paper tray Cassette paper sensor Flag ON ON View from the Front of the Machine Cassette paper level ...

Page 422: ... path roller pre registration roller is then used to move the paper a fara as the kegistatoin roller upper lower The pickup vertical path roller and the pre registration roller are each driven by the pickup 1 motor and the pre registration motor respectively F 10 15 T 10 14 1 Vertical path guide 7 Holding plate 2 Caste retray paper sensor 8 Lifter plate 3 Pickup vertical path roller 9 Retard guide...

Page 423: ...Operations 0005 9838 F 10 16 Print start 2 76sec approx 1 3sec approx PRINT LSTR Cassette 1 pickup motor M6 Cassette pickup solenoid SL3 Cassette retry paper sensor PS16 Registration sensor PS26 Pre registration sensor M9 Registration motor M8 ...

Page 424: ...the lifter moves up an a single sheet of paper is separed and moved ahead by the work of the pickup feeder roller and the separation roller F 10 17 T 10 15 1 Paper tray 6 Manual feeder separation roller 2 Side guide plate 7 Registration multi frame 3 Paper flag 8 Last paper pick roll 4 Manual feed feeder roller 9 Lifter 5 Pickup guide plate 1 2 9 3 4 5 6 8 7 ...

Page 425: ...ller Separation roller Separation roller shaft Spring pin Tortion spring Damper core Initial condition Torque delay mechanism in operation Torque limiter in operation Paper Manual feed feeder roller Separation roller shaft direction of rotation Torque delay mechanism direction of rotation Print start 1 9 sec approx PRINT LSTR Pre registration motor M9 Manual feed pickup Solenoid SL1 Registration s...

Page 426: ...r in reference to the level of output ffrom the variable resistor operating in conjunction with the movemetn of the side guide epatle The side guide plate on the manual feed tray is set by the user when he she deposit paper F 10 21 Slide guide rear Slide guide front Variable resistor Manual feed tray ...

Page 427: ...91 When paper is placed its weight pushes down the paper detecting flag thus enabling the manual feed paper sensor PS10 to detect the presence of paper F 10 22 Paper Paper detecting flag Manual feed paper sensor PS10 Manual feed paper sensor PS10 Paper detecting flag Paper ...

Page 428: ...es only when the last paper is picked up otherwise it remains still The machine will identify the paper to be the last paper if it detects 4 or more output pules form the lat paper sensor F 10 23 Manual feed last paper sensor PS9 Last paper detecting roll Last paper Manual feed lsat paper sensor PS9 Last paper detecting roll Last paper If 4 or more output pulses are detected the paper is identifie...

Page 429: ... F 10 24 When fitted to the machine When the multi upper guide is shifted up Machine rail Upper guide preasure spring Area of upper guide to be locked in place Upper guide locking arm Mobile rail Machine rail Upper guide pressure spring Mobile rail Upper guide locking arm open unlocked Area of upper guide to be locked in place Registration multi upper guide Registration Nip Released The shape of t...

Page 430: ...25 Pre registration motor M9 Registration motor M8 Manual feed pickup solenoid Manual feed control gear Manual feed roller shaft Duplex roller shaft Lower registration roller Upper registration roller Pre registration roller ...

Page 431: ...6 1 Reversing sheet 9 Delivery cooling duct 2 Reversing rollre 10 Arching assembly 3 Reversing sheet 11 Duplex roller 2 4 Face up delivery roller 12 Duplex horizontal registration sensor PS22 5 Cross path flapper 13 Duplex roller 3 6 Duple roller 1 14 Duplex roller 4 7 FU FD swtycing flapper 15 Re pickup roller 8 Internal delivery roller 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ...

Page 432: ... the point of laser exposure T 10 17 F 10 27 Detecting of paper position duplex horizontal registration sensor PS22 Timing of detection starts a specifi peirrod of time after pasage over the duplex registraont neosr PS21 Dive horizontal registration motor M25 Identifiaotin of position with refenced to the pulse form the horizontal registration motor Duplex horizontal registration sensor PS22 Horiz...

Page 433: ...ber on a white backgoudn and the nbuer on a black background indicated the 1s side and the 2nd side respse3ctively 1 point of reversal 2 1 2 duplex pre registration 3 1 2 check on horizontal registration 4 2 1 in wait for re pickup 5 1 2 6 with 2 sheets inside duplex unit 1 2 3 7 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 434: ...Chapter 10 10 28 8 1 2 3 4 9 1 2 3 4 5 10 thereafter repeats 7 through 10 1 2 3 4 5 11 1 2 3 4 5 12 1 2 3 4 5 ...

Page 435: ...ry A3 3 Sheets in Cirucilation 0000 4697 The nbuemr on a white background and the nbuemr on a black backgrdoun indicated the 1st side and he 2nd side respectively 13 1 2 3 4 5 14 1 2 3 4 5 1 1 2 point of reversal 1 duplex pre registration 3 1 ...

Page 436: ...Chapter 10 10 30 check on horizontal registration 4 1 in wait for re pickup 5 1 2 point of reversal 6 1 2 non contact reversal 7 1 2 8 thereafter repeats 6 through 8 1 2 3 ...

Page 437: ...Chapter 10 10 31 9 1 2 3 10 1 2 3 ...

Page 438: ...s any of the following 3 types of delivery paper apths face deown delivery center delivery tray face down delivery copy tray face up device r side delivery tray F 10 28 Face down delivery copy tray Face up delivery side delivery tray Face down delivery center delivery tray ...

Page 439: ...ivery 0000 4699 After moving thtough the fixing unit the paper moves along the FU FD switching flapper now facing downawar it then pushes down the plastic sheet to move to the vertical path diecoint for face down delivery F 10 29 Plastic sheet FU FD switching flapper ...

Page 440: ... the cross path flapper is also siwtched over by the work of the delivery path switching solenoid 2 SL5 thus guding the paper into the direction of face up delivery F 10 30 10 9 4 Movement for CenterTray delivery 0000 4701 The paper moves while pushing down the plastic sheet and then moves ahead for center tray delivery F 10 31 FU FD switching flapper Cross path flapper Face up delivery side deliv...

Page 441: ...rection of the centra tray Immeiately after the trailig edge of the paper moves past the palstc film the momevement stops at which time the movmeent rverses so that the paper moves along the plastic sheet in the direction of the copy tray F 10 32 Copy tray delivery Copy tray delivery Paper Paper Plastic sheet Plastic sheet Paper movement reverse ...

Page 442: ...nd open the pickup vertical path cover 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the machine s front right cover 2 F 10 33 10 10 1 3 Removing the Rear Right Cover 0006 8860 The rear right cover is fitted with the rear lower cover shift it to the direction indicated to detach 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the rear right cover 2 F 10 34 10 10 1 4 Removing the Pickup Vertical Path Cover 0000 4707 1 Rem...

Page 443: ...y also be removed in the same way 1 Slide out the cassette 10 10 2 2 Removing the Cassette Size Detection Unit 0000 4779 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the machine s lower left cover 2 F 10 37 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and push the protrusion A from the left to release the lock then detach the cassette size detection unit 2 for the machine s front F 10 38 MEMO When attaching the cassette si...

Page 444: ...and pull it out F 10 39 10 10 4 Feed Roller 10 10 4 1 Removing the Cassette 0000 4713 MEMO The cassette 1 2 and the pick up unit 1 2 may also be removed in the same way 1 Slide out the cassette 10 10 4 2 Removing the Feeding Roller 0000 4714 1 Put your hand through the machine s front then pick the tab A of the feed roller and pull it out F 10 40 10 10 5 Separation Roller 10 10 5 1 Removing the Ca...

Page 445: ... Left Upper Rear Cover 0000 4762 1 Removing the left rear upper cover 10 10 6 4 Removing the DC Power Supply Unit 0000 4759 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and disconnect all connectors of the fuse PCB then detach the DC power supply unit 2 F 10 42 10 10 6 5 Removing the Controller Box Cover 0000 4760 1 Disconnect the connector J1512 1 from the power distribution PCB and free the harness from the wire sad...

Page 446: ...e loose F 10 45 10 10 6 7 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan 0000 4763 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the fixing heat discharge fan 3 F 10 46 10 10 6 8 Removing the Developing Drive Unit 0000 4764 1 Disconnect the connector 2 of the developing motor 1 and free the harness 3 from the cable clamp 4 F 10 47 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the main controller...

Page 447: ... 6 10 Removing the High Voltage Unit 0000 4766 1 Disconnect all connectors of the high voltage unit then remove the 5 screws 1 and detach the high voltage unit 2 F 10 51 2 Remove the 6 screws 1 and remove the base plate 2 then detach the high voltage unit 3 F 10 52 10 10 6 11 Removing the Manual Feed Cooling Fan Duct 0000 4767 1 Slide out the manual fee unit then disconnect the connector 1 and rem...

Page 448: ...d to detach 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the rear right cover 2 F 10 54 10 10 6 13 Removing the Cassette Pickup Motor 0000 4769 1 Remove the grip 1 F 10 55 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 4 screws 2 then detach the cassette pickup motor unit 3 F 10 56 3 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 4 screws 2 then detach the cassette pickup motor unit 3 ...

Page 449: ...e pickup vertical path cover 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the machine s front right cover 2 F 10 58 10 10 7 3 Removing the Rear Right Cover 0000 4734 The rear right cover is fitted with the rear lower cover shift it to the direction indicated to detach 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the rear right cover 2 F 10 59 10 10 7 4 Removing the Pickup Vertical Path Cover 0000 4735 1 Remove the sc...

Page 450: ... cassette pickup solenoid 3 Thereafter remove the 5 screws 4 and detach the sensor mounting plate 5 F 10 63 10 10 7 7 Removing the Cassette Retry Paper Sensor 0000 4738 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and detach the cassette retry paper sensor 2 F 10 64 10 10 7 8 Mounting the Pick up System Sensor Mounting Plate 0000 4739 Points to Note When Mounting the Sensor Mounting Plate Any of the gears can dro...

Page 451: ...te 0000 4740 MEMO The cassette 1 2 and the pick up unit 1 2 may also be removed in the same way 1 Slide out the cassette 10 10 8 2 Removing the Front Right Cover 0000 4741 1 Slide out the manual feed unit and open the pickup vertical path cover 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the machine s front right cover 2 F 10 68 10 10 8 3 Removing the Rear Right Cover 0000 4742 The rear right cover is fitt...

Page 452: ...g the Pickup Unit 0000 4744 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 4 screws 2 then detach the pickup unit 3 F 10 71 10 10 8 6 Removing the Pick up System Sensor Mounting Plate 0000 4745 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 at the rear and remove the bracket 2 F 10 72 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the screw 1 then detach the cassette pickup solenoid 3 Thereafter remove the 5 screws 4 and detach t...

Page 453: ...ensor Mounting Plate Any of the gears can drop off When attaching the sensor mounting plate be sure that the pickup unit will not face downward 1 Attach the bushing 1 to the frame then attach the gear shaft 2 F 10 75 2 Fit the 6 locations A indicated in the figure firmly into the holes of the mounting plate then secure the sensor mounting plate 2 in place F 10 76 3 Attach the gear 1 and the E ring...

Page 454: ... machine s front right cover 2 F 10 78 10 10 9 3 Removing the Rear Right Cover 0000 4750 The rear right cover is fitted with the rear lower cover shift it to the direction indicated to detach 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the rear right cover 2 F 10 79 10 10 9 4 Removing the Pickup Vertical Path Cover 0000 4751 1 Remove the screw 2 to detach the pickup vertical path lower cover 1 then detach ...

Page 455: ...fter remove the 5 screws 4 and detach the sensor mounting plate 5 F 10 83 10 10 9 7 Removing the Cassette Paper Level Sensor A B 0000 4754 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the cassette paper sensor A B 2 F 10 84 10 10 9 8 Mounting the Pick up System Sensor Mounting Plate 0000 4755 Points to Note When Mounting the Sensor Mounting Plate Any of the gears can drop off When attaching the sensor ...

Page 456: ...e gear 1 and the E ring 2 F 10 87 4 Turn the gears to see that the movement is smooth 10 10 10 Slide Resistor 10 10 10 1 Removing the Manual Feed Unit 0000 4995 1 Press the release button 1 on the machine s right side to slide out the manual feed unit 2 F 10 88 2 Remove the screw 1 and the stopper plate 2 then detach the manual feed unit 3 F 10 89 10 10 10 2 Removing the Manual Feed Tray Unit 0000...

Page 457: ...upward F 10 91 10 10 10 3 Removing the Manual Feed Tray Upper Cover Lower Cover 0000 4997 1 Spread the side guide 1 of the manual feed tray unit and separate it into the upper cover 2 and the lower cover 3 for detachment F 10 92 MEMO When attaching the upper cover 1 and the lower cover 2 match the markings A found on the side and slide them into place F 10 93 ...

Page 458: ...on the lower cover side spread the claw A and detach the slide resistor 2 F 10 95 10 10 11 Cassette Pickup Solenoid 10 10 11 1 Removing the Cassette 0000 4771 MEMO The cassette 1 2 and the pick up unit 1 2 may also be removed in the same way 1 Slide out the cassette 10 10 11 2 Removing the Front Right Cover 0000 4772 1 Slide out the manual feed unit and open the pickup vertical path cover 2 Remove...

Page 459: ...000 4775 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 4 screws 2 then detach the pickup unit 3 F 10 99 10 10 11 6 Removing the Cassette Pickup Solenoid 0000 4776 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then detach the cassette pickup solenoid 3 F 10 100 10 10 12 Manual Feed Tray Unit 10 10 12 1 Removing the Manual Feed Unit Cover 0000 4949 1 Press the release button 1 on the machine ...

Page 460: ...y Unit 0000 4950 1 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the base 2 F 10 104 2 Disconnect the connector 1 at the rear then while opening the face plate 2 shift the manual feed tray 3 90 deg or more to detach it upward F 10 105 10 10 13 Manual Feed Unit 10 10 13 1 Removing the Manual Feed Unit 0000 4947 1 Press the release button 1 on the machine s right side to slide out the manual feed unit 2 ...

Page 461: ...al Feed Unit 0000 4960 1 Press the release button 1 on the machine s right side to slide out the manual feed unit 2 F 10 108 2 Remove the screw 1 and the stopper plate 2 then detach the manual feed unit 3 F 10 109 10 10 14 2 Removing the Manual Feed Unit Cover 0000 4961 1 Press the release button 1 on the machine s right side to slide out the manual feed unit 2 F 10 110 ...

Page 462: ...e Manual Feed Roller 0000 4962 1 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the mounting plate 2 F 10 113 2 Remove the gear 1 at the front and detach the bushing 2 For both gear and the bushing free the claw fitted in the groove of the roller for detachment F 10 114 3 Remove the bushing 1 at the rear F 10 115 4 Remove the resin clamp 1 and pull out the manual feed roller 2 ...

Page 463: ...oller F 10 117 10 10 15 Manual Feed Separation Roller 10 10 15 1 Removing the Manual Feed Unit 0000 4964 1 Press the release button 1 on the machine s right side to slide out the manual feed unit 2 F 10 118 2 Remove the screw 1 and the stopper plate 2 then detach the manual feed unit 3 F 10 119 10 10 15 2 Removing the Manual Feed Unit Cover 0000 4965 1 Press the release button 1 on the machine s r...

Page 464: ...ng the Motor Cover 0006 8853 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the motor cover 2 at the rear F 10 123 10 10 15 4 Removing the Manual Feed Roller 0000 4966 1 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the mounting plate 2 F 10 124 2 Remove the gear 1 at the front and detach the bushing 2 For both gear and the bushing free the claw fitted in the groove of the roller for detachment ...

Page 465: ...ure that the groove of the parallel pin is toward the rear F 10 127 When attaching the bushing and the gear at the front check to be sure that the claw is hooked on the groove of the roller F 10 128 10 10 15 5 Removing the Manual Feed Separation Roller 0000 4968 1 Take care not to lose the spring found at the front when detaching the face plate Detach the face plate 1 F 10 129 ...

Page 466: ...p in claw F 10 131 3 Pick the tab A of the manual feed separation roller 2 and pull it out in the direction of the arrow F 10 132 10 10 16 Manual Feed Last Paper Sensor 10 10 16 1 Removing the Manual Feed Unit 0000 5000 1 Press the release button 1 on the machine s right side to slide out the manual feed unit 2 F 10 133 2 Remove the screw 1 and the stopper plate 2 then detach the manual feed unit ...

Page 467: ...2 shift the manual feed tray 3 90 deg or more to detach it upward F 10 136 10 10 16 3 Removing the Manual Feed Tray Upper Cover Lower Cover 0000 5002 1 Spread the side guide 1 of the manual feed tray unit and separate it into the upper cover 2 and the lower cover 3 for detachment F 10 137 MEMO When attaching the upper cover 1 and the lower cover 2 match the markings A found on the side and slide t...

Page 468: ...r sensor 2 F 10 140 10 10 17 Manual Feed Sensor 10 10 17 1 Removing the Manual Feed Unit 0000 4970 1 Press the release button 1 on the machine s right side to slide out the manual feed unit 2 F 10 141 2 Remove the screw 1 and the stopper plate 2 then detach the manual feed unit 3 F 10 142 10 10 17 2 Removing the Manual Feed Unit Cover 0000 4971 1 Press the release button 1 on the machine s right s...

Page 469: ... F 10 144 F 10 145 10 10 17 3 Removing the Manual Feed Roller 0000 4973 1 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the mounting plate 2 F 10 146 2 Remove the gear 1 at the front and detach the bushing 2 For both gear and the bushing free the claw fitted in the groove of the roller for detachment F 10 147 3 Remove the bushing 1 at the rear ...

Page 470: ...n attaching the bushing and the gear at the front check to be sure that the claw is hooked on the groove of the roller F 10 150 10 10 17 4 Removing the Motor Cover 0000 4974 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the motor cover 2 at the rear F 10 151 10 10 17 5 Removing the Manual Feed sensor 0000 4975 1 Take care not to lose the spring found at the front when detaching the face plate Detach the face pl...

Page 471: ... 1 found on the front side of the arm F 10 153 2 Detach the rear guide 1 and the middle guide 2 Free the snap in claw F 10 154 3 Remove the sensor flag 2 attached to the middle guide 1 F 10 155 4 Disconnect the connector 1 from behind the middle guide and detach the manual feed paper sensor 2 F 10 156 ...

Page 472: ...ving the Transparency Sensor Mounting Plate 0000 4953 1 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then detach the sensor base 3 found at the bottom F 10 159 10 10 18 3 Removing the Transparency Sensor front rear 0000 4954 1 While taking care not to touch the light emitting face detach the transparency sensor 1 F 10 160 10 10 19 Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid 10 10 19 1 Removing the Manu...

Page 473: ...nit Cover 0000 4978 1 Press the release button 1 on the machine s right side to slide out the manual feed unit 2 F 10 163 2 Remove the screw 1 and free the 3 claws 2 and the 3 snap ons 3 then detach the manual feed unit cover 4 F 10 164 F 10 165 10 10 19 3 Removing the Manual Feed Roller 0000 4979 1 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the mounting plate 2 ...

Page 474: ... F 10 168 4 Remove the resin clamp 1 and pull out the manual feed roller 2 When attaching the manual feed roller be sure that the groove of the parallel pin is toward the rear F 10 169 When attaching the bushing and the gear at the front check to be sure that the claw is hooked on the groove of the roller F 10 170 10 10 19 4 Removing the Motor Cover 0000 4980 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the mo...

Page 475: ...Attaching the Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid When attaching the solenoid 1 be sure to hook the flapper A on the claw B of the gear 2 F 10 173 10 10 20 Registration Motor 10 10 20 1 Removing the Manual Feed Unit 0000 4989 1 Press the release button 1 on the machine s right side to slide out the manual feed unit 2 F 10 174 2 Remove the screw 1 and the stopper plate 2 then detach the manual feed unit 3 ...

Page 476: ...move the screw 1 and free the 3 claws 2 and the 3 snap ons 3 then detach the manual feed unit cover 4 F 10 177 F 10 178 10 10 20 3 Removing the Motor Cover 0000 4992 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the motor cover 2 at the rear F 10 179 10 10 20 4 Removing the Registration Motor 0000 4993 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then detach the registration motor 3 ...

Page 477: ...ual feed unit 2 F 10 181 2 Remove the screw 1 and the stopper plate 2 then detach the manual feed unit 3 F 10 182 10 10 21 2 Removing the Manual Feed Unit Cover 0000 4984 1 Press the release button 1 on the machine s right side to slide out the manual feed unit 2 F 10 183 2 Remove the screw 1 and free the 3 claws 2 and the 3 snap ons 3 then detach the manual feed unit cover 4 F 10 184 ...

Page 478: ...1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then detach the pre registration motor 3 F 10 187 10 10 22 Horizontal Registration Motor 10 10 22 1 Removing the Fixing Unit 0000 4882 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the fixing unit 2 F 10 188 10 10 22 2 Removing the Fixing Feeder Unit 0000 4883 1 Remove the 2 stoppers 1 and detach the fixing feeder unit...

Page 479: ...t from collecting If you forgot to use paper make a double sided test copy before ending the work F 10 191 1 Stand it so that the fixing feeder unit cover is at the bottom 2 Free the 6 snap ons A and the 3 hooks B then detach the sheet 1 from behind the fixing feeder assembly F 10 192 10 10 22 5 Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor Support Plate 0000 4886 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and rem...

Page 480: ... the sensor flag moves smoothly F 10 194 10 10 22 6 Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor 0000 4887 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then detach the horizontal registration motor 3 F 10 195 10 10 23 Registration Sensor 10 10 23 1 Removing the Manual Feed Unit 0000 4956 1 Press the release button 1 on the machine s right side to slide out the manual feed unit 2 F 10 196 2...

Page 481: ...istration Sensor 0000 4958 1 While taking care not to touch the light emitting face of the transparency sensor 1 detach the registration sensor 2 F 10 199 10 10 24 Fixing Feeder Unit 10 10 24 1 Removing the Fixing Unit 0006 7407 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the fixing unit 2 F 10 200 10 10 24 2 Removing the Fixing Feeder Unit 0000 4782 1 Remove the 2 stopp...

Page 482: ...ckup vertical path cover 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the machine s front right cover 2 F 10 202 10 10 25 3 Removing the Rear Right Cover 0000 4720 The rear right cover is fitted with the rear lower cover shift it to the direction indicated to detach 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the rear right cover 2 F 10 203 10 10 25 4 Removing the Pickup Vertical Path Cover 0000 4721 1 Remove the sc...

Page 483: ...ssette pickup solenoid 3 Thereafter remove the 5 screws 4 and detach the sensor mounting plate 5 F 10 207 10 10 25 7 Mounting the Pick up System Sensor Mounting Plate 0000 4725 Points to Note When Mounting the Sensor Mounting Plate Any of the gears can drop off When attaching the sensor mounting plate be sure that the pickup unit will not face downward 1 Attach the bushing 1 to the frame then atta...

Page 484: ... and detach the gear and the bushing 2 F 10 211 2 Free the claw A of the bushing 1 at the front shift the vertical path roller 2 to the rear and then pull it upward to detach F 10 212 10 10 26 Inside Delivery Roller 10 10 26 1 Removing the Inside Delivery Roller 0000 4945 1 Open the fixing feeder unit cover F 10 213 2 Remove the E ring 1 and the bushing 2 at the front then remove the gear 3 and th...

Page 485: ... 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then detach the upper left cover 3 F 10 216 10 10 27 2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray 0000 4786 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the center delivery tray 2 F 10 217 10 10 27 3 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit Old 0000 4787 In case following models refer to Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit New flom MLW01838 flom MLX02392 1 Detach the strap 1 from th...

Page 486: ...elivery vertical path unit 3 F 10 220 Points to Note When Mounting the Delivery Vertical Path Unit When attaching engage the left right hook 1 found on the side of the delivery vertical path unit on the plate on the side of the machine and secure it with screws Be sure to tighten the left screw first F 10 221 10 10 27 4 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit New 0006 8955 ...

Page 487: ... path cover 3 from the machine F 10 223 4 To detach the delivery vertical path unit lift the unit and then pull it out toward the front Disconnect the 2 concoctors 1 and remove the 4 screws 2 then detach the delivery path unit 3 The delivery path unit will no longer be used F 10 224 5 Using a flat blade screwdriver detach the slip stop 2 from the delivery vertical path cover 1 then detach the stra...

Page 488: ...t once before setting it in place Engage the left and right hooks 3 on the machine plate 4 so as to set the new delivery vertical path unit in place F 10 228 9 Using 4 screws secure the delivery vertical path unit 3 in place then connect the 3 connectors At this time check to make sure that the machine positioner 4 is properly in place F 10 229 10 Mount the new delivery vertical path cover 1 to th...

Page 489: ...s initial position F 10 231 10 10 27 5 Removing the Fixing Feeder Unit Open Closed Sensor Mounting Plate 0000 4788 Before detaching the fixing feeder unit be sure to mark its position using a scriber F 10 232 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and the 4 terminals 2 and remove the screw 1 then detach the fixing feeder unit open closed sensor mounting plate 4 F 10 233 ...

Page 490: ... Front Right Cover 0000 4727 1 Slide out the manual feed unit and open the pickup vertical path cover 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the machine s front right cover 2 F 10 235 10 10 28 3 Removing the Rear Right Cover 0000 4728 The rear right cover is fitted with the rear lower cover shift it to the direction indicated to detach 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the rear right cover 2 F 10 236...

Page 491: ...h the pickup unit 3 F 10 238 10 10 28 6 Removing the Pickup Vertical Path Cover Open Closed Sensor 0000 4731 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the screw 2 then detach the sensor mounting plate 3 F 10 239 2 Remove the spring 1 and detach the sensor flag 2 F 10 240 3 Remove the pickup vertical path cover open closed sensor 1 F 10 241 ...

Page 492: ...rews 1 and detach the center delivery tray 2 F 10 243 10 10 29 3 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit Old 0000 4795 In case following models refer to Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit New flom MLW01838 flom MLX02392 1 Detach the strap 1 from the delivery vertical cover then detach the delivery vertical path cover 2 F 10 244 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the delivery internal cover 2 F...

Page 493: ...8956 For the new delivery vertical path unit to function the version of the DC controller must be 3 06 or later Be sure to check its version in service mode COPIER DISPLAY VERSION D CON 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit 2 Open the delivery vertical path cover 1 then remove the 2 screws 2 and detach the upper left cover 3 F 10 248 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the delivery inside cover 2 then d...

Page 494: ...ger be used F 10 251 6 Attach the strap 1 found on the delivery inside cover to the new delivery vertical path cover 2 then fix it in place using the slip stop 3 F 10 252 7 Remove the dummy connector 1 from the machine The dummy connector will no longer be used F 10 253 8 Fit the top 1 of the new delivery vertical path inside of the machine plate 2 When mounting the delivery vertical path unit be ...

Page 495: ...vertical path cover 1 to the machine then fix the delivery inside cover 2 in place using a screw 3 F 10 256 11 Fix the upper left cover 1 using 2 screws 2 then close the delivery vertical path cover 3 and put the fixing feeding unit back in its initial position F 10 257 10 10 29 5 Removing the Fixing Feeder Unit Open Closed Sensor Mounting Plate 0000 4796 Before detaching the fixing feeder unit be...

Page 496: ...000 4797 MEMO The fixing feeder unit open closed switches 1 and 2 may be removed in the same way 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the fixing feeder open closed sensor 2 F 10 260 10 10 30 Drawer Connector manual feed unit 10 10 30 1 Removing the Manual Feed Unit 0000 8487 1 Press the release button 1 on the machine s right side to slide out the manual feed unit 2 F 10 261 2 Remove the screw 1 and...

Page 497: ...ect the 2 connectors 1 from behind and disconnect the drawer connector 2 F 10 264 10 10 31 Drawer Connector fixing feeder unit 10 10 31 1 Removing the Fixing Unit 0000 5005 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the fixing unit 2 F 10 265 10 10 31 2 Removing the Fixing Feeder Unit 0000 5006 1 Remove the 2 stoppers 1 and detach the fixing feeder unit 2 F 10 266 ...

Page 498: ...he 2 screws 1 and detach the drawer connector 2 F 10 268 10 10 32 Duplex Roller 1 10 10 32 1 Removing the Fixing Unit 0000 4939 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the fixing unit 2 F 10 269 10 10 32 2 Removing the Fixing Feeder Unit 0000 8926 1 Remove the 2 stoppers 1 and detach the fixing feeder unit 2 F 10 270 10 10 32 3 Removing the Duplex Roller 1 0000 4942 ...

Page 499: ...und at the rear 3 Remove the 2 E rings 1 gear 2 and link 3 then remove the screw 4 to detach the grounding wire 5 F 10 272 4 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the motor base 2 F 10 273 5 Remove the gear 1 and the bearing 2 at the rear F 10 274 6 Remove the 2 duplex auxiliary guides 1 of the duplex roller F 10 275 ...

Page 500: ... 2 F 10 277 9 Remove the duplexing roller 1 F 10 278 Points to Note When Attaching the Duplex Roller 1 Be sure that the longer side A of the D cut in the roller shaft 1 is toward the front F 10 279 2 When monting be sure that the front tip of the roller shaft is in contact with the grounding plate A F 10 280 10 10 33 Duplex Feed Motor 10 10 33 1 Removing the Fixing Unit 0000 4903 1 Slide out the f...

Page 501: ... 10 282 10 10 33 3 Removing the Duplex Feed Motor 0000 4907 1 Disconnect the connector 1 of the duplex feeder motor from the bottom F 10 283 2 Open the cover of the fixing feeder unit 1 and remove the screw 1 then detach the duct 2 F 10 284 3 Remove the screw 1 at the rear and free the boss A and the hook B then detach the cover rear 2 F 10 285 ...

Page 502: ...hten the lower right screw 1 together with the grounding wire 2 F 10 287 10 10 34 Duplex Registration Sensor 10 10 34 1 Removing the Fixing Unit 0000 8478 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the fixing unit 2 F 10 288 10 10 34 2 Removing the Fixing Feeder Unit 0000 8480 1 Remove the 2 stoppers 1 and detach the fixing feeder unit 2 F 10 289 10 10 34 3 Removing the...

Page 503: ...snap ons A and the 3 hooks B then detach the sheet 1 from behind the fixing feeder assembly F 10 291 10 10 34 4 Removing the Duplex Registration Sensor 0000 8482 1 Disconnect the connector 1 free the 2 claws 2 and remove the sensor base 3 then detach the duplex registration sensor 4 F 10 292 10 10 35 Duplex Horizontal Registration Sensor 10 10 35 1 Removing the Fixing Unit 0000 4890 1 Slide out th...

Page 504: ...he fixing feeder unit cover is at the bottom 2 Free the 6 snap ons A and the 3 hooks B then detach the sheet 1 from behind the fixing feeder assembly F 10 296 10 10 35 4 Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor Support Plate 0000 4893 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then detach the horizontal registration motor support plate 3 F 10 297 When attaching the horizontal registr...

Page 505: ...e 1 coming from the duplex horizontal registration sensor if you twist it inadvertently the loop area will not move smoothly F 10 300 After replacement check to make sure that the sensor flag moves smoothly 10 10 36 Duplex Pickup Sensor 10 10 36 1 Removing the Cleaner Fan Cover 0000 4915 1 Open the front cover 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the cleaner fan cover 2 F 10 301 10 10 36 2 Removing the...

Page 506: ... and the pick up unit 1 2 may also be removed in the same way 1 Slide out the cassette 10 10 36 5 Removing the Manual Feed Unit 0000 4920 1 Press the release button 1 on the machine s right side to slide out the manual feed unit 2 F 10 304 2 Remove the screw 1 and the stopper plate 2 then detach the manual feed unit 3 F 10 305 10 10 36 6 Removing the Front Cover 0000 4921 1 Remove the screw 1 and ...

Page 507: ...vertical path lower cover 1 then detach the pickup vertical path cover 3 F 10 308 10 10 36 9 Removing the Pickup Unit 0000 4924 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 4 screws 2 then detach the pickup unit 3 F 10 309 10 10 36 10 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 0000 4925 1 Remove the upper rear cover 10 10 36 11 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 0000 4926 1 Remove the lower rear cover 10 10 36 12 Re...

Page 508: ...and free the harness from the wire saddle 2 then remove the 6 screws 3 and detach the main controller cover 4 F 10 312 10 10 36 14 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 0000 4930 1 Remove the 8 screws 1 and detach the DC controller PCB cover 2 F 10 313 When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover When attaching the cover take care so that the cut off will not come into contact with the latch of the f...

Page 509: ...controller PCB and the main controller PCB F 10 315 2 Remove the 9 screws 1 of the main controller box F 10 316 F 10 317 3 Free the controller box from the hook A B at the top of the main controller box F 10 318 4 Engage the hook 1 found on the right side of the main controller box on the stay 2 of the machine and open it F 10 319 1 ...

Page 510: ...Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan 0000 4933 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the fixing heat discharge fan 3 F 10 321 10 10 36 18 Removing the Developing Drive Unit 0000 4934 1 Disconnect the connector 2 of the developing motor 1 and free the harness 3 from the cable clamp 4 F 10 322 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the main controller base 2 F 10 323 3 Rem...

Page 511: ...ws 2 to detach the manual feed cooling fan duct 3 F 10 326 10 10 36 21 Removing the Duplex Driver PCB 0006 3015 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the duplex driver PCB 2 F 10 327 10 10 36 22 Removing the Duplex Pickup Sensor 0000 4937 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 from the rear side plate side and detach the rail support plate 2 of the manual feed unit F 10 328 2 Remove the 3 screws 1 from the side of ...

Page 512: ...e lower guide plate 2 F 10 331 5 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the screw 2 then detach the sensor support plate 3 F 10 332 6 Remove the duplex pickup sensor 1 F 10 333 10 10 37 Duplex Registration Clutch 10 10 37 1 Removing the Fixing Unit 0000 4876 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the fixing unit 2 ...

Page 513: ...5 10 10 37 3 Removing the Duplex Feeder Motor Connector 0000 4878 1 Disconnect the connector 1 of the duplex feeder motor from the base side F 10 336 10 10 37 4 Removing the Duplex Open Close Guide 0000 4879 1 Remove the duplex open close guide 1 F 10 337 10 10 37 5 Removing the Duplex Registration Clutch 0000 4880 1 Remove the 2 E rings 1 F 10 338 ...

Page 514: ...o not shift up the sheet by hand F 10 340 3 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the clutch stop 2 then pull the duplex registration clutch 3 upward to detach F 10 341 4 Remove the E ring 1 and detach the duplex registration clutch 2 F 10 342 10 10 38 Duplex Pickup Clutch 10 10 38 1 Removing the Fixing Unit 0000 4897 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the fixin...

Page 515: ...pers 1 and detach the fixing feeder unit 2 F 10 344 10 10 38 3 Removing the Duplex Open Close Guide 0000 4900 1 Remove the duplex open close guide 1 F 10 345 10 10 38 4 Removing the Duplex Pickup Clutch 0000 4901 1 Open the cover of the fixing feeder unit 1 F 10 346 2 Remove the 2 E rings 1 F 10 347 ...

Page 516: ...g 1 then detach the duplex pickup clutch 2 F 10 350 When attaching be sure that the stop A of the clutch is at the bottommost F 10 351 Make sure that the front side of the roller shaft is in contact with the leaf spring 1 F 10 352 10 10 39 Delivery Vertical Path Unit 10 10 39 1 Removing the Fixing Unit 0006 3193 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the fixing unit...

Page 517: ...cal path cover 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then detach the upper left cover 3 F 10 355 10 10 39 4 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit Old 0000 4802 In case following models refer to Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit New flom MLW01838 flom MLX02392 1 Detach the strap 1 from the delivery vertical cover then detach the delivery vertical path cover 2 F 10 356 2 Remove the screw 1 and detac...

Page 518: ... the machine and secure it with screws Be sure to tighten the left screw first F 10 359 10 10 39 5 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit New 0006 4883 For the new delivery vertical path unit to function the version of the DC controller must be 3 06 or later Be sure to check its version in service mode COPIER DISPLAY VERSION D CON 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit 2 Open the delivery vertical ...

Page 519: ...ivery path unit will no longer be used F 10 362 5 Using a flat blade screwdriver detach the slip stop 2 from the delivery vertical path cover 1 then detach the strap 3 from the delivery inside cover The delivery vertical path cover will no longer be used F 10 363 6 Attach the strap 1 found on the delivery inside cover to the new delivery vertical path cover 2 then fix it in place using the slip st...

Page 520: ...ath unit in place F 10 366 9 Using 4 screws secure the delivery vertical path unit 3 in place then connect the 3 connectors At this time check to make sure that the machine positioner 4 is properly in place F 10 367 10 Mount the new delivery vertical path cover 1 to the machine then fix the delivery inside cover 2 in place using a screw 3 F 10 368 11 Fix the upper left cover 1 using 2 screws 2 the...

Page 521: ...he Center Delivery Tray 0000 4822 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the center delivery tray 2 F 10 371 10 10 40 3 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit Old 0000 4823 In case following models refer to Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit New flom MLW01838 flom MLX02392 1 Detach the strap 1 from the delivery vertical cover then detach the delivery vertical path cover 2 F 10 372 2 Remove the...

Page 522: ... the machine and secure it with screws Be sure to tighten the left screw first F 10 375 10 10 40 4 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit New 0006 8958 For the new delivery vertical path unit to function the version of the DC controller must be 3 06 or later Be sure to check its version in service mode COPIER DISPLAY VERSION D CON 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit 2 Open the delivery vertical ...

Page 523: ...ivery path unit will no longer be used F 10 378 5 Using a flat blade screwdriver detach the slip stop 2 from the delivery vertical path cover 1 then detach the strap 3 from the delivery inside cover The delivery vertical path cover will no longer be used F 10 379 6 Attach the strap 1 found on the delivery inside cover to the new delivery vertical path cover 2 then fix it in place using the slip st...

Page 524: ...ath unit in place F 10 382 9 Using 4 screws secure the delivery vertical path unit 3 in place then connect the 3 connectors At this time check to make sure that the machine positioner 4 is properly in place F 10 383 10 Mount the new delivery vertical path cover 1 to the machine then fix the delivery inside cover 2 in place using a screw 3 F 10 384 11 Fix the upper left cover 1 using 2 screws 2 the...

Page 525: ...and then route the wire to facilitate the work 10 10 40 6 Removing the Face Down Delivery Sensor Flag 0006 3776 1 Shift up the sensor flag 1 of the face down delivery sensor 1 and pull it upward to detach F 10 387 MEMO The edge of the sensor flag is cut to an I shape permitting it to be removed upward F 10 388 Points to Note When Attaching the Sensor Flag When attaching the sensor flag be sure to ...

Page 526: ...ry sub frame 4 F 10 391 Points to Note When Attaching the grounding Leaf Spring When attaching shape the grounding leaf plate removed in 3 into a half loop and work so that the frame plate 1 and the grounding leaf spring 2 are in contact F 10 392 3 Remove the E ring 1 and the bushing 2 and remove the gear 3 and the bushing 4 found to the rear of the face down delivery roller 1 then detach the face...

Page 527: ...3 then release the link 4 F 10 395 2 Remove the screw 1 at the front and the cover fixing pin 2 then detach the fixing feeder unit cover F 10 396 10 10 41 3 Removing the Inside Delivery Roller 0000 4844 1 Open the fixing feeder unit cover F 10 397 2 Remove the E ring 1 and the bushing 2 at the front then remove the gear 3 and the bushing 4 at the rear F 10 398 ...

Page 528: ...2 screws 1 and detach the lower guide 2 2 F 10 400 2 Remove the E ring 1 at the rear and detach the gear 2 F 10 401 3 The spring 1 hooked on the flapper of the upper guide is small and can easily be lost Detach it in advance F 10 402 Remove the screw 2 of the gear mounting plate 1 and remove the screw 3 then detach the upper guide 4 F 10 403 4 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the lower guide 2 ...

Page 529: ... Remove the E ring 1 and the bushing 2 at the front then detach the face up delivery roller 3 F 10 406 10 10 42 Delivery Vertical Path Roller 1 10 10 42 1 Removing the Upper Left Cover 0000 4846 1 Open the delivery vertical path cover 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then detach the upper left cover 3 F 10 407 10 10 42 2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray 0000 4847 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the...

Page 530: ... vertical path cover 2 F 10 409 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the delivery internal cover 2 F 10 410 3 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 and remove the 4 screws 2 then detach the delivery vertical path unit 3 F 10 411 Points to Note When Mounting the Delivery Vertical Path Unit When attaching engage the left right hook 1 found on the side of the delivery vertical path unit on the plate on the side o...

Page 531: ...eeding unit 2 Open the delivery vertical path cover 1 then remove the 2 screws 2 and detach the upper left cover 3 F 10 413 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the delivery inside cover 2 then detach the delivery vertical path cover 3 from the machine F 10 414 4 To detach the delivery vertical path unit lift the unit and then pull it out toward the front Disconnect the 2 concoctors 1 and remove the 4 ...

Page 532: ...17 7 Remove the dummy connector 1 from the machine The dummy connector will no longer be used F 10 418 8 Fit the top 1 of the new delivery vertical path inside of the machine plate 2 When mounting the delivery vertical path unit be sure to lift it once before setting it in place Engage the left and right hooks 3 on the machine plate 4 so as to set the new delivery vertical path unit in place F 10 ...

Page 533: ...se the delivery vertical path cover 3 and put the fixing feeding unit back in its initial position F 10 422 10 10 42 5 Removing the Face Down Delivery Sensor 2 0000 4849 1 Free the harness 2 from the wire saddle 1 disconnect the 2 connectors 3 and remove the 2 screws 4 then detach the face down delivery motor mounting plate 5 F 10 423 2 Remove the sensor flag 1 and detach the face down delivery se...

Page 534: ...g 2 at the front then remove the gear 3 and detach the belt 4 Thereafter remove the bushing 5 and detach the delivery vertical path roller 1 6 F 10 426 F 10 427 10 10 43 Delivery Vertical Path Roller 2 10 10 43 1 Removing the Upper Left Cover 0000 4852 1 Open the delivery vertical path cover 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then detach the upper left cover 3 F 10 428 10 10 43 2 Removing the Center Deli...

Page 535: ... vertical path cover 2 F 10 430 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the delivery internal cover 2 F 10 431 3 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 and remove the 4 screws 2 then detach the delivery vertical path unit 3 F 10 432 Points to Note When Mounting the Delivery Vertical Path Unit When attaching engage the left right hook 1 found on the side of the delivery vertical path unit on the plate on the side o...

Page 536: ...ft cover 3 F 10 434 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the delivery inside cover 2 then detach the delivery vertical path cover 3 from the machine F 10 435 4 To detach the delivery vertical path unit lift the unit and then pull it out toward the front Disconnect the 2 concoctors 1 and remove the 4 screws 2 then detach the delivery path unit 3 The delivery path unit will no longer be used F 10 436 5 U...

Page 537: ... Fit the top 1 of the new delivery vertical path inside of the machine plate 2 When mounting the delivery vertical path unit be sure to lift it once before setting it in place Engage the left and right hooks 3 on the machine plate 4 so as to set the new delivery vertical path unit in place F 10 440 9 Using 4 screws secure the delivery vertical path unit 3 in place then connect the 3 connectors At ...

Page 538: ...1 using 2 screws 2 then close the delivery vertical path cover 3 and put the fixing feeding unit back in its initial position F 10 443 10 10 43 5 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Roller 2 0000 4855 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then detach the delivery vertical path motor 3 together with the mounting plate F 10 444 2 Remove the gear 1 and the bushing 2 F 10 445 ...

Page 539: ... detach the upper left cover 3 F 10 447 10 10 44 2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray 0000 4834 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the center delivery tray 2 F 10 448 10 10 44 3 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit Old 0000 4835 In case following models refer to Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit New flom MLW01838 flom MLX02392 1 Detach the strap 1 from the delivery vertical cover then de...

Page 540: ...e plate on the side of the machine and secure it with screws Be sure to tighten the left screw first F 10 452 10 10 44 4 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit New 0006 8961 For the new delivery vertical path unit to function the version of the DC controller must be 3 06 or later Be sure to check its version in service mode COPIER DISPLAY VERSION D CON 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit 2 Open ...

Page 541: ...ry path unit 3 The delivery path unit will no longer be used F 10 455 5 Using a flat blade screwdriver detach the slip stop 2 from the delivery vertical path cover 1 then detach the strap 3 from the delivery inside cover The delivery vertical path cover will no longer be used F 10 456 6 Attach the strap 1 found on the delivery inside cover to the new delivery vertical path cover 2 then fix it in p...

Page 542: ...ath unit in place F 10 459 9 Using 4 screws secure the delivery vertical path unit 3 in place then connect the 3 connectors At this time check to make sure that the machine positioner 4 is properly in place F 10 460 10 Mount the new delivery vertical path cover 1 to the machine then fix the delivery inside cover 2 in place using a screw 3 F 10 461 11 Fix the upper left cover 1 using 2 screws 2 the...

Page 543: ...oving the Upper Left Cover 0000 4857 1 Open the delivery vertical path cover 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then detach the upper left cover 3 F 10 464 10 10 45 2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray 0000 4858 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the center delivery tray 2 F 10 465 10 10 45 3 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit Old 0000 4859 In case following models refer to Removing the Delivery Ver...

Page 544: ...tors 1 and remove the 4 screws 2 then detach the delivery vertical path unit 3 F 10 468 Points to Note When Mounting the Delivery Vertical Path Unit When attaching engage the left right hook 1 found on the side of the delivery vertical path unit on the plate on the side of the machine and secure it with screws Be sure to tighten the left screw first F 10 469 10 10 45 4 Removing the Delivery Vertic...

Page 545: ...l path cover 3 from the machine F 10 471 4 To detach the delivery vertical path unit lift the unit and then pull it out toward the front Disconnect the 2 concoctors 1 and remove the 4 screws 2 then detach the delivery path unit 3 The delivery path unit will no longer be used F 10 472 5 Using a flat blade screwdriver detach the slip stop 2 from the delivery vertical path cover 1 then detach the str...

Page 546: ...t once before setting it in place Engage the left and right hooks 3 on the machine plate 4 so as to set the new delivery vertical path unit in place F 10 476 9 Using 4 screws secure the delivery vertical path unit 3 in place then connect the 3 connectors At this time check to make sure that the machine positioner 4 is properly in place F 10 477 10 Mount the new delivery vertical path cover 1 to th...

Page 547: ...000 4860 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then detach the delivery vertical path motor 3 F 10 480 10 10 46 Face Down Delivery Sensor 1 10 10 46 1 Removing the Upper Left Cover 0000 4810 1 Open the delivery vertical path cover 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then detach the upper left cover 3 F 10 481 10 10 46 2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray 0000 4811 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 a...

Page 548: ...he screw 1 and detach the delivery internal cover 2 F 10 484 3 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 and remove the 4 screws 2 then detach the delivery vertical path unit 3 F 10 485 Points to Note When Mounting the Delivery Vertical Path Unit When attaching engage the left right hook 1 found on the side of the delivery vertical path unit on the plate on the side of the machine and secure it with screws Be...

Page 549: ...l path cover 3 from the machine F 10 488 4 To detach the delivery vertical path unit lift the unit and then pull it out toward the front Disconnect the 2 concoctors 1 and remove the 4 screws 2 then detach the delivery path unit 3 The delivery path unit will no longer be used F 10 489 5 Using a flat blade screwdriver detach the slip stop 2 from the delivery vertical path cover 1 then detach the str...

Page 550: ...t once before setting it in place Engage the left and right hooks 3 on the machine plate 4 so as to set the new delivery vertical path unit in place F 10 493 9 Using 4 screws secure the delivery vertical path unit 3 in place then connect the 3 connectors At this time check to make sure that the machine positioner 4 is properly in place F 10 494 10 Mount the new delivery vertical path cover 1 to th...

Page 551: ...the sensor flag 1 of the face down delivery sensor 1 and pull it upward to detach F 10 497 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the face down delivery sensor 1 2 F 10 498 MEMO The edge of the sensor flag is cut to an I shape permitting it to be removed upward F 10 499 Points to Note When Attaching the Sensor Flag When attaching the sensor flag be sure to match the L shaped area A of the spring ...

Page 552: ...and detach the center delivery tray 2 F 10 502 10 10 47 3 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit Old 0000 4864 In case following models refer to Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit New flom MLW01838 flom MLX02392 1 Detach the strap 1 from the delivery vertical cover then detach the delivery vertical path cover 2 F 10 503 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the delivery internal cover 2 F 10 504...

Page 553: ...8964 For the new delivery vertical path unit to function the version of the DC controller must be 3 06 or later Be sure to check its version in service mode COPIER DISPLAY VERSION D CON 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit 2 Open the delivery vertical path cover 1 then remove the 2 screws 2 and detach the upper left cover 3 F 10 507 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the delivery inside cover 2 then d...

Page 554: ...ger be used F 10 510 6 Attach the strap 1 found on the delivery inside cover to the new delivery vertical path cover 2 then fix it in place using the slip stop 3 F 10 511 7 Remove the dummy connector 1 from the machine The dummy connector will no longer be used F 10 512 8 Fit the top 1 of the new delivery vertical path inside of the machine plate 2 When mounting the delivery vertical path unit be ...

Page 555: ...al path cover 1 to the machine then fix the delivery inside cover 2 in place using a screw 3 F 10 515 11 Fix the upper left cover 1 using 2 screws 2 then close the delivery vertical path cover 3 and put the fixing feeding unit back in its initial position F 10 516 10 10 47 5 Removing the Center Delivery Tray Full sensor 0000 4865 1 Remove the sensor flag 1 then disconnect the connector 2 and detac...

Page 556: ... detach the center delivery tray 2 F 10 519 10 10 48 3 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit Old 0000 4818 In case following models refer to Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit New flom MLW01838 flom MLX02392 1 Detach the strap 1 from the delivery vertical cover then detach the delivery vertical path cover 2 F 10 520 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the delivery internal cover 2 F 10 521 3 ...

Page 557: ...8965 For the new delivery vertical path unit to function the version of the DC controller must be 3 06 or later Be sure to check its version in service mode COPIER DISPLAY VERSION D CON 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit 2 Open the delivery vertical path cover 1 then remove the 2 screws 2 and detach the upper left cover 3 F 10 524 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the delivery inside cover 2 then d...

Page 558: ...ger be used F 10 527 6 Attach the strap 1 found on the delivery inside cover to the new delivery vertical path cover 2 then fix it in place using the slip stop 3 F 10 528 7 Remove the dummy connector 1 from the machine The dummy connector will no longer be used F 10 529 8 Fit the top 1 of the new delivery vertical path inside of the machine plate 2 When mounting the delivery vertical path unit be ...

Page 559: ... machine then fix the delivery inside cover 2 in place using a screw 3 F 10 532 11 Fix the upper left cover 1 using 2 screws 2 then close the delivery vertical path cover 3 and put the fixing feeding unit back in its initial position F 10 533 10 10 48 5 Removing the Face Down Delivery Sensor 2 0000 4819 1 Free the harness 2 from the wire saddle 1 disconnect the 2 connectors 3 and remove the 2 scre...

Page 560: ...th Cover Open Closed Sensor 10 10 49 1 Removing the Upper Left Cover 0000 4804 1 Open the delivery vertical path cover 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then detach the upper left cover 3 F 10 537 10 10 49 2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray 0000 4805 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the center delivery tray 2 F 10 538 10 10 49 3 Removing the Delivery Vertical Path Unit Old 0000 4806 In case following...

Page 561: ... 10 540 3 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 and remove the 4 screws 2 then detach the delivery vertical path unit 3 F 10 541 Points to Note When Mounting the Delivery Vertical Path Unit When attaching engage the left right hook 1 found on the side of the delivery vertical path unit on the plate on the side of the machine and secure it with screws Be sure to tighten the left screw first F 10 542 ...

Page 562: ...3 F 10 543 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the delivery inside cover 2 then detach the delivery vertical path cover 3 from the machine F 10 544 4 To detach the delivery vertical path unit lift the unit and then pull it out toward the front Disconnect the 2 concoctors 1 and remove the 4 screws 2 then detach the delivery path unit 3 The delivery path unit will no longer be used F 10 545 5 Using a fl...

Page 563: ...plate 2 When mounting the delivery vertical path unit be sure to lift it once before setting it in place Engage the left and right hooks 3 on the machine plate 4 so as to set the new delivery vertical path unit in place F 10 549 9 Using 4 screws secure the delivery vertical path unit 3 in place then connect the 3 connectors At this time check to make sure that the machine positioner 4 is properly ...

Page 564: ...d Sensor 0000 4808 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the delivery vertical path cover open closed sensor 2 F 10 553 10 10 50 Delivery Path Switching Solenoid 1 10 10 50 1 Removing the Upper Left Cover 0000 4867 1 Open the delivery vertical path cover 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then detach the upper left cover 3 F 10 554 10 10 50 2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray 0000 4868 1 Remove the 2 s...

Page 565: ... path cover 2 F 10 556 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the delivery internal cover 2 F 10 557 3 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 and remove the 4 screws 2 then detach the delivery vertical path unit 3 F 10 558 Points to Note When Mounting the Delivery Vertical Path Unit When attaching engage the left right hook 1 found on the side of the delivery vertical path unit on the plate on the side of the mac...

Page 566: ...3 F 10 560 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the delivery inside cover 2 then detach the delivery vertical path cover 3 from the machine F 10 561 4 To detach the delivery vertical path unit lift the unit and then pull it out toward the front Disconnect the 2 concoctors 1 and remove the 4 screws 2 then detach the delivery path unit 3 The delivery path unit will no longer be used F 10 562 5 Using a fl...

Page 567: ...plate 2 When mounting the delivery vertical path unit be sure to lift it once before setting it in place Engage the left and right hooks 3 on the machine plate 4 so as to set the new delivery vertical path unit in place F 10 566 9 Using 4 screws secure the delivery vertical path unit 3 in place then connect the 3 connectors At this time check to make sure that the machine positioner 4 is properly ...

Page 568: ...an Cover 0000 4870 1 Open the front cover 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the cleaner fan cover 2 F 10 570 10 10 50 6 Removing the Cleaner Fan 0006 2819 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the 3 claws then detach the cleaner fan 2 F 10 571 10 10 50 7 Removing the Delivery Path Switching Solenoid 1 0000 8475 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the screw 2 then detach the delivery path switchi...

Page 569: ...hen detach the delivery path switching solenoid 2 3 together with the mounting plate F 10 574 10 10 52 Face Down Delivery Roller 1 Drive Belt 10 10 52 1 Removing the Upper Left Cover 0000 4828 1 Open the delivery vertical path cover 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then detach the upper left cover 3 F 10 575 10 10 52 2 Removing the Center Delivery Tray 0000 4829 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the c...

Page 570: ... path cover 2 F 10 577 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the delivery internal cover 2 F 10 578 3 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 and remove the 4 screws 2 then detach the delivery vertical path unit 3 F 10 579 Points to Note When Mounting the Delivery Vertical Path Unit When attaching engage the left right hook 1 found on the side of the delivery vertical path unit on the plate on the side of the mac...

Page 571: ...3 F 10 581 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the delivery inside cover 2 then detach the delivery vertical path cover 3 from the machine F 10 582 4 To detach the delivery vertical path unit lift the unit and then pull it out toward the front Disconnect the 2 concoctors 1 and remove the 4 screws 2 then detach the delivery path unit 3 The delivery path unit will no longer be used F 10 583 5 Using a fl...

Page 572: ...plate 2 When mounting the delivery vertical path unit be sure to lift it once before setting it in place Engage the left and right hooks 3 on the machine plate 4 so as to set the new delivery vertical path unit in place F 10 587 9 Using 4 screws secure the delivery vertical path unit 3 in place then connect the 3 connectors At this time check to make sure that the machine positioner 4 is properly ...

Page 573: ...y vertical path cover 3 and put the fixing feeding unit back in its initial position F 10 590 10 10 52 5 Removing the Face Down Delivery Roller 1 Drive Belt 0000 4831 1 Free the protrusion 1 of the belt pulley upper or lower from the groove of the shaft and shift it then detach the belt 2 F 10 591 ...

Page 574: ...Chapter 10 10 168 ...

Page 575: ...Chapter 11 Fixing System ...

Page 576: ......

Page 577: ...the Passage of Paper 11 14 11 3 3 1 Detecting the Passage of Paper 11 14 11 4 Protective Functions 11 15 11 4 1 Turning Off the Power Against Overheating in response to activation of thermal switch 11 15 11 4 2 Detecting Overheating by the Thermistors 11 16 11 5 Parts Replacement Procedure 11 17 11 5 1 Fixing Unit 11 17 11 5 1 1 Removing the Fixing Unit 11 17 11 5 1 2 After Disassembling the Fixin...

Page 578: ...sembling the Fixing Unit 11 45 11 5 9 Fixing Heat Retaining Heater 11 45 11 5 9 1 Removing the Fixing Unit 11 45 11 5 9 2 Removing the Delivery Upper Guide 11 46 11 5 9 3 Removing the Fixing Upper Frame 11 46 11 5 9 4 Removing the Fixing Temperature Retainer Heater 11 48 11 5 9 5 After Disassembling the Fixing Unit 11 49 11 5 10 Fixing Inlet Guide 11 50 11 5 10 1 Removing the Fixing Unit 11 50 11 ...

Page 579: ...ver 11 64 11 5 15 3 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 11 64 11 5 15 4 Removing the Controller Box Cover 11 65 11 5 15 5 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 11 65 11 5 15 6 Opening the Main Controller Box 11 65 11 5 15 7 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan 11 66 11 5 15 8 Removing the High Voltage Unit 11 66 11 5 15 9 Removing the Left Lower Rear cover 11 67 11 5 15 10 Removing the Secondary T...

Page 580: ......

Page 581: ...nter of fixing roller Sub thermistor TH2 rear end of fixing roller Protective mechanism Error detection as follows upon detection of error cuts off power to fixing heater temperature detection by thermistor TH1 TH2 temperature control by fixing thermal switch TP1 front end of fixing roller operating temperature of 222 8 deg C Separation claw Non contact type facilitates separation of paper in high...

Page 582: ...ct type facilitates paper separation in high humidity environment Fixing inlet sensor PS27 Detection of passage of paper to fixing unit Fixing delivery sensor PS25 Detection of delivery of paper after fixing Component Notation Description Fixing roller Pressure roller Thermal switch TP1 Main thermistor TH1 non contact Sub thermistor Main heater H1 Sub heater H2 Heat retaining heater Fixing inlet g...

Page 583: ...J2_1 J2_3 J2_2 Thermal switch TP1 Main thermistor TH1 non contact Sub thermistor TH2 Main heater H1 Sub heater H2 Fixing inlet sensor PS27 Fixing motor Heat retaining heater H3 DC controller PCB Fixing delivery sensor PS25 Fuse PCB Heater driver PCB SUB_FUSER_THM J108 8 MAIN_FUSER_ THM2 J108 11 MAIN_FUSER_ THM1 J108 10 PM FUSER FUSER DELI_SNS FUSER ENTER_SNS H1_ON H3_ON H2_ON H1_ON H2_ON J105 6 to...

Page 584: ...Y 360sec Fixing system Rotates idly for 300 sec after end of drum ITB motor rotation Starts here if the surface temperature of the fixing roller is 90 C or more when the main power switch is turned on 1 1 300 sec 90 C 190 C Here alternately ON for 3 sec and OFF for 1 5 sec 1 The main heater or the sub heater performs temperature control to 190 C according to the reading of the main thermistor TH1 ...

Page 585: ...ing heat retain ing heater H3 Fixing motor M24 Start key ON LSTR 10 sec 20 sec 20 sec 130 sec 193 C 190 C 185 C 174 C 164 C 1 The main heater or the sub heater performs temperature control to 190 C according to the reading of the main thermistor TH1 or the sub thermistor TH2 Controlled to 193 C Controlled to 185 C Controlled to 174 C 1st sheet passed Fixing system Controlled to 164 C ...

Page 586: ...r or the sub heater performs temperature control to 190 C according to the reading of the main thermistor TH1 or the sub thermistor TH2 Idle rotation 1st sheet passed Fixing main heater H1 Fixing sub heater H2 Fixing heat retain ing heater H3 Fixing motor M24 Start key ON Fixing system Controlled to 193 C Controlled to 185 C Controlled to 174 C Controlled to 170 C Controlled to 164 C 193 C 190 C 1...

Page 587: ...ng the Speed According to the Type of Paper 0000 5018 Controlling the Speed According to the Type of Paper The machine controls the fixing roller to the following 2 speeds to suit the type of medium used T 11 3 Note The speed of the fixing roller is reduced to half to ensure good fixing on thick paper thick paper speed or on a full color transparency full color transparency mode Medium Fixing spee...

Page 588: ...nting Partial Deformation of the Roller 0000 5020 To prevent deformation otherwise caused by the nip pressure of the fixing roller as occurring when the machine is left unattended for a long period of time the fixing roller is rotated for 0 5 sec at half speed 64 55 mm sec every 30 min after it has stopped i e during standby low power mode 11 3 2 Controlling the Fixing Roller Temperature 11 3 2 1 ...

Page 589: ... Main heater H1 Sub heater H2 Heat retaining heater H3 SUB_FUSER_THM J108 8 MAIN_FUSER_ THM2 J108 11 MAIN_FUSER_ THM1 J108 10 J105A_1 J105A_14 J105A_13 H1_ON H3_ON H2_ON H1_ON H2_ON J51_1 J51_2 J51_14 J62 J54_12 J54_11 J69_1 J69_2 J2_1 J2_3 J2_2 DC controller PCB Heater drive PCB Fuse PCB 24V ...

Page 590: ...g of the non contact thermistor TH1 or sub thermistor TH2 If the reading of the main thermistor is assumed to be Th1 and that of the sub thermistor is assumed to be Th2 if Th1 Th2 the temperature control will be by the sub heater if Th1 Th2 the temperature control will be by the main heater The temperature of the pressure roller is controlled by the heat retaining heater which repeatedly remains o...

Page 591: ... the reading of the main thermistor TH1 or the sub thermistor TH2 2 The fixing heat retaining heater repeatedly remains ON for 4 2 sec and OFF for 1 6 sec 1 2 Fixing main heater H1 Fixing sub heater H2 Fixing heat retain ing heater H3 Fixing motor M24 Fixing system 1 The main heater or the sub heater performs temperature control to 190 C according to the reading of the main thermistor TH1 and the ...

Page 592: ... 60 sec or more The fixing temperature control sequence and the heater main sub control sequence are performed over the distance up to 60 sec thereafter only the heater sequence control is performed 1 1 PSTBY PSTBY PINTR PRINT LSTR Controlled to 193 C Controlled to 185 C Controlled to 174 C Controlled to 170 C Idle rotation 1st sheet passed Controlled to 164 C 1 The main heater or the sub heater p...

Page 593: ...ob only in black mono mode In the case of color mode the machine will not accept a job until the temperature of the fixing roller reaches 190 deg C after a lapse of 30 sec N sheet to sheet distance after 60 sec N PSTBY PSTBY PINTR PRINT 10 sec 20 sec 20 sec 15 to 60 sec 60 to sec 10 sec 20 sec LSTR 1 1 1 1 Controlled to 185 C Controlled to 174 C Controlled to 174 C Controlled to 174 C Controlled t...

Page 594: ...ing unit are as follows 1 Fixing Inlet Sensor Detects passage of paper being moved into the fixing unit 2 Fixing Delivery Sensor Detects the passage of paper being moved from the fixing assembly F 11 14 DC controller PCB Pressure roller Fixing roller 5V 5V FUSER_ENTER_SNS FUSER_DELI_SNS Fixing delivery sensor PS25 Fixing inlet sensor PS27 J108_6 J108_5 J108_4 J108_3 J108_2 J108_1 ...

Page 595: ...sure to replace it If the internal temperature of the thermal switch exceeds 222 8 deg C the thermal switch goes OFF to cut the power to the fixing heater F 11 15 RL Q20 Q21 Q22 Q10 Q11 Q23 Heater drive circuit Triac short circuit detection PCB Heater drive circuit Triac short circuit detection PCB 6 3 2 1 Fuse PCB Fixing roller 6 3 1 2 J2_3 J4 J5 J2_2 J2_1 9 12 14 13 DC controller PCB CB Heater c...

Page 596: ...er to the main heater and the sub heater F 11 16 DC controller PCB Fuse PCB RL H1 TH1 TH2 H2 CB Heater control PCB Triac short circuit detec tion circuit Triac short circuit detec tion circuit Heater drive circuit Heater drive circuit CPU H3 1 9 12 13 14 14 6 3 2 1 2 1 8 10 11 1sec J51 J62 J105 J108 SW Fuse Sub thermistor detection signal Main thermistor detection signal by infrared Main thermisto...

Page 597: ...XING NIP CHK F 11 19 3 Adjust the balance between the front and the rear 4 If the median value of the measured nip is toward the lower limit of the standard tighten the screw on the side with a lower nip value at the edge MEMO A 1 2 turn of the screw shifts the nip balance by about 0 4 mm A 1 2 turn on the screw at the front will increase the nip at the front by 0 3 mm decreasing the nip at the re...

Page 598: ...r Frame 11 5 2 1 Removing the Fixing Unit 0000 5041 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the fixing unit 2 F 11 21 11 5 2 2 Removing the Delivery Upper Guide 0000 5042 1 Remove the insulating cover fixing plate 1 3 snap on claws F 11 22 2 Remove the insulating cover 1 F 11 23 3 Remove the rear cover 1 2 snap on claws ...

Page 599: ...guide 3 F 11 25 11 5 2 3 Removing the Fixing Upper Frame 0000 5043 1 Remove the 2 screws 2 of the grounding wire AC heater line F 11 26 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the drawer connector 2 F 11 27 3 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 for the thermistor thermal switch F 11 28 4 Remove the 2 adjusting screws 1 F 11 29 ...

Page 600: ...ce as when replacing a roller be sure to adjust the nip of the fixing roller as follows 1 Turn the adjusting screw 1 at the front rear so that the length of the pressure spring is 31 5mm F 11 33 2 Fit the fixing unit in the machine and execute the following service mode to measure the nip COPIER FUNCTION FIXING NIP CHK F 11 34 3 Adjust the balance between the front and the rear 4 If the median val...

Page 601: ...ent while the nip balance is correct the adjusting screw both at the front and rear may be given a 1 2 turn so that the nip may change by about 0 3 mm F 11 35 Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION FIXING NIP CHK Use it to generate output for fixing nip width auto measurement 11 5 3 Fixing Roller 11 5 3 1 Removing the Fixing Unit 0000 5052 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and deta...

Page 602: ... free the 4 snap ons to detach the delivery upper guide 3 F 11 40 11 5 3 3 Removing the Fixing Upper Frame 0000 5054 1 Remove the 2 screws 2 of the grounding wire AC heater line F 11 41 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the drawer connector 2 F 11 42 3 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 for the thermistor thermal switch ...

Page 603: ...d the gear 2 F 11 45 6 Remove the shaft 1 used to secure the fixing upper frame lower frame at the front F 11 46 7 Separate the fixing upper frame and the lower frame and detach the fixing upper frame 1 F 11 47 11 5 3 4 Remove the Fixing Main Heater and the Fixing Sub Heater 0000 5055 1 Remove the heater retaining spring needle shaped 1 at the rear ...

Page 604: ... the fixing main heater 1 and the fixing sub heater 2 F 11 50 11 5 3 5 Removing the Fixing Roller 0000 5057 1 Remove the separation claw 1 F 11 51 Points to Note When Attaching hte Separation Claw When attaching the separation claw be sure that it is mounted as indicated F 11 52 2 Remove the fixing roller 1 ...

Page 605: ...ue of the measured nip is toward the lower limit of the standard tighten the screw on the side with a lower nip value at the edge MEMO A 1 2 turn of the screw shifts the nip balance by about 0 4 mm A 1 2 turn on the screw at the front will increase the nip at the front by 0 3 mm decreasing the nip at the rear by 0 2 mm If the median value of the measured nip is toward the higher limit of the stand...

Page 606: ...Roller 11 5 4 1 Removing the Fixing Unit 0000 5066 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the fixing unit 2 F 11 57 11 5 4 2 Removing the Delivery Upper Guide 0000 5067 1 Remove the insulating cover fixing plate 1 3 snap on claws F 11 58 2 Remove the insulating cover 1 F 11 59 3 Remove the rear cover 1 2 snap on claws ...

Page 607: ...guide 3 F 11 61 11 5 4 3 Removing the Fixing Upper Frame 0000 5068 1 Remove the 2 screws 2 of the grounding wire AC heater line F 11 62 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the drawer connector 2 F 11 63 3 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 for the thermistor thermal switch F 11 64 4 Remove the 2 adjusting screws 1 F 11 65 ...

Page 608: ...t the front F 11 67 7 Separate the fixing upper frame and the lower frame and detach the fixing upper frame 1 F 11 68 11 5 4 4 Removing the Fixing Temperature Retainer Heater 0000 5069 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and pull out the 2 fastons 2 F 11 69 2 Remove the screw 1 front the sub heater contact at the front F 11 70 3 Remove the screw 1 at the rear and detach the heater retaining plate 2 ...

Page 609: ...ip of the fixing roller as follows 1 Turn the adjusting screw 1 at the front rear so that the length of the pressure spring is 31 5mm F 11 74 2 Fit the fixing unit in the machine and execute the following service mode to measure the nip COPIER FUNCTION FIXING NIP CHK F 11 75 3 Adjust the balance between the front and the rear 4 If the median value of the measured nip is toward the lower limit of t...

Page 610: ...while the nip balance is correct the adjusting screw both at the front and rear may be given a 1 2 turn so that the nip may change by about 0 3 mm F 11 76 Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION FIXING NIP CHK Use it to generate output for fixing nip width auto measurement 11 5 5 Fixing Main Thermistor 11 5 5 1 Removing the Fixing Unit 0000 5073 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and...

Page 611: ... free the 4 snap ons to detach the delivery upper guide 3 F 11 81 11 5 5 3 Removing the Fixing Upper Frame 0000 5075 1 Remove the 2 screws 2 of the grounding wire AC heater line F 11 82 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the drawer connector 2 F 11 83 3 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 for the thermistor thermal switch ...

Page 612: ...e gear 2 F 11 86 6 Remove the shaft 1 used to secure the fixing upper frame lower frame at the front F 11 87 7 Separate the fixing upper frame and the lower frame and detach the fixing upper frame 1 F 11 88 11 5 5 4 Removing the Fixing Main Thermistor 0006 2112 1 While freeing the retaining screw 1 of the upper frame detach the fixing main thermistor 2 ...

Page 613: ... Adjust the balance between the front and the rear 4 If the median value of the measured nip is toward the lower limit of the standard tighten the screw on the side with a lower nip value at the edge MEMO A 1 2 turn of the screw shifts the nip balance by about 0 4 mm A 1 2 turn on the screw at the front will increase the nip at the front by 0 3 mm decreasing the nip at the rear by 0 2 mm If the me...

Page 614: ...hermistor 11 5 6 1 Removing the Fixing Unit 0000 5079 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the fixing unit 2 F 11 93 11 5 6 2 Removing the Delivery Upper Guide 0000 5080 1 Remove the insulating cover fixing plate 1 3 snap on claws F 11 94 2 Remove the insulating cover 1 F 11 95 3 Remove the rear cover 1 2 snap on claws ...

Page 615: ...uide 3 F 11 97 11 5 6 3 Removing the Fixing Upper Frame 0000 5081 1 Remove the 2 screws 2 of the grounding wire AC heater line F 11 98 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the drawer connector 2 F 11 99 3 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 for the thermistor thermal switch F 11 100 4 Remove the 2 adjusting screws 1 F 11 101 ...

Page 616: ... 1 F 11 104 11 5 6 4 Removing the Fixing Sub thermistor 0000 5082 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fixing sub thermistor 2 F 11 105 11 5 6 5 After Disassembling the Fixing Unit 0000 5083 If you have loosened the adjusting screw used to secure the upper frame and the lower frame of the fixing unit in place as when replacing a roller be sure to adjust the nip of the fixing roller as follows 1 Tur...

Page 617: ... median value of the measured nip is toward the higher limit of the standard tighten the screw on the side with a higher nip value at the edge If the nip needs adjustment while the nip balance is correct the adjusting screw both at the front and rear may be given a 1 2 turn so that the nip may change by about 0 3 mm F 11 108 Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION FIXING NIP CHK Use it to generate output for...

Page 618: ...claws F 11 110 2 Remove the insulating cover 1 F 11 111 3 Remove the rear cover 1 2 snap on claws F 11 112 4 Pick the tab 2 of the lower guide 1 and free the 4 snap ons to detach the delivery upper guide 3 F 11 113 11 5 7 3 Removing the Fixing Upper Frame 0000 5087 1 Remove the 2 screws 2 of the grounding wire AC heater line F 11 114 ...

Page 619: ...h F 11 116 4 Remove the 2 adjusting screws 1 F 11 117 5 Remove the shaft 1 used to secure the fixing upper frame lower frame in place and the gear 2 F 11 118 6 Remove the shaft 1 used to secure the fixing upper frame lower frame at the front F 11 119 7 Separate the fixing upper frame and the lower frame and detach the fixing upper frame 1 F 11 120 ...

Page 620: ...the leaf springs on the thermal switch See the illustration below and check the leaf springs for deformation F 11 122 Check the thermal switch for improper installation 1 After attaching the thermal switch to the fixing assembly use the scale to measure the intervals A B between the leaf spring and the fixing assembly frame F 11 123 2 Check that the gap between the intervals A and B is within 3 1m...

Page 621: ...rd tighten the screw on the side with a lower nip value at the edge MEMO A 1 2 turn of the screw shifts the nip balance by about 0 4 mm A 1 2 turn on the screw at the front will increase the nip at the front by 0 3 mm decreasing the nip at the rear by 0 2 mm If the median value of the measured nip is toward the higher limit of the standard tighten the screw on the side with a higher nip value at t...

Page 622: ... 1 and detach the fixing unit 2 F 11 127 11 5 8 2 Removing the Delivery Upper Guide 0000 5047 1 Remove the insulating cover fixing plate 1 3 snap on claws F 11 128 2 Remove the insulating cover 1 F 11 129 3 Remove the rear cover 1 2 snap on claws F 11 130 4 Pick the tab 2 of the lower guide 1 and free the 4 snap ons to detach the delivery upper guide 3 F 11 131 ...

Page 623: ...crews 1 and detach the drawer connector 2 F 11 133 3 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 for the thermistor thermal switch F 11 134 4 Remove the 2 adjusting screws 1 F 11 135 5 Remove the shaft 1 used to secure the fixing upper frame lower frame in place and the gear 2 F 11 136 6 Remove the shaft 1 used to secure the fixing upper frame lower frame at the front ...

Page 624: ...rame 1 F 11 138 11 5 8 4 Remove the Fixing Main Heater and the Fixing Sub Heater 0000 5049 1 Remove the heater retaining spring needle shaped 1 at the rear F 11 139 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 from the end of the heater at the front F 11 140 3 Pull out the fixing main heater 1 and the fixing sub heater 2 F 11 141 ...

Page 625: ... the edge MEMO A 1 2 turn of the screw shifts the nip balance by about 0 4 mm A 1 2 turn on the screw at the front will increase the nip at the front by 0 3 mm decreasing the nip at the rear by 0 2 mm If the median value of the measured nip is toward the higher limit of the standard tighten the screw on the side with a higher nip value at the edge If the nip needs adjustment while the nip balance ...

Page 626: ...cover fixing plate 1 3 snap on claws F 11 146 2 Remove the insulating cover 1 F 11 147 3 Remove the rear cover 1 2 snap on claws F 11 148 4 Pick the tab 2 of the lower guide 1 and free the 4 snap ons to detach the delivery upper guide 3 F 11 149 11 5 9 3 Removing the Fixing Upper Frame 0000 5062 1 Remove the 2 screws 2 of the grounding wire AC heater line ...

Page 627: ...ct the 2 connectors 1 for the thermistor thermal switch F 11 152 4 Remove the 2 adjusting screws 1 F 11 153 5 Remove the shaft 1 used to secure the fixing upper frame lower frame in place and the gear 2 F 11 154 6 Remove the shaft 1 used to secure the fixing upper frame lower frame at the front F 11 155 ...

Page 628: ...moving the Fixing Temperature Retainer Heater 0000 5063 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and pull out the 2 fastons 2 F 11 157 2 Remove the screw 1 front the sub heater contact at the front F 11 158 3 Remove the screw 1 at the rear and detach the heater retaining plate 2 F 11 159 4 Remove the fixing heat retaining heater 1 F 11 160 ...

Page 629: ...rd tighten the screw on the side with a lower nip value at the edge MEMO A 1 2 turn of the screw shifts the nip balance by about 0 4 mm A 1 2 turn on the screw at the front will increase the nip at the front by 0 3 mm decreasing the nip at the rear by 0 2 mm If the median value of the measured nip is toward the higher limit of the standard tighten the screw on the side with a higher nip value at t...

Page 630: ...ws 1 Turn the adjusting screw 1 at the front rear so that the length of the pressure spring is 31 5mm F 11 166 2 Fit the fixing unit in the machine and execute the following service mode to measure the nip COPIER FUNCTION FIXING NIP CHK F 11 167 3 Adjust the balance between the front and the rear 4 If the median value of the measured nip is toward the lower limit of the standard tighten the screw ...

Page 631: ... change by about 0 3 mm F 11 168 Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION FIXING NIP CHK Use it to generate output for fixing nip width auto measurement 11 5 11 Delivery Upper Guide 11 5 11 1 Removing the Fixing Unit 0000 5033 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the fixing unit 2 F 11 169 11 5 11 2 Removing the Delivery Upper Guide 0000 5034 1 Remove the insulating cover fix...

Page 632: ...r Guide 11 5 12 1 Removing the Fixing Unit 0000 5103 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the fixing unit 2 F 11 174 11 5 12 2 Removing the Delivery Upper Guide 0000 5104 1 Remove the insulating cover fixing plate 1 3 snap on claws F 11 175 2 Remove the insulating cover 1 F 11 176 3 Remove the rear cover 1 2 snap on claws ...

Page 633: ...ide 3 F 11 178 11 5 12 3 Removing the Fixing Upper Frame 0000 5105 1 Remove the 2 screws 2 of the grounding wire AC heater line F 11 179 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the drawer connector 2 F 11 180 3 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 for the thermistor thermal switch F 11 181 4 Remove the 2 adjusting screws 1 F 11 182 ...

Page 634: ...the front F 11 184 7 Separate the fixing upper frame and the lower frame and detach the fixing upper frame 1 F 11 185 11 5 12 4 Removing the Fixing Temperature Retainer Heater 0000 5106 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and pull out the 2 fastons 2 F 11 186 2 Remove the screw 1 front the sub heater contact at the front F 11 187 3 Remove the screw 1 at the rear and detach the heater retaining plate 2 ...

Page 635: ... mounting screw 1 of the static eliminator F 11 191 2 Remove the fixing pin 1 of the delivery lower guide F 11 192 3 When removing the side plate at the front rear be sure to start at the rear Otherwise the side plate at the rear can break the boss on the lower frame Remove the 2 screws 1 from the bottom face of the lower frame and detach the side plate 2 at the front and the side plate 3 at the r...

Page 636: ...of the delivery lower guide as indicated F 11 196 F 11 197 11 5 12 7 After Disassembling the Fixing Unit 0000 5109 If you have loosened the adjusting screw used to secure the upper frame and the lower frame of the fixing unit in place as when replacing a roller be sure to adjust the nip of the fixing roller as follows 1 Turn the adjusting screw 1 at the front rear so that the length of the pressur...

Page 637: ...f the median value of the measured nip is toward the higher limit of the standard tighten the screw on the side with a higher nip value at the edge If the nip needs adjustment while the nip balance is correct the adjusting screw both at the front and rear may be given a 1 2 turn so that the nip may change by about 0 3 mm F 11 200 Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION FIXING NIP CHK Use it to generate outpu...

Page 638: ...claws F 11 202 2 Remove the insulating cover 1 F 11 203 3 Remove the rear cover 1 2 snap on claws F 11 204 4 Pick the tab 2 of the lower guide 1 and free the 4 snap ons to detach the delivery upper guide 3 F 11 205 11 5 13 3 Removing the Fixing Upper Frame 0000 5093 1 Remove the 2 screws 2 of the grounding wire AC heater line F 11 206 ...

Page 639: ...h F 11 208 4 Remove the 2 adjusting screws 1 F 11 209 5 Remove the shaft 1 used to secure the fixing upper frame lower frame in place and the gear 2 F 11 210 6 Remove the shaft 1 used to secure the fixing upper frame lower frame at the front F 11 211 7 Separate the fixing upper frame and the lower frame and detach the fixing upper frame 1 F 11 212 ...

Page 640: ...15 3 Adjust the balance between the front and the rear 4 If the median value of the measured nip is toward the lower limit of the standard tighten the screw on the side with a lower nip value at the edge MEMO A 1 2 turn of the screw shifts the nip balance by about 0 4 mm A 1 2 turn on the screw at the front will increase the nip at the front by 0 3 mm decreasing the nip at the rear by 0 2 mm If th...

Page 641: ...y Sensor 11 5 14 1 Removing the Fixing Unit 0000 5097 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the fixing unit 2 F 11 217 11 5 14 2 Removing the Delivery Upper Guide 0000 5098 1 Remove the insulating cover fixing plate 1 3 snap on claws F 11 218 2 Remove the insulating cover 1 F 11 219 3 Remove the rear cover 1 2 snap on claws ...

Page 642: ...ide 3 F 11 221 11 5 14 3 Removing the Fixing Upper Frame 0000 5099 1 Remove the 2 screws 2 of the grounding wire AC heater line F 11 222 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the drawer connector 2 F 11 223 3 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 for the thermistor thermal switch F 11 224 4 Remove the 2 adjusting screws 1 F 11 225 ...

Page 643: ...0 1 Detach the fixing delivery sensor 1 form the lower frame side F 11 229 11 5 14 5 After Disassembling the Fixing Unit 0000 5101 If you have loosened the adjusting screw used to secure the upper frame and the lower frame of the fixing unit in place as when replacing a roller be sure to adjust the nip of the fixing roller as follows 1 Turn the adjusting screw 1 at the front rear so that the lengt...

Page 644: ...er nip value at the edge If the nip needs adjustment while the nip balance is correct the adjusting screw both at the front and rear may be given a 1 2 turn so that the nip may change by about 0 3 mm F 11 232 Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION FIXING NIP CHK Use it to generate output for fixing nip width auto measurement 11 5 15 Fixing Motor 11 5 15 1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 0006 2270 1 Remove the...

Page 645: ...er 0006 2302 1 Remove the 8 screws 1 and detach the DC controller PCB cover 2 F 11 234 When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover When attaching the cover take care so that the cut off will not come into contact with the latch of the flat cable Otherwise the flat cable can come loose F 11 235 11 5 15 6 Opening the Main Controller Box 0006 2304 1 Remove the 2 flat cables 1 used to connect the DC co...

Page 646: ...ler box on the stay 2 of the machine and open it F 11 240 11 5 15 7 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan 0006 2305 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the fixing heat discharge fan 3 F 11 241 11 5 15 8 Removing the High Voltage Unit 0006 2306 1 Disconnect all connectors of the high voltage unit then remove the 5 screws 1 and detach the high voltage unit 2 ...

Page 647: ...gh Voltage Unit 0006 2309 1 Free the DC harness 1 from the edge saddle 2 then disconnect the 3 connectors 3 and remove the 2 screws 4 F 11 244 2 Remove the mounting screw 1 of the high voltage cable and free the high voltage cable 2 from the cable clamp 3 then detach it from the edge saddle 4 of the high voltage unit base F 11 245 3 Pull the secondary transfer high voltage unit 1 slightly to the f...

Page 648: ...g fan 5 Remove the screw 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the secondary transfer high voltage unit 3 F 11 247 11 5 15 11 Removing the Fixing Drive Unit 0006 2311 1 Slide out the fixing feeder assembly Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 3 screws 2 then detach the fixing drive unit 3 F 11 248 ...

Page 649: ...06 2312 1 When mounting the fixing motor to the motor base be sure that the connector 2 of the motor 1 is located as shown F 11 249 Remove the tension spring 1 and the 3 screws 2 found inside the fixing drive assembly then detach the fixing motor 3 F 11 250 ...

Page 650: ...Chapter 11 11 70 ...

Page 651: ...Chapter 12 Externals and Controls ...

Page 652: ......

Page 653: ...line 12 13 12 5 Parts Replacement Procedure 12 15 12 5 1 Fixing Drive Unit 12 15 12 5 1 1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 12 15 12 5 1 2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 12 15 12 5 1 3 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 12 15 12 5 1 4 Removing the Controller Box Cover 12 15 12 5 1 5 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 12 15 12 5 1 6 Opening the Main Controller Box 12 15 12 5 1 7 Removing the Fixing He...

Page 654: ... Panel LCD Unit 12 26 12 5 8 DC Controller PCB 12 26 12 5 8 1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 12 26 12 5 8 2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 12 26 12 5 8 3 Removing the Controller Box Cover 12 27 12 5 8 4 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 12 27 12 5 8 5 Removing the DC Controller PCB 12 27 12 5 8 6 When Replacing the DC Controller PCB 12 28 12 5 9 Counter Memory PCB 12 28 12 5 9 1 Removing the Uppe...

Page 655: ...5 16 4 Removing the Control Panel Back Plate 12 38 12 5 16 5 Removing the Control Panel Inverter PCB 12 38 12 5 17 Environment Sensor 12 38 12 5 17 1 Pressure Release of the Intermediate Transfer Unit 12 38 12 5 17 2 Removing the Upper Right Cover 12 39 12 5 17 3 Removing the Environment Sensor 12 39 12 5 18 Manual Feed Unit Open Closed Sensor 12 39 12 5 18 1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 12 39 12...

Page 656: ... release Lever 12 51 12 5 22 2 Removing the Cleaner Fan Cover 12 51 12 5 22 3 Removing the Inside Cover 12 51 12 5 22 4 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 12 51 12 5 22 5 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 12 51 12 5 22 6 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 12 52 12 5 22 7 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 12 52 12 5 22 8 Removing the DC Controller Mounting 12 52 12 5 22 9 Removing the Front Cover Open Cl...

Page 657: ...2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 12 62 12 5 28 3 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 12 63 12 5 28 4 Removing the Controller Box Cover 12 63 12 5 28 5 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 12 63 12 5 28 6 Opening the Main Controller Box 12 63 12 5 28 7 Removing the Machine Heat Discharge Fan 12 64 12 5 29 Drum Unit Drive Belt 12 65 12 5 29 1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 12 65 12 5 29 2 Removing the ...

Page 658: ...Contents ...

Page 659: ...roller PCB sends data display information to the control panel CPU PCB as instructed by various programs The data is moved through the control panel CPU PCB to reach the color LCD 12 1 3 LCD Contras Adjustment 0000 5112 The machine is equipped with a dial on its control panel designed for use by the user for adjustment of the LCD contrast Main controller PCB sub Control panel CPU PCB Touch panel C...

Page 660: ...Functions of the Control Panel CPU 0000 5113 Monitoring key inputs relays the inputs made by keypad keys and function keys to the CPU on the main controller PCB Controlling the buzzer sound Turning on off thecontrolpanel LEDs ...

Page 661: ... Copy full color mono color 1 Print full color mono color 1 disabled at default May be changed in service mode disabled at default May be changed in service mode 101 108 232 324 0 0 120V 2 Total 1 Total B W 1 Copy print full color large Copy print full color small Total mono color 1 disabled at default May be changed in service mode 101 108 401 402 118 0 120V 3 Total 1 Total B W 1 Copy full color ...

Page 662: ...and white large total black and white small scan total 1 101 122 123 112 113 501 230V 8 Total 1 total full color mono color large total full color mono color small total black and white large total black and white small scan total 1 101 122 123 112 113 501 230V 9 Total 1 total full color mono color large total full color mono color large total black and white large total black and white small scan...

Page 663: ...per 364 mm or less in feed direction total all copies C P increment by 1 duplex auto duplex copy increment by 1 3 digits in Counter column settings in following COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER1 through 6 for details see description in Service Mode These counters may be set in service mode to serve for different counter readings In the case of the 120 230V model all counters may be assigned different co...

Page 664: ...e developing motor FM2 fixing heat exhaust fan discharges the heat generated by the fixing assembly to the outside of the machine FM1 power supply cooling fan cools the power supply FM4 cleaner cooling fan cools the cleaner FM5 delivery cooling fan cools the delivery assembly FM6 manual feed cooling fan cools the pre registration motor duplex model only FM7 controller fan cools the controller FM3 ...

Page 665: ...n and cleaner cooling fan for 30 min continuously and thereafter moves into sleep mode F 12 3 Power supply cooling fan FM3 Fixing heat exhaust fan FM2 Cleaner cooling fan FM4 Delivery cooling fan FM5 Machine cooling fan FM1 Manual feed cooling fan FM6 Controller fan FM7 Main power switch ON Main power switch OFF Control panel power switch OFF Print request signal Warm up Standby Standby Printing L...

Page 666: ... of the printer unit and the various accessories are wired as follows The anti condensation heater inside the reader unit and the power supply cable are as shown The machine s power supply uses no more than 2 lines to connect to any external power outlet T 12 6 Pedestal Target of reader heater power supply cable Absent External outlet Present Pedestal outlet PSTBY DC 24V Main power switch turned O...

Page 667: ...for scanner motor drive 24 VDC for scanner motor drive The reader controller PCB produces the following type of DC voltage 12 VDC for CCD unit Finisher M1 N1 N2 DADF K1 Pedestal Reader C1 PS Print Server Unit C1 Printer Side Paper Deck P1 For heater If a pedestal is installed connect it to its outlet If a pedestal is installed connect the pedestal power cable to its outlet 2 Outlet1 Outlet2 Outlet...

Page 668: ... voltage supplies DC power to loads DC Power Supply PCB for Accessories inside pedestal generates DC power from AC power protects against overcurrent voltage supplies DC power to accessories paper deck finisher J301 J204 J601 J306 J206 J311 J201 J309 J305 To DF From printer unit 24 VDC 24 VDC 100 230 VAC 24 VDC 5 VDC 12 VDC 15 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 15 VDC 5 VDC 3 3 VDC 5 VDC generation 3 3 VDC generat...

Page 669: ...PCB Fuse PCB Power distribution PCB DC controller PCB Duplex driver PCB FAX board option Intermediate transfer motor Reader Control panel unit Coin manager or Card reader Drum drive unit Y M C K Cassette feeder unit 1 2 HDD PDL board Main controller PCB main Main controller PCB sub HVI Y M C K HV4 YM CK HVI SUB HV2 SUB HV2 HV3 High voltage unit Laser scanner motor Y M C K Laser driver PCB Y M C K ...

Page 670: ...up Power Supply 0006 0767 The SRAM PCB and the DC controller PCB of the machine s main controller PCB are each equipped with a lithium battery for backup in the event of a power outage or disconnection of the power plug T 12 8 T 12 9 The lithium battery must be replaced only with the one indicated in the Parts Catalog otherwise it may trigger a fire or explosion Do not charge disassemble or incine...

Page 671: ...s on the Save Power button on the control panel Description The power used by the machine is reduced according to the settings made in user mode immediate recovery 10 25 50 the fixing unit is controlled to 190 deg C Shift A shift is made only in response to the passage of time auto low power shift time selected in user mode Description The power used by the machine is reduced to enable the machine...

Page 672: ...the fixing assembly remains OFF the main controller PCB is supplied with all night power as indicated in the table Controller 3 3 VAN CPU main memory 12 VAN controller cooling fan FAX 5 VAN fax arrival detection Standby mode Power save mode Low power mode Sleep mode 1 Sleep mode 2 AC OFF mode Main controller Non all night power 12V ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 5V ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 3 3V ON ON ON ON OFF OF...

Page 673: ... power distribution PCB and free the harness from the wire saddle 2 then remove the 6 screws 3 and detach the main controller cover 4 F 12 8 12 5 1 5 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 0000 5130 1 Remove the 8 screws 1 and detach the DC controller PCB cover 2 F 12 9 When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover When attaching the cover take care so that the cut off will not come into contact with t...

Page 674: ...ook A B at the top of the main controller box F 12 14 4 Engage the hook 1 found on the right side of the main controller box on the stay 2 of the machine and open it F 12 15 12 5 1 7 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan 0000 5133 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the fixing heat discharge fan 3 ...

Page 675: ...age unit 3 F 12 18 12 5 1 9 Removing the Left Lower Rear cover 0000 5135 1 Removing the left lower rear cover 12 5 1 10 Removing the Secondary Transfer High Voltage Unit 0000 5136 1 Free the DC harness 1 from the edge saddle 2 then disconnect the 3 connectors 3 and remove the 2 screws 4 F 12 19 2 Remove the mounting screw 1 of the high voltage cable and free the high voltage cable 2 from the cable...

Page 676: ... delivery cooling fan 5 Remove the screw 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the secondary transfer high voltage unit 3 F 12 22 12 5 1 11 Removing the Fixing Drive Unit 0000 5137 1 Slide out the fixing feeder assembly Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 3 screws 2 then detach the fixing drive unit 3 F 12 23 12 5 2 Developing Drive Unit 12 5 2 1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 0000 514...

Page 677: ...en remove the 6 screws 3 and detach the main controller cover 4 F 12 24 12 5 2 5 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 0000 5149 1 Remove the 8 screws 1 and detach the DC controller PCB cover 2 F 12 25 When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover When attaching the cover take care so that the cut off will not come into contact with the latch of the flat cable Otherwise the flat cable can come loose F...

Page 678: ...roller box F 12 30 4 Engage the hook 1 found on the right side of the main controller box on the stay 2 of the machine and open it F 12 31 12 5 2 7 Removing the DC Controller Mounting 0000 5152 1 Disconnect all connectors from the PCB and free all harnesses from the cable clamps then remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the DC controller PCB 2 together with its base ...

Page 679: ...3 F 12 33 12 5 2 9 Removing the Machine Heat Discharge Fan 0000 5154 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fan duct 2 F 12 34 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the heat exhaust fan unit 3 F 12 35 12 5 2 10 Removing the Developing Drive Unit 0000 5155 1 Disconnect the connector 2 of the developing motor 1 and free the harness 3 from the cable clamp 4 ...

Page 680: ...moving the Upper Rear Cover 0000 5138 1 Remove the upper rear cover 12 5 3 2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 0000 5139 1 Remove the lower rear cover 12 5 3 3 Removing the High Voltage Unit 0000 5140 1 Disconnect all connectors of the high voltage unit then remove the 5 screws 1 and detach the high voltage unit 2 F 12 39 2 Remove the 6 screws 1 and remove the base plate 2 then detach the high voltage...

Page 681: ...nect all connectors of the high voltage unit then remove the 5 screws 1 and detach the high voltage unit 2 F 12 41 2 Remove the 6 screws 1 and remove the base plate 2 then detach the high voltage unit 3 F 12 42 12 5 4 4 Removing the Left Lower Rear cover 0000 5144 1 Removing the left lower rear cover 12 5 4 5 Removing the Secondary Transfer High Voltage Unit 0000 5145 1 Free the DC harness 1 from ...

Page 682: ...e the secondary transfer high voltage unit together with the delivery cooling fan 5 Remove the screw 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the secondary transfer high voltage unit 3 F 12 46 12 5 5 DC Power Supply Unit 12 5 5 1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 0000 5168 1 Remove the upper rear cover 12 5 5 2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 0000 5169 1 Remove the lower rear cover 12 5 5 3 Removing...

Page 683: ...ove the 4 screws 1 and detach the control panel 2 toward the front F 12 49 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and detach the control panel 2 F 12 50 12 5 7 Control Panel LCD Unit 12 5 7 1 Removing the Upper Left Cover small 0000 5187 1 Remove the upper left cover small 12 5 7 2 Removing the Inside Cover 0000 5188 1 Open the front cover and the drum unit cover 2 Remove the 5 screws 1 and detach the insid...

Page 684: ...rs 3 from the inverter PCB remove the binding screw 4 and remove the 8 self tapping screws 5 then detach the control panel back plate 6 F 12 54 12 5 7 5 Removing the Control Panel LCD Unit 0000 5191 1 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the control panel LCD unit 2 F 12 55 12 5 8 DC Controller PCB 12 5 8 1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 0000 5279 1 Remove the upper rear cover 12 5 8 2 Removing the Low...

Page 685: ...ler PCB Cover 0000 5282 1 Remove the 8 screws 1 and detach the DC controller PCB cover 2 F 12 57 When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover When attaching the cover take care so that the cut off will not come into contact with the latch of the flat cable Otherwise the flat cable can come loose F 12 58 12 5 8 5 Removing the DC Controller PCB 0000 5283 1 Disconnect all connectors of the PCB and remo...

Page 686: ...ue for the manual feed tray COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ MF A4 Use it to adjust the paper width basic value for the manual feed tray 3 Turn off and then on the main power switch 4 Make the following selections in service mode COPIER FUNCTION LASER L ADJ 0 5 Press the OK key The machine starts auto adjustment and will indicate END at its end 12 5 9 Counter Memory PCB 12 5 9 1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover...

Page 687: ... the flat cable Otherwise the flat cable can come loose F 12 62 12 5 9 6 Opening the Main Controller Box 0000 5320 1 Remove the 2 flat cables 1 used to connect the DC controller PCB and the main controller PCB F 12 63 2 Remove the 9 screws 1 of the main controller box F 12 64 F 12 65 3 Free the controller box from the hook A B at the top of the main controller box 1 ...

Page 688: ...r 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then detach the counter memory PCB 3 F 12 68 12 5 10 Fuse PCB 12 5 10 1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 0000 5322 1 Remove the upper rear cover 12 5 10 2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 0000 5323 1 Remove the lower rear cover 12 5 10 3 Removing the DC Power Supply Unit 0000 5324 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and disconnect all connectors of the fuse PCB then detach the DC power...

Page 689: ...r rear cover 12 5 11 3 Removing the DC Power Supply Unit 0000 5300 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and disconnect all connectors of the fuse PCB then detach the DC power supply unit 2 F 12 71 12 5 11 4 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan Mounting 0000 5301 1 Remove the 5 screws 1 and remove the power supply cooling fan mointing plate 2 then detach the connector 3 F 12 72 12 5 11 5 Removing the Leakage B...

Page 690: ...3 F 12 75 F 12 76 12 5 12 Duplex Driver PCB 12 5 12 1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 0000 5311 1 Remove the upper rear cover 12 5 12 2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 0000 5312 1 Remove the lower rear cover 12 5 12 3 Removing the Lattice Connector Mounting 0000 5313 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and disconnect all connectors then detach the lattice connector Mounting 2 F 12 77 ...

Page 691: ...eft rear upper cover 12 5 13 4 Removing the Controller Box Cover 0000 5305 1 Disconnect the connector J1512 1 from the power distribution PCB and free the harness from the wire saddle 2 then remove the 6 screws 3 and detach the main controller cover 4 F 12 79 12 5 13 5 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 0000 5306 1 Remove the 8 screws 1 and detach the DC controller PCB cover 2 F 12 80 When Attac...

Page 692: ... controller PCB and the main controller PCB F 12 82 2 Remove the 9 screws 1 of the main controller box F 12 83 F 12 84 3 Free the controller box from the hook A B at the top of the main controller box F 12 85 4 Engage the hook 1 found on the right side of the main controller box on the stay 2 of the machine and open it F 12 86 1 ...

Page 693: ...nd the 8 screws 2 from the PCB then detach the relay PCB 1 3 F 12 88 12 5 14 Control Panel CPU PCB 12 5 14 1 Removing the Upper Left Cover small 0000 5179 1 Remove the upper left cover small 12 5 14 2 Removing the Inside Cover 0000 5180 1 Open the front cover and the drum unit cover 2 Remove the 5 screws 1 and detach the inside cover 2 F 12 89 12 5 14 3 Removing the Control Panel 0000 5181 1 Remov...

Page 694: ... 5 15 1 Removing the Upper Left Cover small 0000 5174 1 Remove the upper left cover small 12 5 15 2 Removing the Inside Cover 0000 5175 1 Open the front cover and the drum unit cover 2 Remove the 5 screws 1 and detach the inside cover 2 F 12 93 12 5 15 3 Removing the Control Panel 0000 5176 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the control panel 2 toward the front F 12 94 2 Disconnect the connector 1...

Page 695: ...6 12 5 15 5 Removing the Control Panel Key PCB 0000 5178 1 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the control panel key PCB 2 F 12 97 12 5 16 Control Panel Inverter PCB 12 5 16 1 Removing the Upper Left Cover small 0000 5183 1 Remove the upper left cover small 12 5 16 2 Removing the Inside Cover 0000 5184 1 Open the front cover and the drum unit cover 2 Remove the 5 screws 1 and detach the inside cover ...

Page 696: ... remove the binding screw 4 and remove the 8 self tapping screws 5 then detach the control panel back plate 6 F 12 101 12 5 16 5 Removing the Control Panel Inverter PCB 0000 5186 1 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 and remove the 4 screws 2 then detach the control panel inverter PCB 3 F 12 102 12 5 17 Environment Sensor 12 5 17 1 Pressure Release of the Intermediate Transfer Unit 0006 2169 1 Open the ...

Page 697: ...2 F 12 105 12 5 17 3 Removing the Environment Sensor 0000 5344 1 Insert a screwdriver through the hole in the upper right stay of the machine and remove the screw 1 then detach the environment sensor mounting plate 2 F 12 106 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the claw 2 of the sensor base then detach the environment sensor 3 F 12 107 12 5 18 Manual Feed Unit Open Closed Sensor 12 5 18 1 Removi...

Page 698: ...n remove the 6 screws 3 and detach the main controller cover 4 F 12 108 12 5 18 5 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 0000 5230 1 Remove the 8 screws 1 and detach the DC controller PCB cover 2 F 12 109 When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover When attaching the cover take care so that the cut off will not come into contact with the latch of the flat cable Otherwise the flat cable can come loose...

Page 699: ...roller box F 12 114 4 Engage the hook 1 found on the right side of the main controller box on the stay 2 of the machine and open it F 12 115 12 5 18 7 Removing the DC Controller Mounting 0000 5233 1 Disconnect all connectors from the PCB and free all harnesses from the cable clamps then remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the DC controller PCB 2 together with its base ...

Page 700: ... Feed Unit Open Closed Sensor 0000 5235 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the registration unit open closed sensor 2 F 12 118 12 5 19 Front Cover Open Closed Sensor 12 5 19 1 Removing the Tonner Container release Lever 0006 2360 1 Open the front cover 2 Remove the 4 screws 1 and the 4 tonner container release levers 2 F 12 119 12 5 19 2 Removing the Cleaner Fan Cover 0000 5216 1 Open the fro...

Page 701: ...ower Rear Cover 0000 5219 1 Remove the lower rear cover 12 5 19 6 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 0000 5222 1 Removing the left rear upper cover 12 5 19 7 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 0000 5221 1 Remove the 8 screws 1 and detach the DC controller PCB cover 2 F 12 122 When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover When attaching the cover take care so that the cut off will not come into cont...

Page 702: ...F 12 125 2 Remove the front cover open closed sensor 1 F 12 126 12 5 20 Main Power Switch 12 5 20 1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 0000 5192 1 Remove the upper rear cover 12 5 20 2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 0000 5193 1 Remove the lower rear cover 12 5 20 3 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 0000 5196 1 Removing the left rear upper cover 12 5 20 4 Removing the Controller Box Cover 0000 5194 1 Di...

Page 703: ...PCB Cover When attaching the cover take care so that the cut off will not come into contact with the latch of the flat cable Otherwise the flat cable can come loose F 12 129 12 5 20 6 Opening the Main Controller Box 0000 5197 1 Remove the 2 flat cables 1 used to connect the DC controller PCB and the main controller PCB F 12 130 2 Remove the 9 screws 1 of the main controller box F 12 131 1 ...

Page 704: ...l connectors from the PCB and free all harnesses from the cable clamps then remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the DC controller PCB 2 together with its base F 12 135 12 5 20 8 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan 0000 5199 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the fixing heat discharge fan 3 F 12 136 12 5 20 9 Removing the Fixing Drive Unit 0000 5200 1 Slide out the f...

Page 705: ...Unit 0000 5202 1 Disconnect all connectors of the high voltage unit then remove the 5 screws 1 and detach the high voltage unit 2 F 12 139 2 Remove the 6 screws 1 and remove the base plate 2 then detach the high voltage unit 3 F 12 140 12 5 20 12 Removing the Manual Feed Cooling Fan Duct 0000 5203 1 Slide out the manual fee unit then disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 to detach t...

Page 706: ...ar Cover 0000 5236 1 Remove the upper rear cover 12 5 21 2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 0000 5237 1 Remove the lower rear cover 12 5 21 3 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 0000 5240 1 Removing the left rear upper cover 12 5 21 4 Removing the Controller Box Cover 0000 5238 1 Disconnect the connector J1512 1 from the power distribution PCB and free the harness from the wire saddle 2 then remove th...

Page 707: ...at the cut off will not come into contact with the latch of the flat cable Otherwise the flat cable can come loose F 12 146 12 5 21 6 Opening the Main Controller Box 0000 5241 1 Remove the 2 flat cables 1 used to connect the DC controller PCB and the main controller PCB F 12 147 2 Remove the 9 screws 1 of the main controller box F 12 148 F 12 149 3 Free the controller box from the hook A B at the ...

Page 708: ...es from the cable clamps then remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the DC controller PCB 2 together with its base F 12 152 12 5 21 8 Removing the Registration Unit Open Closed Sensor Mounting 0000 5243 1 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 and remove the screw 2 then detach the registration unit open closed sensor mounting 3 F 12 153 12 5 21 9 Removing the Manual Feed Unit Open Close Switch 0000 5244 1 Remo...

Page 709: ... 2 Removing the Cleaner Fan Cover 0000 5205 1 Open the front cover 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the cleaner fan cover 2 F 12 156 12 5 22 3 Removing the Inside Cover 0000 5206 1 Open the front cover and the drum unit cover 2 Remove the 5 screws 1 and detach the inside cover 2 F 12 157 12 5 22 4 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 0000 5207 1 Remove the upper rear cover 12 5 22 5 Removing the Lower Rea...

Page 710: ...able can come loose F 12 159 12 5 22 8 Removing the DC Controller Mounting 0000 5213 1 Disconnect all connectors from the PCB and free all harnesses from the cable clamps then remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the DC controller PCB 2 together with its base F 12 160 12 5 22 9 Removing the Front Cover Open Close Switch 0000 5215 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the retaining plate 2 then push it insid...

Page 711: ...ver 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the cleaner fan cover 2 F 12 164 12 5 23 2 Removing the Cleaner Fan 0000 5292 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the 3 claws then detach the cleaner fan 2 F 12 165 12 5 24 Manual Feed Cooling Fan 12 5 24 1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover 0000 5245 1 Remove the upper rear cover 12 5 24 2 Removing the Lower Rear Cover 0000 5246 1 Remove the lower rear cover ...

Page 712: ...ain controller cover 4 F 12 166 12 5 24 5 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 0000 5248 1 Remove the 8 screws 1 and detach the DC controller PCB cover 2 F 12 167 When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover When attaching the cover take care so that the cut off will not come into contact with the latch of the flat cable Otherwise the flat cable can come loose F 12 168 12 5 24 6 Opening the Main Con...

Page 713: ...roller box F 12 172 4 Engage the hook 1 found on the right side of the main controller box on the stay 2 of the machine and open it F 12 173 12 5 24 7 Removing the DC Controller Mounting 0000 5251 1 Disconnect all connectors from the PCB and free all harnesses from the cable clamps then remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the DC controller PCB 2 together with its base ...

Page 714: ... the fixing heat discharge fan 3 F 12 175 12 5 24 9 Removing the Developing Drive Unit 0000 5253 1 Disconnect the connector 2 of the developing motor 1 and free the harness 3 from the cable clamp 4 F 12 176 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the main controller base 2 F 12 177 3 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the developing drive assembly 2 F 12 178 ...

Page 715: ...en remove the 5 screws 1 and detach the high voltage unit 2 F 12 180 2 Remove the 6 screws 1 and remove the base plate 2 then detach the high voltage unit 3 F 12 181 12 5 24 12 Removing the Manual Feed Cooling Fan Duct 0000 5256 1 Slide out the manual fee unit then disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 to detach the manual feed cooling fan duct 3 F 12 182 12 5 24 13 Removing the Man...

Page 716: ...roller Box Cover 0000 5260 1 Disconnect the connector J1512 1 from the power distribution PCB and free the harness from the wire saddle 2 then remove the 6 screws 3 and detach the main controller cover 4 F 12 184 12 5 25 5 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 0000 5261 1 Remove the 8 screws 1 and detach the DC controller PCB cover 2 F 12 185 When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover When attachin...

Page 717: ...ontroller PCB and the main controller PCB F 12 187 2 Remove the 9 screws 1 of the main controller box F 12 188 F 12 189 3 Free the controller box from the hook A B at the top of the main controller box F 12 190 4 Engage the hook 1 found on the right side of the main controller box on the stay 2 of the machine and open it F 12 191 1 ...

Page 718: ...ar Cover 0000 5294 1 Remove the lower rear cover 12 5 26 3 Removing the DC Power Supply Unit 0000 5295 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and disconnect all connectors of the fuse PCB then detach the DC power supply unit 2 F 12 193 12 5 26 4 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan Mounting 0000 5296 1 Remove the 5 screws 1 and remove the power supply cooling fan mointing plate 2 then detach the connector 3 F 1...

Page 719: ... connectors of the high voltage unit then remove the 5 screws 1 and detach the high voltage unit 2 F 12 196 2 Remove the 6 screws 1 and remove the base plate 2 then detach the high voltage unit 3 F 12 197 12 5 27 4 Removing the Left Lower Rear cover 0000 5288 1 Removing the left lower rear cover 12 5 27 5 Removing the Secondary Transfer High Voltage Unit 0000 5289 1 Free the DC harness 1 from the ...

Page 720: ...200 4 Remove the secondary transfer high voltage unit together with the delivery cooling fan 5 Remove the screw 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the secondary transfer high voltage unit 3 F 12 201 12 5 27 6 Removing the Delivery Cooling Fan 0000 5290 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then detach the fan 3 F 12 202 12 5 28 Machine Heat Discharge Fan 12 5 28 1 Removi...

Page 721: ...ain controller cover 4 F 12 203 12 5 28 5 Removing the DC Controller PCB Cover 0000 5275 1 Remove the 8 screws 1 and detach the DC controller PCB cover 2 F 12 204 When Attaching the DC Controller PCB Cover When attaching the cover take care so that the cut off will not come into contact with the latch of the flat cable Otherwise the flat cable can come loose F 12 205 12 5 28 6 Opening the Main Con...

Page 722: ...controller box from the hook A B at the top of the main controller box F 12 209 4 Engage the hook 1 found on the right side of the main controller box on the stay 2 of the machine and open it F 12 210 12 5 28 7 Removing the Machine Heat Discharge Fan 0000 5278 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fan duct 2 ...

Page 723: ...327 1 Remove the lower rear cover 12 5 29 3 Removing the Left Upper Rear Cover 0000 5330 1 Removing the left rear upper cover 12 5 29 4 Removing the Controller Box Cover 0000 5328 1 Disconnect the connector J1512 1 from the power distribution PCB and free the harness from the wire saddle 2 then remove the 6 screws 3 and detach the main controller cover 4 F 12 213 12 5 29 5 Removing the DC Controll...

Page 724: ...he flat cable Otherwise the flat cable can come loose F 12 215 12 5 29 6 Opening the Main Controller Box 0000 5331 1 Remove the 2 flat cables 1 used to connect the DC controller PCB and the main controller PCB F 12 216 2 Remove the 9 screws 1 of the main controller box F 12 217 F 12 218 3 Free the controller box from the hook A B at the top of the main controller box 1 ...

Page 725: ... all harnesses from the cable clamps then remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the DC controller PCB 2 together with its base F 12 221 12 5 29 8 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan 0000 5333 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the fixing heat discharge fan 3 F 12 222 12 5 29 9 Removing the Developing Drive Unit 0000 5334 1 Disconnect the connector 2 of the developing ...

Page 726: ...ce Connector Mounting 0000 5335 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and disconnect all connectors then detach the lattice connector Mounting 2 F 12 226 12 5 29 11 Removing the High Voltage Unit 0000 5336 1 Disconnect all connectors of the high voltage unit then remove the 5 screws 1 and detach the high voltage unit 2 F 12 227 2 Remove the 6 screws 1 and remove the base plate 2 then detach the high voltage uni...

Page 727: ...B Motor Mounting To remove put your hand into the inside where you have slid out the manual feed unit then while holding down the swing plate 1 found to the rear of the drum drive unit remove from the machine s rear side plate The drum drive unit is hooked on the protrusion from the rear side plate lift it slightly to detach F 12 230 1 Free the DC harness 1 found at the front of the drum ITB motor...

Page 728: ...Unit Drive Belt 0000 5340 Never remove the screws 1 identified by a red marking used to secure the belt tension plate in place The plate is used to maintain a specific degree of tension on the belt F 12 234 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the belt tension pulley cover 2 2 locations left right F 12 235 2 Remove the belt retaining roll 1 found on the right side and detach the drum unit drive belt...

Page 729: ...Chapter 13 MEAP ...

Page 730: ......

Page 731: ...Contents Contents 13 1 Overview 13 1 13 2 MEAP Counter 13 2 13 3 Construction of the MEAP Platform 13 4 ...

Page 732: ......

Page 733: ...s based on Java J2ME i e Java 2 Platform Micro Edition and is designed to enable the execution of Java applications A MEAP application behaves independently from its host printer s system software and may be installed or uninstalled using SMS Service Management Service which is an interface that runs as part of the browser on a PC As long as the device supports MEAP most MEAP applications may be a...

Page 734: ...all depend on the application in question A counter reading may be of a type that is forced to increase as a job is expected or of a type that is increased when the application sends instructions or it may be of a type that increases independently of the host device thus increasing solely in response to the application being run specifics are as follows T 13 1 Type Count item forced total total bl...

Page 735: ...ts reading in response to execution of a job in response to instructions from application the counter increases its reading only in response to instructions from the application application independent the counter operates according to the specifications of the application ...

Page 736: ...a mismatch the device will not be able to run the MEAP application For version information refer to the Service Information bulletin that is released in conjunction with the system software The following shows the components of a MEAP application F 13 1 1 User Interface Control Bock installed as part of the system software 2 Device Control Block installed as part of the system software 3 Operating...

Page 737: ...Chapter 14 Maintenance and Inspection ...

Page 738: ......

Page 739: ...t Color Image Reader C1 14 1 14 1 3 Printer Unit 14 1 14 2 Durables and Consumables 14 2 14 2 1 Outline 14 2 14 2 2 Reader Unit Color Image Reader C1 14 2 14 2 3 Printer Unit 14 2 14 3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure 14 4 14 3 1 Scheduled Servicing Reader Unit 14 4 14 3 2 Scheduled Servicing Printer Unit 14 6 ...

Page 740: ......

Page 741: ...mance once they fail If possible schedule any periodical replacement so that it coincides with scheduled servicing The guide to periodical replacement is subject to change according to the site of installation and habits of use 14 1 2 Reader Unit Color Image Reader C1 0006 0000 The reader unit Color Image Reader C1 does not have parts that require periodical replacement 14 1 3 Printer Unit 0006 00...

Page 742: ... 3 Printer Unit 0006 0005 T 14 1 as of May 2004 Ref Parts name Parts No Q ty Life Remarks 1 Waste toner container FG6 8992 1 60 000 prints 2 Secondary transfer outside roller 120 230 V FG6 8997 1 300 000 prints actual number of prints 3 Transfer cleaning unit FG6 8989 1 100 000 prints 4 Fixing roller FB6 3641 1 100 000 prints actual number of prints 5 Pressure roller FB6 3653 1 100 000 prints actu...

Page 743: ...prints actual number of prints 14 Fixing upper frame unit FG6 9645 1 100 000 prints 15 Fixing unit 100 V FG6 9070 1 200 000 prints 15 Fixing unit 120 V FG6 9069 1 200 000 prints 15 Fixing unit 230 V FG6 9070 1 200 000 prints 16 Pressure roller bearing XG9 0478 2 100 000 prints actual number of prints Assumes the use of A4 originals with a 5 image ratio as of May 2004 Ref Parts name Parts No Q ty L...

Page 744: ... mounting the part back to the machine Unless specifically mentioned do not use a wet moist cloth for cleaning See to it that scheduled servicing and replacement are conducted as indicated Unit name Location Cleaning Remarks Optical assembly Scanner cable inspect if dirt is appreciable Optical path Scanner rail lubricate if dirt is appreciable Copyboard glass clean if dirt is appreciable No 1 thro...

Page 745: ...Secondary transfer rear guide Duplex feed roller Registration lower roller Registration upper roller Duplex feed roller Pickup vertical path roller Pre registration roller Reversing roller Reversing roller No 1 through No 3 mirror Use a blower brush if dirt cannot be removed dry wipe with lint free paper Tension roller when replacing the ITB Drive roller when replacing the ITB Secondary transfer i...

Page 746: ...ble Duplex feed unit Duplex roller 1 clean if dirt is appreciable Duplex roller 2 clean if dirt is appreciable Duplex roller 3 clean if dirt is appreciable Duplex roller 4 clean if dirt is appreciable Delivery vertical path unit Reversing roller clean Face down delivery roller 1 clean Face down delivery roller 2 clean Fixing unit Fixing inlet guide clean if dirt is appreciable Fixing inlet roll cl...

Page 747: ...preciable Registration upper roller clean if dirt is appreciable Registration lower roller clean if dirt is appreciable Pickup vertical path roller clean if dirt is appreciable Intermediate transfer unit Drive roller clean or when replacing the intermediate transfer belt Tension roller clean or when replacing the intermediate transfer belt Secondary transfer internal roller clean or when replacing...

Page 748: ...Secondary transfer rear guide Duplex feed roller Registration lower roller Registration upper roller Duplex feed roller Pickup vertical path roller Pre registration roller Reversing roller Reversing roller No 1 through No 3 mirror Use a blower brush if dirt cannot be removed dry wipe with lint free paper Tension roller when replacing the ITB Drive roller when replacing the ITB Secondary transfer i...

Page 749: ...Chapter 15 Standards and Adjustments ...

Page 750: ......

Page 751: ...15 7 15 4 1 After Replacing the Drum Unit 15 7 15 4 2 After Replacing the Transfer Unit 15 7 15 4 3 After Replacing the Pattern Reading Unit 15 7 15 5 Fixing System 15 8 15 5 1 After Disassembling the Fixing Unit 15 8 15 6 Electrical Components 15 9 15 6 1 When Replacing the Reader Controller PCB 15 9 15 6 2 When Replacing the DC Controller PCB 15 9 15 6 3 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB ma...

Page 752: ......

Page 753: ...ent horizontal registration adjustment 2 leading edge image margin adjustment registration adjustment 3 left right non image width adjustment CCD read start cell position adjustment 4 leading edge non image width adjustment scanner image leading edge position adjustment Adjusting the Image Leading Edge Margin 1 Make the following selections in service mode and see that the image margin is as indic...

Page 754: ...e in the right front stay and loosen the screw 1 to adjust the position of the adjusting plate 2 F 15 10 Leading edge of paper Decease the value of REGIST A decrease of 10 will increase the margin by 1 mm Increase the value of REGIST An increase of 10 will decrease the margin by 1 mm 2 5 4 6 8 101214161820 0 2 5 1 5mm 2nd side of duplex copy 2 5 2 0mm Image leading edge Decrease the value of ADJ X...

Page 755: ...ents An increase by 24 increases the non image width by about 1mm with the range of settings being between 0 and 100 15 1 4 Adjusting the Left Right Margin Manual Feed Tray 0000 5348 Loosen the 2 screws 1 and move the position of the slide guide 2 to make adjustments F 15 13 15 1 5 Adjusting the Left Right Margin Side Paper Deck 0000 5349 1 Slide out the compartment and adjust the position of the ...

Page 756: ...Loosen the adjusting screw 1 to make adjustments A single graduation in the index will cause a change of approximately 1 mm To move the paper to the rear move it to the left To move the paper to the front move it to the right F 15 15 1 left right ...

Page 757: ...1 04 using the following service mode items COPIER ADJUST CCD W PLT X Y Z Use it to enter data for the standard white plate F 15 16 15 2 3 After Replacing the CCD Unit 0000 5356 When you have replaced the CCD unit enter the values for color displacement correction in sub scanning direction indicated on the label attached to the unit in service mode COPIER ADJUST CCD CCDU RG GB Use it to enter the ...

Page 758: ...er Exposure System 15 3 1 After Replacing the Laser Unit 0000 5357 If you have replaced the laser unit execute the following service mode COPIER FUNCTION LASER L ADJ 0 Use it to execute automatic adjustment of laser intensity ...

Page 759: ... replacing the drum unit 15 4 2 After Replacing the Transfer Unit 0000 5359 There is no particular work to perform after replacing the transfer unit intermediate transfer unit secondary transfer unit 15 4 3 After Replacing the Pattern Reading Unit 0000 5360 There is no particular work to perform after replacing the pattern reading unit ...

Page 760: ...e standard tighten the screw on the side with a lower nip value at the edge MEMO A 1 2 turn of the screw shifts the nip balance by about 0 4 mm A 1 2 turn on the screw at the front will increase the nip at the front by 0 3 mm decreasing the nip at the rear by 0 2 mm If the median value of the measured nip is toward the higher limit of the standard tighten the screw on the side with a higher nip va...

Page 761: ...rection value for sub scanning direction COPIER ADJUST CCD CL R GB Use it to enter a color displacement correction value for sub scanning direction COPIER ADJUST CCD BW R RG Use it to enter a color displacement correction value for sub scanning direction COPIER ADJUST CCD BW R GB Use it to enter a color displacement correction value for sub scanning direction COPIER ADJUST CCD CCDU RG Use it to en...

Page 762: ... machine starts auto adjustment and will indicate END at its end 15 6 3 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB main 0000 5364 Be sure to use the image memory SDRAM 1 PCB and the boot ROM 2 from the old PCB on the new main controller PCB main F 15 21 F 15 22 15 6 4 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB sub 0006 3263 Be sure to use the SRAM PCB 1 from the old PCB on the new main controller PCB sub ...

Page 763: ...NSTALL CARD then enter the number of the first card and press OK For instance if cards No 1 through No 1000 are used for group control enter 1 2 Turn off and then on the machine when the machine has started up perform the following in user mode Make the following selections user mode system control settings group ID control count control then check to see that IDs from 00000001 through 00001000 ha...

Page 764: ... manual feed unit and the cassette 1 2 then open the pickup vertical path cover 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the front right cover 2 F 15 24 Adjusting the Cassette 1 Side 3 Insert a screwdriver through the hole in the front right stay and loosen the screw 1 to adjust the position of the adjusting plate 2 F 15 25 F 15 26 Adjusting the Cassette 2 Side 3 Remove the grip 1 from the front right F...

Page 765: ... 7 2 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When Replacing the Duplex Unit 0000 5370 After replacing the horizontal registration motor horizontal registration sensor duplex unit and fixing delivery unit follow the adjustment showing below COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ REFE Image L2 will decrease the margin on the front side of the paper Moving the adjusting plate to the right ...

Page 766: ...Chapter 15 15 14 ...

Page 767: ...Chapter 16 Correcting Faulty Images ...

Page 768: ......

Page 769: ...ult Case Studies A4 16 9 16 3 1 2 Image Fault Case Samples A3 16 14 16 3 2 Image Faults 16 18 16 3 2 1 Blank Image 16 18 16 3 2 2 Solid Image 16 18 16 3 2 3 Light Image Weak Density 16 18 16 3 2 4 Foggy Image 16 24 16 3 2 5 Uneven Density 16 35 16 3 2 6 Out of Focus 16 40 16 3 2 7 Partially Blank Streaked 16 43 16 3 2 8 Smudged Streaked 16 54 16 3 2 9 Ghost Memory 16 60 16 3 2 10 Poor Finxing 16 6...

Page 770: ... unit is inadequate 16 122 16 3 10 4 E003 Error code detai The temperature of the fixing unit is abnormally low after standby 16 123 16 3 10 5 E004 Error code detail The protection circuit of the fixing unit is faulty 16 123 16 3 10 6 E004 0003 Error code Or message Remove the paper from the finisher trays after implementing countermeasure against malfunction of fixing feeder unit open closed sens...

Page 771: ...n the main motor controller and the DC controller is faulty 16 143 16 3 10 46 E243 Error code detail The control panel is faulty 16 143 16 3 10 47 E302 Error code detail A fault has occurred in relation to shading correction 16 144 16 3 10 48 E315 Error code detail The image data is faulty 16 144 16 3 10 49 E315 0010 Error code Only for FAX is transmitted 16 144 16 3 10 50 E351 Error code detail T...

Page 772: ... machine starting up window is slower than usual then E602 Error Code is displayed 16 166 16 3 10 91 E602 0402 Error Code not recovered after replacement of main controller PCB 16 166 16 3 10 92 E602 0x02 Error Code 16 167 16 3 10 93 E602 0001 Error Code 16 167 16 3 10 94 E602 0402 Error Code At power on upon installation iRC3220 16 167 16 3 10 95 E604 Error code detail There is a shortage in imag...

Page 773: ...27 E751 0304 Error Code 16 181 16 3 10 128 E804 Error code detail The power supply cooling fan is faulty 16 181 16 3 10 129 E804 0004 Error Code 16 181 16 3 10 130 E804 0004 Error code Displaying if the jack of the controller fan FM7 which is fixed on the controller box 16 182 16 3 10 131 E804 0004 due to faulty fuse PCB Error Code 16 182 16 3 10 132 E805 Error code detail The cleaner fan is fault...

Page 774: ... Pins by PCB 16 199 16 4 9 1 Adjusting the Variable Resistors VR the Light Emitting Diodes LED and the Check Pins by PCB 16 199 16 4 9 2 Main Controller PCB main 16 200 16 4 9 3 Main Controller PCB sub 16 201 16 4 9 4 Reader Controller PCB 16 201 16 4 9 5 Inverter PCB 16 202 16 4 9 6 Differential PCB 16 202 ...

Page 775: ...er is not in excess of a specific level b If a transparency is used check to make sure that it is placed in the correct orientation in the manual feed tray 16 1 4 Checking the Durables 0006 5666 Check the table of durables to see if any has reached the end of its life 16 1 5 Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts 0006 5667 Check the scheduled servicing table and the periodically replaced parts t...

Page 776: ...ommended type If not try a recommended type to see if the symptom in question still occurs Mechanical System Check to see if the load of the drive system is excessive Check the gears for wear and tear chipping Cassettes Check to see if the cassettes are properly fitted Check to see if the paper size is correctly set Try replacing with a normal cassette to see if the symptom in question still occur...

Page 777: ...ccur inside it leading to various problems a condensation on the BD sensor can cause problems associated with E110 b condensation on the LDE lens can cause image in sub scanning direction to be too light c condensation on the mirror of the reader unit or on the copyboard glass can cause images to be too light d condensation on the pickup or feeder guide can cause paper feeding faults If any of the...

Page 778: ... 1 Set the print count and paper size 2 Make the following selections in service mode COPIER TEST FG 3 Make the following selections COPIER TEST PG TYPE 4 Using the keypad enter the desired TYPE No and press the OK key 5 Using COLOR Y M C K select the desired color output at 1 6 Using DENS Y M C K set the desired density valid only for TYPE 5 7 Press the Start key TYPE NO Description 0 normal copy...

Page 779: ...em or transfer unit F 16 1 16 2 5 Full Halftone TYPE 5 0006 5698 Use this test print to check transfer failure black lines white lines or irregular intervals MEMO 1 You can select a specific color to develop in user mode using COLORY M C K in service mode COPIER TEST PG 2 If you want to change the density of the test print use the following in service mode TEST PG DENS Y M C K a Transfer Failure I...

Page 780: ...nt occurs suspect a fault in any of the laser exposure system transfer intermediate secondary unit or photosensitive drum drive unit b Right Angle Straight Line If right angles or straight lines are faulty suspect a fault in the laser exposure system registration upper lower roller or secondary external roller i e the shape of the rollers F 16 3 COLOR M 1 COLOR Y C K 0 ...

Page 781: ... in the developer primary transfer roller laser exposure system or high voltage system used for that color b White Black Lines If a white black line occurs for a specific color suspect a fault in the drum unit used for that color or dirt in the laser optical path c Uneven Density at the Front Rear If uneven density occurs for a specific color suspect a fault in the drum unit laser exposure system ...

Page 782: ...n for individual colors YMCBk or fogging a Gray Balance Check to see if each color is reproduced at an even level of density in the gray scale area b Gradation Check the reproduction of gradation of individual colors YMCBk and for the difference if any in density c Fogging If fogging occurs in the white area suspect a fault in the developing system or the photosensitive drum or improper adjustment...

Page 783: ...es A4 0000 5378 The following is a collection of faulty images that can occur on A4 or larger paper they have been artificially created and may slightly differ from actual faulty copies A Image Fault Case Samples 1 Light Image in Middle F 16 7 2 Toner Collection Along Image End F 16 8 ...

Page 784: ...Chapter 16 16 10 3 Uneven Density at 44 mm Intervals F 16 9 4 Uneven Density at Angle at 12 mm Intervals F 16 10 5 Uneven Density in vertical direction F 16 11 ...

Page 785: ...Chapter 16 16 11 6 Mottled Image F 16 12 7 Flow image on Side F 16 13 8 Toner Stray F 16 14 ...

Page 786: ...Chapter 16 16 12 9 47 mm Horizontal Line F 16 15 10 100 mm Horizontal Line F 16 16 11 White Spot Along Trailing Edge F 16 17 ...

Page 787: ...Chapter 16 16 13 12 Vertical Lines Charging Roller F 16 18 13 Trace of Delivery Clip F 16 19 14 Trace of Pickup Roller Along Leading Edge F 16 20 ...

Page 788: ... 21 16 3 1 2 Image Fault Case Samples A3 0000 5379 The following is a collection of faulty images that can occur on A3 or larger paper they have been artificially created and may slightly differ from actual faulty copies 1 White Spot on Edge F 16 22 ...

Page 789: ...Chapter 16 16 15 2 20 to 30 mm White Spot F 16 23 3 White Spots Leading Edge F 16 24 ...

Page 790: ...Chapter 16 16 16 4 Fine White Spot Near 30 mm of Trailing Edge F 16 25 5 Line Along Trailing Edge F 16 26 ...

Page 791: ...Chapter 16 16 17 6 Poor Parallel Reproduction Along Trailing Edge F 16 27 7 Rub off Along Trailing Edge F 16 28 ...

Page 792: ...onal uneven density of 12mm intervals when continuously outputting high image duty original 0002 3362 Manual related Cause This symptom occurs because toner replenishment cannot keep pace with toner consumption Field Remedy In service mode Level 2 COPIER Option BODY SLV UP select 1 or 2 Note The drum life will be shortened as a negative effect of 1 In addition to this the print productivity will d...

Page 793: ...h a high color ratio on thick paper 209g or more and coated paper 0002 3398 Symptom Uneven gloss about 155 mm occurs along the leading edge of the 1st print when an image with a high color ratio is printed on thick paper 209 g or more and coated paper Cause There is an appreciable difference in temperature between the 1st rotation of the fixing roller and its 2nd and subsequent rotations with a pe...

Page 794: ...Note As a result of the setting change above the paper delivery speed when the delivery vertical path ass y is used will be changed and thus the productivity might be affected Therefore be sure not to change it if the machine operates normally FG6 9654 Delivery Vertical Path Ass y FG6 9655 Vertical Path Panel Ass y VS1 6318 003 Snap Tight Connector 16 3 2 3 7 Traces of pickup roller in Bk solid im...

Page 795: ... 2 3 9 Light image at the rear side 1cm from the edge of paper when making a copy with A4 or A3 0002 4782 Symptom Light image at the rear side 1cm from the edge of paper when making a copy with A4 or A3 Description This symptom occurs only on copied images not on the test print or printed images Cause As a result of inspection the CCD unit was found to be faulty Field Remedy Make a reduction copy ...

Page 796: ... 8528 Symptom Light image appearing all over the page Cause As a result of inspection reinstallation of the secondary transfer external roller solved the symptom Field Remedy It is possible that the secondary transfer external roller is not installed properly thus reinstall it again ...

Page 797: ...t Designs CAD that appears under Objective 16 3 2 3 12 When executing UFR printing in monochrome density of color area of original is too light 0005 1894 Case in the field Field Remedy There is a case in the field that the setting changes on the printer driver improved the symptom Follow the steps below Click Quality tab select Designs CAD under Objective click Details select Pattern 1 under Halft...

Page 798: ...iginal 16 3 2 4 2 Fogging on the entire Magenta image as if it were combed with a brush 0002 3322 Symptom Image appears to have been given a magenta wash Cause The earth plate of the magenta drum unit contacts the earth pin of the main unit drum unit door guide FF6 2110 000 The earth pin is moved out of place or there is contact failure due to soiling Field Remedy Correct or clean the magenta eart...

Page 799: ...he drum unit door guide 16 3 2 4 5 Density fluctuation increase immediately after replacement of the drum unit in a high humidity environment 0002 3368 Symptom In a high humidity environment the density tends to fluctuate increase immediately after replacement of the drum unit In a high humidity environment the density tends to fluctuate increase immediately after replacement of the drum unit In a...

Page 800: ...r switch so that the formation of a sample image for image stabilization control will remove the faulty toner from the drum 16 3 2 4 7 Fogging in Y area appreciable after the machine has been left along for a long time e g 2 days in a high humidity environment 0002 3375 Symptom In a high humidity environment fogging occurs in Y areas if the machine has been left alone for a long time e g 2 days Ca...

Page 801: ...d Remedy Set 1 to the following in service mode COPIER OPTION BODY DEVL PTH Adverse effect of setting it to 1 the life of the toner container will decrease 16 3 2 4 10 Yellow spots or yellow ghosting on skin colored area 0002 3590 Symptom Yellow spots or yellow ghosting on skin colored area Description This symptom appears only on copied images not on printed ones Cause Main Controller PCB Ass y i...

Page 802: ...y replacing the CCD unit with a new one After replacement be sure to execute CCD ADJ in service mode 16 3 2 4 13 Fogging on the entire Cyan image 0003 2390 Inspected by Canon Inc Description This symptom does not appear on the test print Cause There is a case in the field that unplugging insertion of the connectors on the reader controller PCB solved the problem Field Remedy Unplug and insert the ...

Page 803: ...n the Interface PCB If the symptom is still not solved try replacing the Interface PCB with a new one 16 3 2 4 15 Fogging in Magenta appearing on entire image 0003 3077 Inspected by Canon Inc Description This symptom does not appear on the test print Cause As a result of inspection the CCD unit was found to be faulty Field Remedy At first output a test print to check whether fogging does not appea...

Page 804: ... SH PS ST in service mode COPIER Function CCD 2 If the symptom still recurs replace the CCD unit and the reader controller PCB with a new one in this order 3 If the symptom still recurs this indicates that the reader unit is normal Replace the DDI S board with a new one 4 If the symptom still recurs this indicates that the interface between the reader unit and the printer unit is normal Replace th...

Page 805: ... 0004 2926 Field Remedy Press Special Features Image Quality Adjustment Remove Background If the symptom still recurs press Fine Adjustment that appears by the side of Remove Background key to adjust the density of the background you want to remove Adjusting it to the direction of minus will lighten the background 16 3 2 4 19 Fogging in Magenta as if noise had occurred 0004 9715 Inspected by Canon...

Page 806: ...4 Verified by Canon Inc Field Remedy Ever since DCON Ver 10 02 DCON software which is to be installed simultaneously with System Ver 10 01 the service mode described below has been newly added in order to ease fogging which might occur under low humidity environment This service mode switches a bias of the lower auxiliary brush under low humidity environment from 800V to 850V If fogging occurs und...

Page 807: ...782 Verified by Canon Inc Field Remedy The service mode items below have newly been added to DCON Ver 10 02 DCON software which is to be installed simultaneously with System Ver 10 01 in order to ease fogging Adjusting the upper limit of VD Service mode level 2 COPIER Adjust VCONT VD LIM Y M C K The smaller the set value is the lesser the fogging becomes Adjusting the amount of toner replenishment...

Page 808: ... 120 220 240V F 16 37 16 3 2 4 26 Fogging in Cyan on entire page no problem with test prints 0005 6106 Inspected by Canon Inc Field Remedy As a result of inspection it was found that this symptom occurred because the flat cable connecting to J203 on the Reader Controller PCB was not securely fitted Unplug and reinsert the flat cable of J203 once again 16 3 2 4 27 Overall fogging with margins Occur...

Page 809: ... replace the CCD unit with a new one After replacement of the CCD unit enter the values for color displacement correction in sub scanning direction indicated on the label attached to the unit in service mode COPIER Adjust CCD CCDU RG CCDU GB CCD Unit FM2 0023 F 16 38 16 3 2 5 Uneven Density 16 3 2 5 1 Uneven color around characters when being printed on half tone background in combination with Mac...

Page 810: ...ervice mode COPIER OPTION BODY SLV UP adverse effect of setting it to 1 the life of the drum unit will decrease adverse effect of setting it to 2 the life of the drum unit will decrease and the print productivity will also decrease 16 3 2 5 4 Uneven density in vertical direction occurs when images with a high color ratio are generated in large volumes 0002 3393 Symptom Uneven density in vertical d...

Page 811: ...e Main Unit 2 In service mode level 2 COPIER Adjust HV TR 2TR TGT 2TR SHR TR ENV TR PPR TR CLR TR DUP change the set value with extra care Note As adverse effects of changing the setting it is possible toner scattering or spots will worsen 16 3 2 5 8 Uneven density rough texture in Bk solid images in a high humidity environment 0002 3408 Symptom In a high humidity environment uneven density occurs...

Page 812: ...ing rough texture 16 3 2 5 10 Uneven image in main scanning direction when copying in a single color 0002 8530 Symptom Uneven image in main scanning direction when copying in a single color Cause As a result of inspection reinstallation of the secondary transfer external roller solved the symptom Field Remedy It is possible that the secondary transfer external roller is not installed properly thus...

Page 813: ...test prints 0006 4447 Inspected by Canon Inc Cause As a result of inspection it was found that this symptom occurred because the DC Controller PCB was faulty Field Remedy Follow the steps below 1 Make sure that the connectors are securely fitted between the DC Controller PCB J117 and J118 and the Cyan laser unit J613 J614 and J616 2 Swap the Cyan laser unit with a different color s and check the i...

Page 814: ...tems to Check Remove the two screws on the right inside cover and you can check whether a spring is attached to the pattern reader unit Remove the pattern reader unit referring to the service manual and you can check whether the springs is properly located Field Remedy Attach the spring FB6 3289 000 16 3 2 6 2 Color displacement in sub scanning direction 0002 3498 Symptom Color displacement occurs...

Page 815: ...DC Controller PCB or replacement of the ITB unit Field Remedy Perform the steps below in the order presented they are listed in order of decreasing possibility 1 Inspect whether the 42T gear in the ITB unit is broken or not If a breakage is confirmed replace it with a new one 2 Clear RAM of the DC controller PCB in service mode COPIER Function CLEAR DC CON 3 Replace the ITB unit with a new one 4 R...

Page 816: ...Field Remedy If the host machine has been left for a long time in stand by state or low power mode state the fixing roller may be deformed due to its nip pressure causing blurred images in sub scanning direction This symptom has been corrected with the DCON Ver 11 02 software of DCON to be used together with System Ver 11 03 Thus if paper wrinkle occurs because of the fixing roller upgrade the DCO...

Page 817: ...ages image shift in main scanning direction color void when making pull scan 0005 6128 Case in the field Field Remedy In the field this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB Main was faulty Unplug and reinsert the connectors on it If the symptom still recurs replace it with a new one Main Controller PCB Main FG3 2854 16 3 2 7 Partially Blank Streaked 16 3 2 7 1 Black lines at 2mm interv...

Page 818: ...ear Cause A ground is unstable because of a warpage of the grounding plate for the secondary transfer at the rear side of the machine Field Remedy There is a possibility that a ground cannot be established because of a warpage of the grounding plate for the secondary transfer at the rear side of the machine Visually inspect the grounding plate for warpage Location of the grounding plate ...

Page 819: ...brupt change occurs in the amount of toner deposited over the entire length of the drum axis when full color image is made It is a 47 mm horizontal line Cause An abrupt change increase has occurred in the amount of toner on the photosensitive drum causing uneven rotation of the drum and ultimately a discrepancy in exposure Field Remedy Set 2 to the following in service mode COPIER OPTION BODY TMC ...

Page 820: ...he leading edge of paper Cause A yellow pattern made in blank for progress in image has occurred uneven rotation of the drum and ultimately causing a discrepancy in exposure Field Remedy Set 2 to the following in service mode COPIER OPTION BODY TMC SLCT 16 3 2 7 6 An abrupt change occurs in the amount of toner deposited over the entire length of the drum axis It is a 100 mm horizontal line 0002 34...

Page 821: ...sation on the delivery guide thus the symptom 16 3 2 7 8 White spots in a print made after power on e g for the first time in the morning in a low humidity environment 0002 3433 Symptom A white spot occurs in a print made after power on e g for the first time in the morning in a low humidity environment Cause The resistance of the secondary transfer external roller is too low causing the voltage l...

Page 822: ...R TR DUP adverse effect of changing the setting toner may move astray worsening the occurrence of white spots 16 3 2 7 11 A fine white line around 30mm of the trailing edge on A3 paper 0002 3460 Inspected by Canon Inc Cause When the temperature at both ends of the fixing roller rises the roller pressure becomes higher there Under this condition it is possible the trailing edge of paper jumps Field...

Page 823: ...irection when a solid image is generated Cause The tube of the fixing roller was inadvertently given a crease during production Field Remedy Replace both fixing roller and pressure roller or replace the fixing unit 16 3 2 7 15 Traces of pickup roller along the leading edge of transparency when its source is cassette 0002 3504 Symptom Traces of the pickup roller occur along the leading edge of a tr...

Page 824: ...iling edge of prints made on A3 paper Cause The paper arches between the secondary transfer external roller and the fixing roller and discharge occurs when the trailing edge of the paper leaves the intermediate transfer belt leaving traces Field Remedy Set 1 for the following in service mode COPIER OPTION BODY FX SPD Adverse effect of changing the setting parallel lines may fail to be parallel alo...

Page 825: ...remove grease from the roller If it cannot be removed completely replace the secondary transfer roller or the Secondary Transfer Ass y with a new one 2 It is possible that excessive amount of grease has been applied to the lower registration roller Inspect the affected area and wipe grease off the roller if excessive amount of grease is confirmed Refer to the attached files for the location In add...

Page 826: ...Chapter 16 16 52 F 16 45 ...

Page 827: ...e field Field Remedy There is a case in the field that this symptom occurred because the set value in service mode COPIER Adjust BLANK T L R B was 1000 max Check the set value with the machine you are servicing In addition make sure that the other set values are proper 16 3 2 7 22 Streaks appearing in sub scanning direction when making a copy of color and monochrome originals at a time 0004 9761 V...

Page 828: ...ustrator 8 9 10 on MacOS9 2 2 most of the image may lack This symptom has been corrected with the PS C1 system Ver 1 1 1 so upgrade it to Ver1 1 1 and later if this happens 16 3 2 8 Smudged Streaked 16 3 2 8 1 Soiled image due to waste toner 0002 3602 Symptom Soiled image due to waste toner Cause The gear at the rear side in the waste toner feed unit is missing As the waste toner screw is not acti...

Page 829: ...nit of the color in question Generate a 16 gradation test pattern TYPE 4 to identify the color 16 3 2 8 4 Vertical streaks 0002 3470 Symptom Vertical lines occur Cause The while plate mirror of the reader unit is soiled The copyboard glass is soiled with foreign matter Field Remedy Clean the white plate mirror with lint free paper moistened with alcohol 16 3 2 8 5 Back of paper soiled first in the...

Page 830: ... soiled has lines Mounting the Spur FG6 9648 16 3 2 8 8 White lines at 1 5mm intervals in main scanning direction 0003 2383 Case in the field Field Remedy The similar kind of image can be output when the counterfeit proof function works There is no solution at this moment Adjust the document orientation or the scanning density 16 3 2 8 9 Shade of original appears at lead edge of output image when ...

Page 831: ... the symptom still recurs replace the UFR board with a new one F 16 47 16 3 2 8 11 35mm wide lines in sub scanning direction appearing at a location corresponding to the machine s rear side 0003 8742 Inspected by Canon Inc Cause As a result of inspection the main controller PCB was found to be faulty In this inspection the symptom continuously occurred once it started however it did not always occ...

Page 832: ... BOARD Ass y FG3 3133 Tips for identifying a failure part 1 Whether the problem is caused by the reader unit or printer unit Output a test print and check whether the image is abnormal Yes problem in the printer unit No problem in the reader unit 2 Whether the test print has margins lead trail right and left Yes no problem in high voltage output No problem in high voltage output 3 If fines lines a...

Page 833: ...pect the drum unit 2 If the soiling occurs with mixed colors the ITB cleaning failure is likely to be a cause So inspect the ITB cleaning unit 16 3 2 8 14 Streaks appearing as if they had been caused by cleaning failure with all four colors 0004 9714 Case in the field Field Remedy It is possible that a symptom like this can occur because the secondary transfer roller is not securely fitted causing...

Page 834: ...ed by Canon Inc Field Remedy As a result of inspection it was found that this symptom occurred because the Reader Controller PCB was faulty So unplug and reinsert the connectors on the PCB If the symptom still recurs replace the PCB with a new one Reader Controller PCB FG3 2570 16 3 2 9 Ghost Memory 16 3 2 9 1 Ghost Repeating images which seem to be caused by inferior cleaning at approximately 10c...

Page 835: ...Chapter 16 16 61 Image1 F 16 50 Image2 F 16 51 ...

Page 836: ... against a black background following the generation of a solid image Cause A residual charge exists on the photosensitive drum Field Remedy Set 1 or 2 to the following in service mode COPIER OPTION BODY NEGA GST 16 3 2 9 4 Slipping ghost after generating fine lines with a high color ratio 0002 3494 Symptom A slipping ghost occurs after generation of fine lines with a high color ratio Cause Toner ...

Page 837: ...ne 0003 8657 Case in the field Field Remedy If the flap of an envelope is glued in Envelope mode make a copy or print in Plain Paper mode by following the steps below a For copy Press Paper Select Stack Bypass Irreg Size enter the envelope size OK Next Plain Paper OK and load the envelopes on the stack bypass b For print 1 As in the case of copy make the stack bypass settings 2 Register the size o...

Page 838: ... If the machine you are servicing is earlier than Ver 9 05 upgrade it to Ver 9 05 and later 16 3 2 11 2 Faulty color reproduction 0003 2394 Inspected by Canon Inc Description Gray area is tinged with blue and cyan area is fogged with yellow Cause As a result of inspection the reader controller PCB was found to be faulty Field Remedy Unplug and insert the connectors J204 J205 and J206 on the reader...

Page 839: ... service mode COPIER Function CLEAR R CON 16 3 2 11 5 PS C1 Running ColorCAL degrades gradation quality 0004 9854 Verified by Canon Inc Field Remedy The quality of gradation may be degraded by running ColorCAL as compared with the previous This symptom has been corrected with the PS C1 system Ver 1 1 1 so upgrade it to Ver 1 1 1 and later if this happens Then run ColorCAL again 16 3 2 12 Stretchin...

Page 840: ... moved at the same time Cause The bonding between sheets is too strong causing the separation mechanism to fail Field Remedy Recommend the use of the manual feed tray feeding the sheets individually Types of media in question gloss paper coated tracing paper and thick paper 16 3 3 2 Skew Feed 16 3 3 2 1 DADF K1 Thin original is jammed 0003 8649 Case in the field Cause There is a case in the field ...

Page 841: ...System Ver 11 03 Thus if paper wrinkle occurs because of the fixing roller upgrade the DCON to Ver 11 02 as well as replace the fixing roller or the fixing ass y A change that has been implemented is as follows Before change Fixing roller will rotate in every 30 minutes in stand by or low power mode After change Fixing roller will rotate in every 5 minutes in stand by and in every 12 minutes in lo...

Page 842: ...ol panel lights up Output failure of the DC power supply PCB J156 0002 2493 Symptom Even after three minutes have passed from the power ON neither the power lamp nor the control panel lights up Output failure of the DC power supply PCB J156 Refer to SymptomExplanation Description When the power is turned ON initialization of finisher and feeder should start if the main unit operates normally In th...

Page 843: ...em with the AC supply replace the DC power supply PCB Field Remedy DC Power Supply PCB Part No FG6 8970 000 100 120V FG6 8971 000 220 240V 16 3 4 1 3 When the power is turned ON initialization of the finisher and the feeder should start if the main unit operates normally In this case however there is no initialization 0002 2504 Symptom Even after three minutes have passed from the power ON neither...

Page 844: ...C1 Ver 1 1 1 shut down the power of PS C1 2 On iRC3200 in service mode COPIER Option INT FACE IMG CONT set at 0 Then shut down and turn on the power of iRC3200 3 On iRC3200 in service mode COPIER Option INT FACE IMG CONT se at 3 Then shut down the power of iRC3200 4 Turn on the power of PS C1 and then iRC3200 After making sure that the both devices start up normally download the patch file 1 7RJ59...

Page 845: ...oes not come on remaining black 0003 2353 Case in the field Description In the field this symptom was solved by an insertion of the BootROM the connector of the HDD the Resolution Switching Board and the SDRAM Field Remedy Perform the steps below in the order presented Note that there are relatively many cases that reinsertion of the BootROM solved the problem in the field 1 Remove and insert the ...

Page 846: ...ontroller PCB Sub to the control panel CPU PCB Unplug and reinsert the connectors J1304 on the Main Controller PCB and J1221 that connects to the control panel CPU PCB 16 3 4 2 7 Streaks appear at intervals of 2cm recurs after replacement of control panel 0005 9419 Inspected by Canon Inc Field Remedy As a result of inspection it was found that this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB ...

Page 847: ...eder open close detection is not working so documents cannot be detected Cause During installation the cover plate had not been fitted to the reader upper assembly cover so the open close sensor could not switch ON OFF Field Remedy Attach the cover plate 16 3 4 4 3 Service mode COPIER Function SYSTEM HDD not completed for two hours 0002 3262 Symptom When service mode COPIER Function SYSTEM HDD is ...

Page 848: ...he SRAM Board PCB is faulty Accordingly make sure that it is properly installed If the symptom still recurs replace the SRAM Board PCB with a new one Description In this case the machine locked up when the progress bar which appears at start up reached at the end E719 0000 was recorded in the error log however there was no indication on the LCD E719 0000 is an error code occurring when the coin ve...

Page 849: ...as corrected with System software Ver 9 05 Upgrade it to Ver 9 05 and later 16 3 4 4 11 Machine rebooting upon completion of broadcasting 0004 0628 Verified by Canon Inc Description This symptom can occur upon outputting Send TX Report with the image after broadcasting to more than 50 destinations has been completed Field Remedy This symptom has been corrected with System software Ver 8 04 If the ...

Page 850: ...eplace it with a new one Resolution Switch PCB FG3 2728 16 3 4 4 17 iRC3200 reboots unintentionally USB Interface Board is installed 0005 6161 Case in the field Field Remedy In the field this symptom occurred because the USB interface board was faulty Install the board once again If the symptom still recurs replace it with a new one Note that the USB interface board is not assigned as a service pa...

Page 851: ...nt scanning mode 0003 8648 Manual related Field Remedy In service mode level 2 COIPIER Option ACC DF MUTE set at 1 to activate the DADF silent reading mode However the speed of scanning the originals will slow down from 750mm s to 420mm s 16 3 4 5 3 Abnormal noise when paper is picked up from Cassette 0005 3237 Case in the field Field Remedy It is possible that abnormal noise might occur at the ti...

Page 852: ...ooling fan cable 0008 1578 Inspected by Canon Inc Description The cable was connected to the delivery cooling fan in order to prevent the internal delivery roller from being deformed by heat however abnormal noise was heard from the fixing exhaust fan or the cable was cut because the cable was not fixed into the two cable cramps and interfered with the fixing exhaust fan Field Remedy Inspect the c...

Page 853: ...2 2523 Symptom In user mode System Settings Network Settings Ethernet Driver Settings Auto Detect is switched OFF but a message Check network settings cannot turn off Cause This is a specification of this product Field Remedy In service mode level 2 COPIER OPTION NWERR SW change the value from 1 to 0 and turn the power OFF ON 0 Not display 1 Display Factory setting value post RAM clear value 16 3 ...

Page 854: ...degree of wear is NOT shown in the form of a progress bar Also when the drum life reaches 100 the error lamp flashes red and the machine will be suspended Method 3 DLIFE SW 1 P CRG LF 0 In the user screen under System status Consumables the degree of wear is shown in the form of a progress bar showing the amount of life remaining Also even when the drum life has exceeded 100 the machine will not b...

Page 855: ...f paper size that has been registered as Stack Bypass Standard Settings disappears by removing paper from manual tray 0003 8639 Verified by Canon Inc Field Remedy This symptom has been corrected with System software Ver 9 05 so that the registered paper size keeps displaying although no paper is loaded in the manual tray If the machine you are servicing is earlier than Ver 9 05 upgrade it to Ver 9...

Page 856: ...will become full and communication clogging occur As a result a timeout occurs on the computer and 853 is displayed without a completion of the job Field Remedy 1 Make sure that the host machine does not stop for any reasons such as no paper or no toner 2 Enable network spooling function in user mode System Settings Network Settings Use Spooler On so that it will become faster to release the compu...

Page 857: ...k Tool Internet Option Privacy 16 3 4 6 17 802 when attempting to send e mail 0004 0694 Manual related Description This error can occur when the host machine cannot connect to SMTP server and DNS server because of wrong settings of SMTP server and DNS server name Field Remedy It is possible that the settings of SMTP server or NDS server for e mail I fax are wrong Check the settings SMTP server set...

Page 858: ...oduct Field Remedy Explain to customer 16 3 4 7 4 When attempting to view each item through the remote UI on the client PCs only Device can be seen When the user attempts to view Job Copy Box Address and U 0002 2533 Symptom When attempting to view each item through the remote UI on the client PCs only Device can be seen When the user attempts to view Job Copy Box Address and User mode he is prompt...

Page 859: ...y in a high humidity environment 0002 3536 Symptom The medium tends to wave or curl if stacking is poor as when the medium is of high rigidity and used in a high humidity environment Cause The medium absorbs moisture and tends to curl appreciably downward Field Remedy Set 1 for the following in service mode COPIER OPTION BODY DEVL FAN 16 3 4 7 7 Control key not working 0003 2739 Manual related Fie...

Page 860: ...3200 is Ver 1 63 and later Upgrade the SST to Ver 1 63 and later 16 3 4 7 11 705 0004 0733 Manual related Cause The data size of image that is being sent is larger than that specified in Maximum Data Size for Sending Field Remedy Change the maximum data size for sending in user mode System Settings Communications Settings E mail I Fax Settings Maximum Data Seize for Sending 16 3 4 7 12 Air bubbles...

Page 861: ...tion on the host machine control panel PS C1 can lock up This symptom has been corrected with the PS C1 system Ver 1 1 1 so upgrade it to Ver 1 1 1 and later if this happens 16 3 4 7 16 PS C1 PS error when outputting image prepared with PhosoShop6 on Mac OS9 0004 9859 Verified by Canon Inc Field Remedy When attempting to output the binary mode image file prepared with PhosoShop6 on Mac OS9 PS erro...

Page 862: ...8 Symptom E747 00FF only with printing operation Error Code Cause UFR board is faulty Field Remedy Replace the UFR board with a new one 16 3 5 1 2 Unable to print 0002 8534 Symptom Unable to print Description A print job can be sent from a PC and PING also worked fine Field Remedy If the setting in user mode System Settings Dept ID Management Accept Jobs With Unknown ID is set at OFF the same symp...

Page 863: ...loader and set the connection type to PS C1 as Direct queue 2 Download the patch file to PS C1 3 After at least 60 seconds reboot PS C1 4 Press Extension button on the LCD of iRC3200 and select the printer When the LCD indicates Idle reboot PS C1 again 5 After PS C1 reboots output Configuration Page and make sure that Update Information indicates 1 8XS7M 16 3 5 1 6 Unable to output via UFR with Pr...

Page 864: ...9 Field Remedy If Envelope is selected for the paper type the finisher mode cannot be set The finisher mode is set by default So cancel the finisher mode and make a print Refer to Mail Box Guide on page 5 9 16 3 5 1 11 Unable to print with message Suspended 0004 9731 Case in the field Field Remedy There is a case in the field that this symptom was corrected by replacement of the UFR board Remove a...

Page 865: ...er PCB Main was faulty Unplug and insert the connectors on the PCB If the symptom still recurs replace the PCB with a new one Main Controller PCB Main FG3 2854 16 3 5 1 17 When printing through UFR host machine halts with message Canceling 0005 6596 Verified by Canon Inc Field Remedy When the print job reaches the upper impression limit that has been specified using Dept ID Management feature the ...

Page 866: ...ing ADF Description When documents are set on the ADF and scanned under auto duplex mode the pages of a PDF file get out of order Cause This is a specification limitation of Adobe Acrobat 5 x Field Remedy Set the scanning settings on Acrobat at Simplex 16 3 5 3 2 Duplex printing is inoperative with Illustrator10 x 0002 1850 Symptom Duplex printing is inoperative with Illustrator10 x Description Ev...

Page 867: ...sing Image Combination or Image Separation functions Description This symptom concerns only Japanese fonts 16 3 5 3 5 Black image when scanned with iRC3200 PS C1 using Fiery Scan3 4 0002 3563 Symptom Black image when scanned with iRC3200 PS C1 using Fiery Scan3 4 Cause Fiery Scan3 4 does not support iRC3200 Field Remedy If a scanning is done with iRC3200 PS C1 install Fiery RemoteStan5 which is co...

Page 868: ... density of each color 16 3 5 3 10 PS C1 Color around texts is different from background when outputting data of Quark Xpress for Mac4 1 0004 0645 Case in the field Field Remedy Check the settings for printerfont on Mac side If there are any fonts on which a check mark is not placed for Font exists place the check mark on all the fonts 16 3 5 3 11 When merging multiple documents in inbox print set...

Page 869: ...x depending on the size The supported size is 182 457 2 x 105 305 mm 16 3 5 3 15 PS C1 11x17 sized paper is not output in proper direction when attempting to output LTR and 11x17 simultaneously 0004 9865 Manual related Field Remedy Select Large Paper Only for Rotate 180 in Print Options For more details refer to Appendix A Print Options in the Printing Guide How to set for Windows 1 On you applica...

Page 870: ...ion This symptom can occur in the combination below Operating System Windows 98 Me Application Software Word2000 Field Remedy This symptom has been corrected with a patch file 1 9C5YH Install it at the time of its occurrence 16 3 5 3 20 To Activate ICC Profile when ICM Mode Is Selected in Printer Driver 0002 5425 Symptom To Activate ICC Profile when ICM Mode Is Selected in Printer Driver Overview ...

Page 871: ...on 5 Click OK button to close the properties Then select ICM Mode from the Matching Mode list box on the Matching tab sheet in the Color Settings dialog and submit the job to the printer Remarks Note that selecting improper profiles may cause undesirable print results ICC F 16 53 ...

Page 872: ...erent dialogs to reach to the Custom Paper Size Setting dialog It is not easy to find the dialog Field Remedy Field Countermeasure On the Properties Dialog that Features Custom Paper Size Button Select Start Settings Printers and open the Properties for the printer for setting custom paper size To Open Printer Properties Click Printing Preferences button on General tab sheet General Tab Sheet ...

Page 873: ...Chapter 16 16 99 PrinterPropaties F 16 55 Click Custom Paper Size button on Page Setup tab sheet Page Setup Tab Sheet Page Setup F 16 56 ...

Page 874: ...Chapter 16 16 100 Click Custom Paper Size button on Page Setup tab sheet Page Setup Tab Sheet Custom Paper Size Settings F 16 57 ...

Page 875: ...Chapter 16 16 101 Select the defined paper size from the Output Size dropdown list box on the Page Setup tab sheet Output Size Fig OutPutSize F 16 58 ...

Page 876: ...6 16 102 On Device Settings tab sheet click Form to Tray Assignment button Select Stack Bypass from Paper Source list and the defined paper size from the Paper Size dropdown list box Fig Device Settings F 16 59 ...

Page 877: ...Chapter 16 16 103 On the Properties Dialog without Custom Paper Size Button No Custom Paper Size Button Fig No Custom Paper Size Button F 16 60 ...

Page 878: ...r 16 16 104 Select Start Settings Printers and select the printer for setting custom paper size On the menu bar in Printers window select File Server Properties Server Properties Fig Server Propaties F 16 61 ...

Page 879: ...es For setting Paper Size and Printer Area Margins enter values within the range specified for the printer The printer driver does not show the custom paper sizes with values that exceed the specified range Enter 5 mm or larger values for the margins In Form to Tray Assignment dialog select Stack Bypass from the Paper Source list and the defined paper size from the Paper Size dropdown list box Fig...

Page 880: ...e The host does not send SNMP for several minutes holding the spooler status in error As a result the printer does not print for several minutes Field Remedy In Properties dialog for the printer select Ports tab and click Configure Port button to open the Configure Port dialog Then change either or both of the settings shows below Setting 1 Change the Protocol from RAW to LPR Setting 2 Turn off th...

Page 881: ...of LCD message POP server connection error is displayed 0004 0729 Case in the field Description This symptom can occur when the host machine has been configured to receive e mail or I fax via POP server Field Remedy It is possible that the host machine is not properly connected to the POP server Check the connection settings of POP server In user mode System Settings Network Settings E mail I Fax ...

Page 882: ...Auto Detect Full Duplex button for Communication Mode and 100 Base TX button for Ethernet Type in the Ethernet Driver Settings dialog If transfer rate can be changed in the hub change the setting for the port connected to the printer from the automatic option to 100 M of fixed rate option Ethernet Driver Settings F 16 64 16 3 7 Transmission Fax Related 16 3 7 1 Transmission Problem 16 3 7 1 1 796 ...

Page 883: ...lanation 0002 2506 Symptom When the START button is pressed to send a G3 Fax a beep sound is heard and no transmission can be made Also E674 0001 is recorded in the error history Output failure of the fuse PCB J61 Refer to SymptomExplanation Description There was no indication that this problem had occurred as far as the following were checked Sending Job Status Receiving Job Status and Job Histor...

Page 884: ...side 0002 4750 Symptom Lines in the main scanning direction at about 4mm intervals on FAX received image at receiving side Description This symptom does not occur on copied images Cause As a result of inspection the main controller PCB was found to be faulty Field Remedy Replace the main controller PCB with a new one F 16 65 ...

Page 885: ...g the data size 16 3 7 1 7 Density of FAX sent document is light 0003 2338 Manual related Field Remedy In user mode Adjustment Cleaning Exposure Recalibration Send B W make it darker 16 3 7 1 8 Documents stored in Memory RX Inboxes are sent in a file after selecting all documents pressing Select All 0003 8603 Manual related Field Remedy When attempting to send all documents stored in Memory RX Inb...

Page 886: ... sent exceeds the upper limit the documents will be sent by dividing into multiple mails when being sent as an e mail Change the upper limit of the transmission data size In user mode System Settings Communications Settings E mail I FAX Settings Maximum Data Size For Sending 16 3 7 1 12 PS C1 Unable to download PDF files from FieryDownloader with Direct connection 0004 9712 Manual related Field Re...

Page 887: ...the Inbox by following the steps below Place a document Press Send tab Press Store in User Inbox Select any Inbox Press Start key 16 3 7 1 16 E mail cannot be sent Field of e mail address of iRC3200 is blank 0005 4293 Manual related Field Remedy E mail cannot be sent if the e mail address of iRC3200 is not registered Register the e mail address in user mode System Settings Network Settings E mail ...

Page 888: ...n has been switched For more details refer to Sending and Facsimile Guide Basic Sending Methods Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab Specifying a Fax Number 16 3 7 1 20 Address Book List Cannot Be Selected 0002 5500 Symptom Address Book List Cannot Be Selected Overview When registering the Address Book for the Fax driver users of the Users group cannot select Address Book List on Wind...

Page 889: ...he users the meaning of the 899 Remarks This code appears when data is transmitted in Canon FTP with iW Gateway 16 3 7 2 Reception Problem 16 3 7 2 1 Faint lines in the main scanning direction at about 1mm intervals on FAX received image 0002 4748 Symptom Faint lines in the main scanning direction at about 1mm intervals on FAX received image Description This symptom does not occur on copied images...

Page 890: ...r the alarm tone is not emitted upon completion of sending receiving fax Field Remedy In order to emit the alarm tone the following setting change is required in service mode So set it upon request from your customer 1 For the success tone In service mode FAX NCU SPECIALB SW04 change bit1 at 1 to emit 0 not emit default 2 For the error tone In service mode FAX NCU SPECIALB SW04 change bit0 at 1 to...

Page 891: ...th machine having mylar sheet to fixing feeder sensor flag 0002 3570 Inspected by Canon Inc Field Remedy Check whether the mylar sheet is properly attached to the fixing feeder sensor flag If not reattach it or replace the sensor flag with a new one FB6 3143 020 Fixing Feeder Sensor Flag New type as of June 15 2004 16 3 8 4 JAM CODE 0107 0003 8653 Case in the field Description This jam code indica...

Page 892: ...are several cases where toner adhering to the internal delivery roller or pinched wires of delivery vertical path motor caused this symptom 16 3 8 7 0207 Jam Code Because of deformation of internal delivery roller 0007 9931 Inspected by Canon Inc Description The internal delivery roller was deformed by heat after long use and this degraded its paper delivery capability causing a paper jam As a sol...

Page 893: ...ng with the fan FB6 4862 Internal Delivery Roller FG3 3973 Delivery Cooling Fan Cable 16 3 8 8 0A06 Jam Code 0004 9723 Case in the field Field Remedy 0A06 indicates that a stationary jam is detected at the fixing inlet sensor PS27 at power ON 1 Check whether or not the fixing inlet sensor PS27 operates normally in service mode COPIER I O P007 bit3 1 ON 0 OFF If it does not operate normally replace...

Page 894: ...curely installed In the past displacement of this sensor caused this 16 3 9 Jam Document Feeder 16 3 9 1 JAM CODE 008C frequent occurrence recorded in jam history under service mode although unable to reproduce during paper feeding test 0002 3047 Symptom Service mode history shows frequent feeder document jams 008C However the jams are not reproduced when a paper feed test is run Cause Jams happen...

Page 895: ... detection 0001 After power on the output of the noncontact thermistor does not reach 40 C within 180 sec Detail Description Timing of detection 0001 The high temperature detection port ontinues to remain ON for 500 msec 0003 The reading of the no contact thermistor remains 250 C for 500 msec 0004 The difference in temperature between the non contact thermistor and the end thermistor remains 80 C ...

Page 896: ...it has reached 60 C 0004 The output of the non contact thermistor does not reach 120 C within 240 sec after it has reached 90 C 0005 The output of the non contact thermistor does not reach 140 C within 180 sec after it has reached 120 C 0006 The output of the non contact thermistor does not reach 160 C within 180 sec after it has reached 140 C 0007 The output of the non contact thermistor does not...

Page 897: ...eading of the non contact thermistor remains 120 C or less for 10 sec Detail Description Timing of detection 0001 A short circuit of the triac is detected for 500 msec continuously 0002 An open circuit of the temperature detection thermistor inside the non contact thermistor is detected for 500 msec continuously 0003 A short circuit of the temperature detecting thermistor inside the non contact th...

Page 898: ...sensor 1 Note When implementing the countermeasure be careful not to detach the face down delivery sensor 1 and the delivery vertical path cover open closed sensor 16 3 10 7 E004 0005 Error Code Because of faulty DC Controller PCB 0006 2042 Inspected by Canon Inc Description E004 0005 can be displayed when a short circuit of the main thermistor TH1 is detected for 500 msec continuously Cause As a ...

Page 899: ... Step 2 2 Visually inspect the fixing roller drive gears in the fixing unit for any abnormality 3 Check the sub thermistor for any abnormality 4 Check whether the gears in the fixing drive unit located on the back side of the host machine rotate at power on If not remove the fixing drive unit and inspect the gears for any abnormality If no problem is found in the Steps 2 through 3 go to the next s...

Page 900: ...drum ITB motor failure 0002 2015 Symptom About 37 sec after the power is turned ON E012 0001 is displayed due to a drum ITB motor failure Cause Rotational failure of drum ITB motor Detail Description Timing of detection 0001 The ITB drum motor fails to rotate The lock normal state signal is not detected within 2 sec after the ITB drum motor control signal has gone ON or the motor speed has been ch...

Page 901: ...00 16 3 10 13 E012 0001 Error code At about 37 sec after the power is turned ON due to a microswitch PCB failure 0002 2018 Symptom About 37 sec after the power is turned ON E012 0001 is displayed due to a microswitch PCB failure Cause Rotational failure of drum ITB motor Items to Check 1 In service mode level 1 COPIER FUNCTION PART CHK MTR enter 1 and press the OK key 2 In service mode level 1 COP...

Page 902: ...are listed in order of decreasing number The drum ITB motor is faulty The Fuse PCB is faulty Either of the open close switches for the front cover the manual feed tray unit or the fixing feeder unit is faulty The connectors on the DC Controller PCB are not securely fitted Field Remedy Follow the steps below 1 Remove the ITB unit and check whether the belt rotates smoothly 2 Disconnect the connecto...

Page 903: ...3 10 17 E020 Error code detail There is a fault associated with the drum developer 0002 1627 Symptom E020 There is a fault associated with the drum developer Error code detail Description T 16 8 Detail Description Timing of detection For the first 2 digits of detail code xx20 through xxD0 xx 01 Y xx 02 M xx 03 C xx 04 Bk xx20 There is a fault open circuit in the ATR sensor The drum unit is not fit...

Page 904: ...le rotation of the developing assembly xx40 The ATR sensor communication value is faulty There is a fault open circuit in the ATR sensor The drum unit has been fitted improperly The machine cannot detect the drum unit The drum unit is faulty The fault can occur as when a new drum unit has been fitted It is detected in about 90 to 120 sec after idle rotation of the developing assembly xx50 The deve...

Page 905: ...oper concentration is considerably low The ATR sensor is faulty The SALT sensor is faulty The ITB is soiled The fault occurs when an image is being formed It is detected when toner supply operation is started xxB0 The drum unit is approaching the end of its life and is causing the T D ratio to drop The ATR sensor has an open circuit The fault occurs when an image is being formed It is detected whe...

Page 906: ... SALT sensor shutter Therefore if a copy is made without the service case E020 0081 is displayed Field Remedy Re attach the service case 16 3 10 20 E020 0X34 E020 0X21 Error code Upon installation in a cold season 0002 3219 Symptom The E020 0X34 or the E020 0X21 lights on when you install this machine in the cold season Cause If you carry in this machine which has been placed in cold environment c...

Page 907: ...th the following service mode procedure Under service mode level 1 COPIER Function PART CHK MTR enter 5 and press OK 2 Under service mode level 1 COPIER Function PART CHK MTR ON press OK If everything is normal the toner container motor Bk will come ON in 10 seconds The problem in this case was that the motor did not rotate Field Remedy First check the listed items If the toner container motor is ...

Page 908: ...surement value detected by the SALT sensor is extremely low Cause Faulty detection because SALT sensor shutter does not open close properly due to failure of service book cover SALT sensor shutter open close rod assembly not pressing home against the main unit due to a loose screw in the service book cover or similar Field Remedy Check for any play in the front cover Check that the screws in the s...

Page 909: ...ng for toner supply If it does remove it completely and replace the drum unit with a new one 4 If the DCON is Ver4 03 or smaller upgrade it to Ver5 05 or higher 16 3 10 26 E020 xx24 Error Code 0002 3553 Symptom E020 xx24 Cause This error code is displayed when the density of a sample patch generated in ATR control is higher than the specified value Field Remedy Visually inspect the SALT sensor for...

Page 910: ...ode is displayed when the toner concentration inside the developing ass y drops while 20 prints are being made continuously Field Remedy 1 Make sure that the opening for toner supply of the toner cartridge is not damaged If it is damaged replace the toner cartridge with a new one 2 Make sure that the connectors of the toner container motors M20 to M23 are securely inserted If they are unplugged in...

Page 911: ...troller PCB was faulty For your information when the overall fogging with no margin occurs there is a high possibility that there is a problem with the DC controller PCB or the H V transformer PCB On the other hand if there is a margin it is possible that the main controller PCB or the sub controller PCB is faulty 16 3 10 32 E032 Error code detail The counter of the NE controller fails to operate ...

Page 912: ...roller PCB FG3 3003 100V FG3 2356 120 220 240V Laser Unit FG6 8962 Detail Description Timing of detection 0110 The rotation of the Y laser scanner motor is faulty The motor lock signal remains in an unlock state for 1 sec or more while the laser scanner motor is in operation 0210 The rotation of the M laser scanner motor is faulty The motor lock signal remains in an unlock state for 1 sec or more ...

Page 913: ...at unplugging reinserting the connector on the interface PCB solved the problem Field Remedy Check whether the optical home position sensor SR2 operates normally in service mode COPIER I O R CON P004 bit5 If there is no problem with the sensor SR2 unplug and insert the connectors on the interface PCB J301 J305 J306 J309 J311 Detail Description Timing of detection 0000 The No 1 mirror base moves in...

Page 914: ... 0000 Error Code Entire image sometimes becomes tinged with red 0002 2536 Inspected by Canon Inc Cause As a result of inspection the CCD unit was found to be faulty Field Remedy Replace the CCD unit with a new one FM2 0023 CCD Unit F 16 67 Detail Description Timing of detection 0000 The intensity of the scanning lamp has dropped During shading adjustment at time of power on the intensity detected ...

Page 915: ...D unit Poor contact of the flat cable J205 which is connected to the RCON Field Remedy Securely insert the flat cables CCD unit side J102 RCON side J205 16 3 10 40 E220 0000 Error code Faulty connection in the flat cable from the CCD unit into R CON J205 causes 0002 3358 Symptom Faulty connection in the flat cable from the CCD unit into R CON J205 causes E220 0000 Cause Connection failure in the f...

Page 916: ... FG3 2570 120 220 240V 16 3 10 42 E220 0000 Error Code when turning power ON while opening platen cover 0005 6111 Case in the field Field Remedy It is possible that the connectors connecting to the Interface PCB are not securely fitted Unplug and reinsert them on the Interface PCB 16 3 10 43 E220 0000 Error Code No problem with CCD unit and Reader Controller PCB 0005 6124 Case in the field Descrip...

Page 917: ... again Be sure to lock it after insertion FG3 2570 Reader Controller PCB 16 3 10 45 E240 Error code detail The communication between the main motor controller and the DC controller is faulty 0002 1644 Symptom E240 The communication between the main motor controller and the DC controller is faulty Error code detail Description T 16 13 16 3 10 46 E243 Error code detail The control panel is faulty 00...

Page 918: ...ted 0002 3583 Symptom E315 0010 Error Code only for FAX is transmitted Cause Resolution Switching Board is faulty Field Remedy Resolution Switching Board is faulty Detail Description Timing of detection 0000 A time out has occurred in shading operation The shading processing does not end 1 sec after it has started 0001 A time out has occurred in gain offset correction by the analog processor The g...

Page 919: ...symptom occurred because the connector between the ECO ID PCB and J1315 on the Main Controller PCB Main was not securely fitted So check the connection 16 3 10 52 E402 Error code detail There is a fault in the feeder motor 0002 1653 Symptom E402 There is a fault in the feeder motor Error code detail Description T 16 18 Detail Description Timing of detection 0000 There is a fault in the initial com...

Page 920: ...very motor 0002 1656 Symptom E404 There is a fault in the delivery motor Error code detail Description T 16 19 16 3 10 55 E500 Error code detail There is a fault in finisher communication Finisher N1 0002 1665 Symptom E500 There is a fault in finisher communication Finisher N1 Error code detail Description T 16 20 Detail Description Timing of detection The face down delivery motor M3 fails to rota...

Page 921: ... Symptom E503 There is a fault in saddle communication Error code detail Description T 16 22 Detail Description Timing of detection There is a fault in data communication The communication between the machine and the finisher is disrupted and in addition an attempt at recovery within 5 sec fails Detail Description Timing of detection 0002 There is a fault in data communication The communication be...

Page 922: ...ommunication between the height sensor and the finisher controller PCB is prevented Or there is a fault in the communication data 0002 The height sensor PS1 is faulty The communication between the height sensor and the finisher controller PCB is prevented for 0 1 sec or more 0003 The connector of the height sensor PS1 is faulty This fault is detected at power on 0004 The DIP switch for the height ...

Page 923: ...tection 0001 The delivery roller feed motor M2 or feed motor clock sensor PI10 is faulty The delivery motor clock sensor fails to generate the target number of clock pulses within 10 sec at the start of operation 0002 The delivery roller feeder motor M2 or feeder motor clock sensor PI10 is faulty There is no clock pulse for a feed equivalent for 0 2 during communication Detail Description Timing o...

Page 924: ...tor is disconnected The stack delivery belt or the return roller is faulty The stack delivery lever fails to reach its home position when the stack processing motor has been driven for a specific period of time at start of operation Detail Description Timing of detection 0001 There is an excess load on the alignment motor M3 aligning plate home position sensor PI6 or aligning plate The aligning pl...

Page 925: ...ment motor M4 or the rear aligning plate home position sensor S7 is faulty An excess load is imposed on the rear aligning plate The rear aligning plate fails to reach the home position sensor or fails to leave the aligning plate home position sensor when the rear aligning plate has been driven for a specific period of time Detail Description Timing of detection The stapler motor M6 or the stapling...

Page 926: ...r 0 5 sec 0002 The stapler motor M6 or the stapling home position detecting switch MS7 is faulty The stapler does not return from the stapler shift position when the stapler shift motor has been driven for 0 5 sec Detail Description Timing of detection 0001 The stapler shift motor M4 or the stapler shift home position sensor PI7 is faulty There is a fault in the path of the stapler shift base The ...

Page 927: ...uide open switch does not go ON when the swing motor has been rotated in reverse for 1 sec 0003 The safety area switch MS3 or the swing guide switch 2 MS6 is faulty The swing guide closed switch is OFF when the tray 1 2 is in the OFF position of the safety area switch while the tray ascent descent motor is in operation 0004 The swing motor M7 or the swing motor clock sensor PI20 is faulty There is...

Page 928: ...15 sec after the tray assent descent motor has been driven or the tray home position is not detected when it has been driven for 15 sec 0002 The tray upper limit detecting switch MS5 is faulty The tray upper limit detecting switch is ON during tray ascent descent operation 0003 The tray ascent descent motor M5 or the tray ascent descent motor clock sensor 1 2 PI9 PI19 is faulty There is no clock p...

Page 929: ...ascent descent motor is in operation or the clock pulse of the stack tray direction motor clock sensor is not detected 15 times or more within 0 8 sec The stack tray does not reach the stack tray height sensor within 4 sec after the stack tray ascent descent motor has started ascent operation Detail Description Timing of detection 0001 The No 2 feed motor M8 or the shutter open sensor PI5 is fault...

Page 930: ...sitioning plate home position sensor does not go ON when the paper positioning plate motor has been driven for 1 33 sec 0002 The paper positioning plate motor M4S or the paper positioning plate home position sensor PI7S is faulty The paper positioning plate home position sensor does not go OFF when the paper position plate motor has been driven for 1 sec Detail Description Timing of detection 0001...

Page 931: ...sor does not go ON when the guide motor has been rotated for 0 455 sec 0002 The guide motor M3S or the guide home position sensor PI13S is faulty The guide home position sensor does not go OFF when the guide motor has been driven for 1 sec Detail Description Timing of detection 0001 The alignment motor M5S or the aligning plate home position sensor PI5S is faulty The aligning plate home position s...

Page 932: ...does not go OFF when the stitch motor rear has been rotated clockwise for 0 5 sec 0002 The stitch motor rear M67S or the stitching home position sensor rear MS5S is faulty The stitching home position sensor does not go ON when the stitch motor rear has been rotated in reverse for 0 5 sec or more Detail Description Timing of detection 0001 The stitch motor front M7S or the stitching home position s...

Page 933: ...er pushing plate home position sensor does not go OFF when the paper pushing plate motor has been driven for 80 msec 0003 The paper pushing plate motor M8S or the paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor PI15S is faulty The paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor does not go OFF when the paper pushing plate motor has been driven for 80 msec 0004 The paper pushing plate motor M8S o...

Page 934: ...tor of the paper pushing plate home position sensor PI14S is faulty The connector of the paper pushing plate home position sensor is identified to have been disconnected 0003 The connector of the paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor PI15S is faulty The connector of the paper pushing plate position sensor is identified to have been disconnected Detail Description Timing of detection 000...

Page 935: ...e mode level 1 COPIER TEST PG TYPE 14 Compare the maximum density areas output at THRU 0 and THRU 1 and if the densities are different proceed to step 4 4 Adjust in service mode level 1 COPIER ADJUST PASCAL OFST P Y M C K and again in service mode level 1 COPIER TEST PG THRU set 0 default and 1 With each setting output service mode level 1 COPIER TEST PG TYPE 14 0002 The front cover switch MS2S or...

Page 936: ...odes are displayed when a E602 0001 the host machine detects that the system is not properly installed in the HDD when the HDD starts up b E602 0002 the host machine detects an error during reading the data from the HDD when the HDD starts up c E602 0003 there occurs a discrepancy between the control data for the data stored in the HDD and the actual data HDD sector Write Abort Field Remedy a E602...

Page 937: ... which the HD cannot be detected The machine may fail to become ready returning an error code 0002 The startup file is absent The program for the main CPU does not exist on the HD in BOOTDEV BOOT or the like 0003 The fault is a HD write abort error The machine fails to read sectors of the HD 0005 It is a fault in the detection of the HD controller IC It is detected when the HD controller IC cannot...

Page 938: ... indicated by XX Description 01 Device error sector write abort other HDD access driver error 02 File system logic error error detection by check processing mounting failure 03 Other error HDD connector fault HDD detection failure secondary error as of DRAM fault 10 HD controller HD controller IC driver No error 11 HD controller IC driver not installed 12 HD controller IC system error 13 HD contro...

Page 939: ...m the distribution board PCB J1505 check whether 5V is input to the distribution board PCB J1501 1 and 12V to J1501 8 If no check the fuse PCB Field Remedy Replace the distribution board PCB Ass y Distribution Board PCB Ass y Part No FG6 9676 000 16 3 10 87 E602 0001 Error code At about 5 sec after the power is turned ON due to a connection failure of the flat cable between the HDD unit and the ma...

Page 940: ...ase Field Remedy Clear RAM of the SRAM in service mode COPIER Function CLEAR MN CON If the symptom still recurs replace the SRAM Board PCB with a new one Note Clearing the RAM or replacement of the SRAM Board PCB will erase all the image data inside the HDD FG3 2856 SRAM Board PCB Ass y 16 3 10 90 Progress bar on machine starting up window is slower than usual then E602 Error Code is displayed 000...

Page 941: ...C Fuse PCB FG3 2337 16 3 10 94 E602 0402 Error Code At power on upon installation iRC3220 0008 1586 Case in the field Description When E602 0402 was displayed at power on upon installation MN CONT clear was executed and the symptom was solved When this symptom occurs follow the steps in Field Remedy E602 0402 can be displayed when the partition FSTPDEV inside the HDD is faulty The detail code indi...

Page 942: ... RAM to see whether 768MB will be displayed 2 In order to identify the root cause whether the expansion RAM or the slot on the Main Controller PCB Main is faulty remote the original SDRAM 512MB and insert into the expansion RAM slot to see whether the host machine will start up normally 3 If the host machine start up normally replace the expansion RAM with a new one If not replace the Main Control...

Page 943: ...n T 16 52 16 3 10 100 E677 0002 Error Code 0004 9766 Manual related Field Remedy E677 0002 can be displayed when executing Run Setup of PS C1 during printing Run Setup must be executed when the status is Idle Detail Description Timing of detection 0001 A HD mounting error is detected when the HD is booted from BOOT ROM 0002 A reading error is detected when the HD is booted from BOOTROM Detail Desc...

Page 944: ... has been detected 4 times or more within 1 5 sec after the communication between the reader unit and the ADF has been disrupted 0002 There is a fault in data communication The finisher controller pedestal controller or DC controller PCB is faulty The connector between the finisher and the cassette pedestal has poor contact An error has been detected 4 times or more within 1 5 sec after the commun...

Page 945: ... faulty The connector between the finisher and the machine has poor connection An error has been detected 4 times or more for 1 5 sec after the communication between the finisher and the machine is disrupted and in addition an attempt at recovery has failed Detail Description Timing of detection There is a fault in data communication The ADF controller or the reader controller PCB is faulty The co...

Page 946: ...rward the power cord from the pedestal gets tugged out and the power cord from the main unit is prone to being pulled out Items to Check Check that the cassette pedestal power cord is not being tugged by something Field Remedy If the power cord is being pulled out explain to the user that if the power cord is pulled out while the main unit is activated an error will be generated 16 3 10 107 E717 E...

Page 947: ... card reader D1 At this time if the cable is suddenly disconnected E000719 0011 will occur Cause Communication error when the card reader D1 cable is disconnected Field Remedy 1 In service mode level 1 COPIER Function CLEAR ERR press OK and then turn OFF the main switch 2 Turn ON the power 3 When the main unit starts up Department ID and Personal Identification Number entry window will appear Pres...

Page 948: ...0 111 E731 Error code detail There is a fault in the UFR board 0002 1803 Symptom E731 There is a fault in the UFR board Error code detail Description T 16 60 16 3 10 112 E732 Error code detail There is a reader communication error 0002 1809 Symptom E732 There is a reader communication error Error code detail Description T 16 61 Detail Description Timing of detection 3000 The UFR board cannot be re...

Page 949: ...ming MN CON be sure to output P PRINT and USER PRINT After performing compare the values on the both prints and enter the original values if they are changed 16 3 10 114 E732 0001 Error code A message Starting up Please wait keeps displaying for about 2 min 40 sec after the power is turned ON and then the error code results DC power supply unit PCB J158 output failure 0002 2012 Symptom About 2 min...

Page 950: ...er Controller PCB in the reader unit are securely fitted If the symptom still recur go to the step 3 3 Check whether DC is output from J67 on the Fuse PCB located at the back side of the host machine If DC output is confirmed go to the step 4 If not go to the step 5 4 Remove and install the DDI S Board PCB and the Main Controller PCB Sub inside the controller box to see whether the host machine wi...

Page 951: ...the back 2 Check whether the wiring from the lattice connector to the distribution board J67 is secured 3 Check whether DC line is output from the fuse PCB J67 4 If no check whether DC line is output to the fuse PCB J53 J56 J57 and J58 from the DC power supply PCB If yes the fuse PCB Ass y is likely faulty Field Remedy Perform CheckItem and replace the fuse PCB ass y if faulty Fuse PCB Ass y Part ...

Page 952: ...e detail The Ethernet board is faulty 0002 1816 Symptom E740 The Ethernet board is faulty Error code detail Description T 16 63 16 3 10 120 E744 Error code detail The language file is faulty 0002 1817 Symptom E744 The language file is faulty Error code detail Description T 16 64 Detail Description Timing of detection 0002 The MAC address is illegal Detail Description Timing of detection 0001 The v...

Page 953: ...flat cable to make sure of no abnormality If there is replace it with a new one Flat Cable FH2 6983 16 3 10 123 E747 Error code detail The image processing ASIC or the memory control communication ASIC is faulty 0002 1836 Symptom E747 The image processing ASIC or the memory control communication ASIC is faulty Error code detail Description T 16 66 Detail Description Timing of detection 0001 An att...

Page 954: ...e connectors on the interface PCB J301 J305 J306 J309 J399 are not connected properly Unplug and insert all of them If the symptom is not still solved replace the PCB with a new one 16 3 10 126 E747 00FF Error Code 0005 6126 Case in the field Description E747 00FF can be displayed when image signal is not sent within a specific period of time Cause In the field the tip of the flat cable that conne...

Page 955: ...e cooling fan is faulty Error code detail Description T 16 67 16 3 10 129 E804 0004 Error Code 0002 1900 Symptom E804 0004 Error Code Description This error code is displayed when a halt of the cooling fan FM7 in the main controller ass y is detected Cause The connector of the cooling fan FM7 attached to the rear cover of the main controller ass y is disconnected Field Remedy Check whether the sna...

Page 956: ...ptom E804 0004 due to faulty fuse PCB Error Code Description E804 0004 is displayed when a halt of the controller fan FM7 is detected Cause As a result of inspection the fuse PCB was found to be faulty FU12 was burnt Field Remedy There is a snap tight connector of the controller fan FM7 at the rear cover of the main controller Check the connection If the connection is poor reinsert the connector I...

Page 957: ...turning the power OFF ON 16 3 12 FAX Code 16 3 12 1 111 228 FAX Error Code 0003 8644 Verified by Canon Inc Cause Because of a software bug there might occurs a mismatch during the communication process between the FAX board and the main controller PCB Field Remedy This symptom has been corrected with System software Ver 9 05 If the machine you are servicing is earlier than Ver 9 05 upgrade it to V...

Page 958: ...on level again 2 If the symptom still recurs in service mode FAX 1SSSW SW03 bit4 set at 1 in order to prevent any error occurrences caused by an echo 3 If the symptom still recurs in service mode FAX 1SSSW SW04 bit2 set at 1 so that the procedure signal can be detected more easily by other party 4 If the symptom still recurs in service mode FAX 2MENU 005 set at 1 in order to activate the NL equali...

Page 959: ... CL2 duplex pickup clutch controls the timing of pickup for double sided printing Solenoid SL1 manual feed pickup solenoid controls the timing of pickup for the manual feed block SL2 delivery path switching solenoid 1 switches over positions of the delivery tray SL3 cassette 1 pickup solenoid controls the timing of pickup from the cassette 1 SL4 cassette 2 pickup solenoid controls the timing of pi...

Page 960: ...ediate transfer unit M2 laser scanner motor Y drives the laser scanner Y M3 laser scanner motor M drives the laser scanner M M4 laser scanner motor C drives the laser scanner C M5 laser scanner motor Bk drives the laser scanner Bk M6 cassette 1 pickup motor drives the pickup unit 1 M7 cassette 2 pickup motor drives the pickup unit 2 M8 registration motor drives the registration roller M9 pre regis...

Page 961: ... correction motor M corrects image slope M M18 image slope correction motor C corrects image slope C M19 image slope control motor Bk corrects image slope Bk M20 toner container motor Y stirs toner inside the toner container Y M21 toner container motor M stirs toner inside the toner container M M22 toner container motor C stirs toner inside the toner container C M23 toner container motor Bk stirs ...

Page 962: ...cooling fan cools the power supply unit FM2 fixing heat discharge fan discharges heat from the fixing unit FM3 machine heat discharge fan discharges heat from inside the machine FM4 cleaner fan limits overheating inside the machine FM5 delivery cooling fan cools paper for delivery M25 M8 M1 M9 M1 M6 M7 M5 M4 M3 M2 M26 M19 M18 M17 M16 M15 M14 M13 M12 M23 M24 M22 M21 M20 M11 M10 ...

Page 963: ...e inside of the controller box Item Notation Name Description Sensor CF1 original size sensor detects original size CF2 original size sensor detects original size SR1 copyboard cover sensor detects the state open closed of the copyboard cover SR2 home position sensor detects the home position of the scanner Item Notation Name Description FM3 FM7 FM2 FM5 FM1 FM4 FM6 ...

Page 964: ...ensors detects the state full of paper inside the face down delivery assembly PS9 manual feed last paper sensor detects paper in the manual feed unit PS10 manual feed paper sensor detects paper in the manual feed unit PS11 pickup vertical path cover open closed sensor detects the state open closed of the pickup vertical path cover PS12 face down delivery sensor 1 detects face down delivery PS13 de...

Page 965: ...state open closed of the manual feed unit VR1 slide resistor detects the width of paper for manual feed OHP1 transparency sensor front detects a transparency OHP2 transparency sensor rear detects a transparency EV1 environment sensor environment sensor TH1 fixing main thermistor detect the temperature in the middle of the fixing roller TH2 fixing sub thermistor detects the temperature at the ends ...

Page 966: ... Description Switch SW1 main power switch turns on off the main power SW2 cassette 1 size detecting switch detects the size of paper inside the cassette 1 CF2 SR2 CF1 SR1 PS9 VR1 PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4 EV1 TS4 TS3 TS2 TS1 PS5 TH1 TP1 TH2 PS6 PS8 PS10 PS26 OHP1 OHP2 PS25 PS22 PS21 PS27 PS13 PS12 PS11 PS24 PS23 PS28 TPS1 PS14 PS15 PS16 PS7 PS20 PS18 PS17 PS19 ...

Page 967: ...W3 manual feed unit open closed detection switch 1 detects the state open closed of the manual feed unit MSW4 manual feed unit open closed detection switch 2 detects the state open closed of the manual feed unit MSW5 fixing feeding unit open closed detection switch 1 detects the state open closed of the fixing feeder unit MSW6 fixing feeding unit open closed detection switch 2 detects the state op...

Page 968: ...vents condensation on a lens Item Notation Name Description Heater H1 fixing main heater main main heater controls the temperature of the fixing roller H2 fixing sub heater sub heater controls the temperature of the fixing roller H3 fixing heat retaining heater heat retaining heater keeps the pressure roller heated H4 cassette heater prevents absorption of moisture by paper inside the cassette Bre...

Page 969: ...r controller PCB controls the reader unit ADF 2 interface PCB communicates image information read by the reader unit to the printer unit 3 inverter PCB controls the scanning lamp 4 CCD AP PCB drives the CCD processes analog images 5 fuse PCB controls mirrors lens heater PLG1 ELCB1 SP1 H4 H3 H2 H1 H1 H2 LA1 ...

Page 970: ...e level of toner inside the waste toner container 17 Auto registration sensor F light emitting detection PCB reads the image position correction pattern 18 Auto registration sensor F light receiving detection PCB reads the image position correction pattern 19 Auto registration sensor R light emitting detection PCB reads the image position correction pattern 20 Auto registration sensor R light rece...

Page 971: ...sette heater 35 Power distribution PCB relays power to individual PCBs 36 ECO ID PCB assists image processing 37 Control key PCB control key 38 Main controller PCB main processes image data for output to the printer unit 39 Main controller PCB sub processes conversion input image data of signals from the reader unit 40 Differential PCB converts signals from the reader unit 41 Control panel CPU PCB...

Page 972: ... 0001 0488 T 16 81 Name Ref Description PCB 1 pedestal controller PCB controls the pedestal 2 power supply PCB supplies power 18 17 19 20 22 3 4 1 2 6 36 40 5 21 27 27 31 28 24 27 27 32 29 15 41 24 23 25 34 26 16 43 12 13 14 10 9 8 7 39 33 35 38 11 42 37 31 ...

Page 973: ...ED and check pins used in the machine those needed in servicing the machine in the field are discussed Those VRs and check pins that are not found in the lists are designed exclusively for use at the factory requiring special tools and measuring instruments Do not touch them in the field Some LEDs permit flow of current when OFF this is a normal condition and must be kept in mind VRs that may be u...

Page 974: ...16 200 16 4 9 2 Main Controller PCB main 0001 0514 F 16 77 T 16 82 Notation Description LED1001 in operation LED1002 3 3V non all night being supplied LED1003 3 3V all night being supplied LED1002 LED1003 LED1001 ...

Page 975: ... 9 4 Reader Controller PCB 0001 0730 F 16 79 T 16 84 Notation Description LED1 3 3V all nigh being supplied LED2 3 3V non all night being supplied LED3 5V non all night being supplied Notation Description SW1 selects paper configuration for original size detection LED1 LED2 LED3 SW1 ...

Page 976: ...1 T 16 85 16 4 9 6 Differential PCB 0001 0734 F 16 82 T 16 86 Notation Description VR31 for factory Notation Description LED1 3 3V non all night being supplied SW1 ON OFF 1 2 AB configuration SW1 ON OFF 1 2 A configuration SW1 ON OFF 1 2 Inch configuration VR31 LED1 ...

Page 977: ...Chapter 17 Self Diagnosis ...

Page 978: ......

Page 979: ...Contents Contents 17 1 Error Code Details 17 1 17 1 1 Error Code Details Table 17 1 ...

Page 980: ......

Page 981: ... C for 500 msec 0004 The difference in temperature between the non contact thermistor and the end thermistor remains 80 deg C or more for 500 msec 0005 At the end of initial rotation the difference in temperature between the sub end thermistor and the main non contact thermistor is 20 deg C or more for 100 msec A reversal in temperature caused for example by a piece of residual paper is detected E...

Page 982: ...90 deg C within 180 sec after it has reached 180 deg C 0101 The output of the non contact thermistor does not reach 120 deg C within 300 sec after power on 0102 The output of the non contact thermistor does not reach 190 deg C within 300 sec after it has reached 120 deg C E003 The temperature of the fixing unit is abnormally low after standby 0001 After standby the reading of the non contact therm...

Page 983: ...g C or less E012 The drum ITB motor is faulty 0001 The ITB drum motor fails to rotate The lock normal state signal is not detected within 2 sec after the ITB drum motor control signal has gone ON or the motor speed has been changed 0002 The ITB drum motor fails to rotate after it has rotated The lock normal state signal stops 0 5 sec later 0003 The lock normal state signal remains even when the IT...

Page 984: ...20 sec after idle rotation of the developing assembly xx34 The sample image fails to be drawn in ATR control There is a fault open circuit in the SALT sensor The drum unit is faulty The ITB has deteriorated The fault can occur as when a new drum unit has been fitted It is detected during ATR control or in about 150 sec after idle rotation of the developing assembly xx35 There is a fault open circu...

Page 985: ...ccurs while ATR control is being executed xx83 The detected ITB surface reflection rate is faulty The value is appreciably high xxA0 The measured value of the developer concentration is considerably low The ATR sensor is faulty The SALT sensor is faulty The ITB is soiled The fault occurs when an image is being formed It is detected when toner supply operation is started xxB0 The drum unit is appro...

Page 986: ...e laser scanner motor is faulty 0110 The rotation of the Y laser scanner motor is faulty The motor lock signal remains in an unlock state for 1 sec or more while the laser scanner motor is in operation 0210 The rotation of the M laser scanner motor is faulty The motor lock signal remains in an unlock state for 1 sec or more while the laser scanner motor is in operation 0310 The rotation of the C l...

Page 987: ...ontroller within a specific period of time E243 The control panel is faulty 0000 There is a fault in the communication between the controller and the control panel E248 The EEPROM on the reader controller PCB is faulty 0000 The ID stored in EEPROM read when the main power is turned on and the ID stored in the flash ROM fail to match E302 A fault has occurred in relation to shading correction 0000 ...

Page 988: ...essing is under way an image data transfer error occurs 0028 The ASIC used for compression expansion on the image conversion board is faulty While rotation processing is under way a time out condition occurs 0034 The ASIC used for enlargement reduction on the image conversion board is faulty While enlargement reduction processing is under way an image data transfer error occurs 0036 The ASIC used ...

Page 989: ...ata communication The communication between the saddle stitcher controller PCB and the finisher controller PCB remains disrupted for 5 sec or more E504 There is a fault in stack size detection 0001 The height sensor PS1 is faulty The communication between the height sensor and the finisher controller PCB is prevented Or there is a fault in the communication data 0002 The height sensor PS1 is fault...

Page 990: ...oes not leave the aligning plate home position sensor when the alignment motor has been driven for 2 sec 0002 There is an excess load on the rear alignment motor M3 rear aligning plate home position sensor PI6 or rear aligning plate The aligning plate does not return to its home position when the aligning plate motor has been driven for 2 sec E531 There is a fault in stapling 0001 The stapler moto...

Page 991: ... 0 2 sec while swinging operation is under way E537 There is a fault in front alignment The front alignment motor M3 or the front aligning plate home position sensor S6 is faulty An excess load is imposed on the front aligning plate The aligning plate fails to reach the aligning plate home position sensor when the rear alignment motor has been driven for a specific period of time or fails to leave...

Page 992: ...d ascent operation E584 There is a fault in feed operation No 2 0001 The No 2 feed motor M8 or the shutter open sensor PI5 is faulty The shutter open sensor does not go ON when the No 2 feed motor has been rotated in reverse for 1 sec or more 0002 The No 2 feed motor M8 or the shutter closed switch MS4 is faulty The shutter closed switch does not go ON when the No 2 feed motor has been rotated in ...

Page 993: ...sensor PI5S is faulty The aligning plate home position sensor does not go ON when the alignment motor has been driven for 0 5 sec initially driven for 1 67 sec 0002 The alignment motor M5S or the aligning plate home position sensor PI5S is faulty The alignment plate home position sensor does not go OFF when the alignment motor has been driven for 1 sec E5F4 There is a fault in stapling at the sadd...

Page 994: ...e motor has been driven for 80 msec 0004 The paper pushing plate motor M8S or the paper pushing plate motor clock sensor PI1S is faulty The number of detection pulses of the paper pushing plate motor clock sensor has dropped below a specific value 0005 The paper pushing plate motor M8S or the paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor PI15S is faulty The paper pushing plate leading edge posi...

Page 995: ...ith any of the following sensors identifying the cover to be closed inlet cover sensor PI9S front cover open closed sensor PI2S delivery cover sensor PI3S 0003 The delivery cover switch MS3S is faulty The delivery cover switch is identified to be open for 1 sec or more after the start of initial rotation or of printing in the host machine with any of the following sensors identifying the cover to ...

Page 996: ...e like 0007 The color profile file does not exist The correct color profile file does not exist in BOOTDEV PDL or the like 01XX The partition DOSDEV is faulty For detail code see below 02XX The partition FSTDEV is faulty For detail code see below 03XX The partition DOSDEV2 is faulty For detail code see below 04XX The partition FSTPDEV is faulty For detail code see below 05XX The partition DOSDEV3 ...

Page 997: ...controller IC driver not installed 12 HD controller IC system error 13 HD controller IC device error 14 HD controller IC parameter error 21 packet R W file operation system error 22 packet R W file operation parameter error 23 packet R W file operation packet DMC error 24 packet R W file operation packet DMAC time out 25 packet R W file operation HD controller IC error E604 There is a shortage in ...

Page 998: ...c after the communication is disrupted between the reader unit and the DADF 0002 There is a fault in data communication The finisher controller pedestal controller or DC controller PCB is faulty The connector between the finisher and the machine has poor connection An error has been detected 4 times or more for 1 5 sec after the communication between the finisher and the machine is disrupted and i...

Page 999: ...srupted and is not resumed within 3 sec thereafter 0001 While the new controller is starting up an error occurs Detection was normal before the power has been turned off but detection fails when the power is turned o 0002 While the new controller is in operation an IPC error occurs The system assumes that IPC communication cannot be restored E719 The coin vendor is faulty 0000 The coin vendor cann...

Page 1000: ...s at the main controller PCB E732 There is a reader communication error 0000 The reader unit cannot be detected at startup E733 There is a printer communication error 0000 The printer unit cannot be detected at startup 0001 There is no response to an error command from the printer unit E740 The Ethernet board is faulty 0002 The MAC address is illegal E744 The language file is faulty 0001 The versi...

Page 1001: ...SIC CPU has a fault e g image data transfer error E804 The power supply cooling fan is faulty 0000 The DC controller tried to start it up but the fan has been identified as being at rest for 5 sec continuously The controller fan is faulty 0004 The controller fan has been identified as being at rest E805 The fixing heat discharge fan is faulty 0000 The DC controller tried to start it up but the fan...

Page 1002: ...Chapter 17 17 22 ...

Page 1003: ...Chapter 18 Service Mode ...

Page 1004: ......

Page 1005: ... 25 18 2 2 FEEDER 18 26 18 2 2 1 FEEDSIZE 18 26 18 2 3 DISPLAY Level 2 18 26 18 2 3 1 DISPLAY Status Display Mode Level 2 18 26 18 2 4 DISPLAY Status Display Mode Level 2 18 28 18 2 4 1 COPIER 18 28 18 3 I O I O Display Mode 18 32 18 3 1 I O display mode 18 32 18 3 2 DC CON 18 33 18 3 3 R CON 18 42 18 3 4 FEEDER 18 44 18 3 5 SORTER 18 46 18 3 6 MN CON 18 63 18 4 ADJUST Adjustment Mode 18 65 18 4 1...

Page 1006: ...e Settings Mode 18 90 18 6 1 COPIER 18 90 18 6 1 1 BODY 18 90 18 6 1 2 USER 18 91 18 6 1 3 ACC 18 91 18 6 1 4 INT FACE 18 92 18 6 2 SORTER 18 94 18 6 2 1 BLNK SW 18 94 18 6 3 BOARD 18 94 18 6 3 1 SURF OFF 18 94 18 6 4 OPTION mechanical specifications setting mode Level 2 18 95 18 6 4 1 COPIER 18 95 18 6 4 2 BOARD 18 112 18 7 TEST Test Print Mode 18 113 18 7 1 COPIER 18 113 18 7 1 1 NETWORK 18 113 ...

Page 1007: ...reen Level 1 Main intermediate item screen Level 1 Sub item screen Level 1 Sub item screen Level 1 User screen Initial screen Level 2 Reset key Previous next page 2 8 Select a main item from the top of screen The corresponding intermediate items are then displayed and can be selected Select an item Main intermediate item screen Level 2 Sub item screen Level 2 Sub item screen Level 2 Previous next ...

Page 1008: ...operation panel 2 Press 2 and 8 simultaneously on the numeric keypad 3 Press the asterisk key on the operation panel The initial screen see below now appears F 18 3 COPIER FEEDER SORTER BOARD DISPLAY I O ADJUST FUNCTION OPTION TEST COUNTER Status display mode I O display mode Adjustment mode Operation inspection mode Specifications setting mode Test print mode Counter mode COPIER FEEDER SORTER SOR...

Page 1009: ...ent and the adjusted values are written on the service labels If you replace the reader controller PCB or DC controller PCB or clear the RAM the adjusted ADJUST and OPTION values are restored to their default values Therefore always enter the new service mode values on the service labels when you change the values as a result of adjusting the copier in the market If the item you need to enter is n...

Page 1010: ...iate item screen 0000 5393 F 18 7 COPIER FEEDER SORTER BOARD Initial items Touch an item to select it VERSION USER ACC STS ANALOG CST STS JAM ERR Main items Touch an item to select it Intermediate items Touch an item to select it Adjust Function Option Test Counter I O Display ...

Page 1011: ... Copying Error NO TONER No toner WTNR FUL Waste toner full NO PAPER No paper ALERM Alarm READY JAM SERVICE WAITING DOOR COPYING ERROR Adjust Function Option Test Counter I O PREV NEXT OK xxxxx yyyyy aaaaa to bbbbb Toggles value s sign key Stops running operations Sets entered value Range of values that can be entered Value before change Stop key Clears value Clear key Starts copying without exitin...

Page 1012: ...pier and options Example display R CON XX YY XX Version number YY Development management number If no PCB is connected is displayed 18 2 1 1 3 DC CON 0006 0645 ROM version of DC controller PCB 18 2 1 1 4 R CON 0006 0649 ROM version of reader controller PCB 18 2 1 1 5 PANEL 0006 0652 ROM version of control panel CPU PCB 18 2 1 1 6 ECO 0006 0653 ROM version of ECO PCB Adjust Function Option Test Cou...

Page 1013: ...version 18 2 1 1 13 SDL STCH 0006 0663 ROM version of saddle stitcher controller PCB 18 2 1 1 14 OP CON 0006 0664 ROM version of cassette pedestal controller PCB 18 2 1 1 15 MN CON 0006 0665 System software version of main controller PCB 18 2 1 1 16 BOOT ROM 0006 0666 BOOT ROM version of main controller PCB Copy model GDI UFR model xx yy C LIPS model xx yy L PL PCL model xx yy N 18 2 1 1 17 DIAG D...

Page 1014: ...version of MEAP content 18 2 1 2 ACC STS 18 2 1 2 1 FEEDER 0000 5396 Displays whether DADF is connected 0 Not connected 1 Connected 18 2 1 2 2 SORTER 0006 0690 Displays whether finisher is connected 0 Not connected 1 Finisher M1 or N1 connected 2 Saddle finisher N2 connected 18 2 1 2 3 DECK 0006 0696 Displays whether paper deck is connected 0 Not connected 1 Connected 18 2 1 2 4 CARD 0006 0699 Dis...

Page 1015: ... Not installed 1 Installed 18 2 1 2 10 SEND 0006 0707 Indicates whether SEND function is appended 0 No SEND function 1 SEND function 18 2 1 2 11 USB HOST 0007 6058 USB host board connection status 0 The board is not connected 1 The USB host board for the E201A E307 is connected 2 The USB host board for the E82G is connected 18 2 1 3 ANALOG 18 2 1 3 1 TEMP 0000 5397 Copier s internal temperature en...

Page 1016: ...rger the number the older the jam BBBB Date of jam CCCC Time of jam JAM 1 7 READY AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIII...

Page 1017: ...18 5 T 18 6 T 18 7 T 18 8 T 18 9 DDDD Time jam was restored E Jam location 0 Copier 1 DADF 2 Finisher FFff Jam code FF Jam type ff Jam sensor G Paper feed position HHHHHH Paper feed level software counter value IIIII Paper size ...

Page 1018: ...paper sensor PS53 xx04 Cassette 4 retry paper sensor PS57 xx05 Registration sensor PS26 xx06 Fixing inlet sensor PS27 xx07 Fixing paper delivery sensor PS25 xx08 Face down paper delivery sensor 1 PS12 xx09 Face down paper delivery sensor 2 PS6 xx0A Two sided registration sensor PS21 xx0B Two sided paper feed sensor PS24 xx0C Deck paper feed sensor PS6D xx0D Deck conveyor sensor PS1D 0D90 Transpare...

Page 1019: ...t path sensor delay jam 1013 Buffer path sensor delay jam 1014 Paper delivery path sensor delay jam 1121 Inlet path sensor pileup jam 1123 Buffer path sensor pileup jam 1124 Paper delivery path sensor pileup jam 1125 Staple tray sensor pileup jam 1181 Jam when pressing bundle 1182 Jam when returning bundle 1186 Staple jam in saddle stapler 1187 Saddle power ON jam 1188 Front lower cover OPEN jam 1...

Page 1020: ...ed for 500 msec after formation of resist loop Separation early delivery 0006 SR3 Separation sensor SR3 was ON during start of document separation Reverse outlet delay 0011 U505 Reverse outlet sensor U505 didn t turn ON at specified amount of time after trailing edge of document passed right edge of belt s presser roller Reverse outlet pileup 0012 U505 Reverse outlet sensor U505 didn t turn OFF wh...

Page 1021: ...utlet sensor U505 for large size two sided document Reverse registration delay 0043 SR5 Reverse paper delivery registration sensor SR5 didn t turn ON at specified amount of time after reverse inlet sensor SR4 turned ON Reverse registration pileup 0044 SR5 Reverse registration sensor SR5 didn t turn OFF at specified amount of time after reverse paper delivery inlet sensor SR4 turned OFF Reverse fla...

Page 1022: ...copier was stopped due to lack of paper DADF OPEN 0081 SR6 DADF was opened when copier was stopped due to lack of paper Paper feed cover OPEN 0082 SR2 Paper feed unit cover was opened when copier was stopped due to lack of paper Document not removed 0088 SR4 SR5 Attempt to start paper feed was made with document left on document stand glass Detected by reverse paper delivery inlet sensor SR4 and r...

Page 1023: ...is restored automatically 5 seconds after being processed User DADF OPEN 0091 SR6 DADF was opened during DADF operation User cover OPEN 0092 SR2 SR8 Cover was opened during DADF operation Separation sensor initial status 0094 SR3 Separation sensor SR3 was ON before separation of first document sheet Registration front sensor initial status 0095 U502 Registration front sensor U502 was ON before sep...

Page 1024: ...k 6 to 8 not used 9 duplex unit 10 manual feed tray AA Error sequence number 1 to 50 the larger the number the older the error ERR 1 7 READY AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G Display Adjust Func...

Page 1025: ...19 T 18 20 T 18 21 BBBB Date of error CCCC Time of error DDDD Time error was restored EEEE Error code FFff Detail code 0000 if none G Error location 0 Main controller 1 DADF 2 Finisher 3 Unused 4 Reader unit 5 Printer unit 6 PDL boards 7 Fax board ...

Page 1026: ...alue is updated when toner is supplied after main power switch ON SALT sensor window dirt coefficient Y M C Bk The smaller the value the dirtier the sensor window Appropriate values 50 or higher Note Value is updated when ATR control operation is performed after main power switch ON Measured value of developer concentration Y M C Bk Measured when each job is received Appropriate values 16 to 192 N...

Page 1027: ...print jobs indicates the average image ratio color ratio within the drum unit printer internal environment display 1 Low humidity environment 5 8 g or less moisture 2 Normal humidity environment 5 9 to 17 3 g moisture 3 High humidity environment 17 4 g or more moisture Drum unit life Y M C Bk Expresses how much of life has expired as percentage Appropriate values 0 to 100 Note 0 when new drum unit...

Page 1028: ...ail code for R D HHHHH H Total counter value when alarm is generated EE Alarm location code FFFFAlarm code 04 Paper feed conveying 0008 Side deck lifter alarm 0009 Horizontal registration detection alarm ALARM 2 1 7 READY AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EE FFFF GGGG HHHHHH AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EE FFFF GGGG HHHHHH AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EE FFFF GGGG HHHHHH AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EE FFFF GGGG HHHHHH AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EE FFFF ...

Page 1029: ...n image position pattern read data 0002 Incorrect data read abnormal data in at least 8 of the 10 sets of image position patterns 0003 Pattern read timeout alarm 0004 Attempt was made to compensate abnormally large slant as result of image position compensation 0005 Attempt was made to correct large abnormally large magnification as result of image position compensation 61 Finisher staples 0001 No...

Page 1030: ...image during FallBack 73 LIPS 0001 Download overflow 0002 Insufficient work memory needed during system data processing mainly figure processing text processing 0003 Translator was specified that was not mounted by LIPS emulation start command 0004 Translator work memory overflow 0006 Configuration acquiring management error 0007 LIPS internal memory management error 0008 LIPS internal file manage...

Page 1031: ...ice mode COPIER OPTION BODY ENVP IN F 18 14 0016 Figure drawing error 0017 Image drawing error 0018 LCD display error 0019 Text mode command layer error 0020 Vector mode command layer error 0021 Utility execution control error 0022 LIPS internal database management error 0023 LIPS internal menu control error 0024 LIPS internal boot error 74 GDI UFR 0001 Incorrect Job Wrapper Format version 0002 In...

Page 1032: ... data piece higher the number older the data piece DATE date of data collection TIME time of data collection D deg C machine inside temperature E machine inside humidity F deg C fixing roller surface middle temperature Displays the document size detected by the ADF Note Displays the document size as a paper size such as A4 or LTR For paper names see COPIER OPTION CST CST U1 CST U2 Adjust Function ...

Page 1033: ...he version for the Swedish language file LANG TW indicates the version of the classical Chinese language file ECO ID Use it to check the ECO ID number LANG ZH indicates the version of the simplified Chinese language file LANG BU indicates the version fort the Bulgarian language file LANG CR indicates the version of the Croatian language file LANG RM indicates the version of the Rumanian language f...

Page 1034: ... for the even numbered bits of the CCD for color GAIN EG indicates the gain level adjustment value of green for the even numbered bits of the CCD for color GAIN ER indicates the gain level adjustment value of red for the even numbered bits of the CCD for color GAINB OB indicates the gain level adjustment value of blue for the odd numbered bits of the CCD for black and white GAINB OG indicates the ...

Page 1035: ...the Portuguese language file LANG RU 0001 0138 Use it to check the version of the Russian langue file LANG SL 0001 0139 Use it to check the version of the Slovenian language file LANG SV 0001 0140 Use it to check the version of the Swedish language file LANG TW 0001 0141 Use it to check the version of the Chinese language file traditional text LANG ZH 0001 0143 Use it to check the version of the C...

Page 1036: ... value for black and white GAINB OR 0006 1765 CCD odd numbered bit s RED gain level adjusted value for black and white GAINB EB 0006 1766 CCD even numbered bit s BLUE gain level adjusted value for black and white GAINB EG 0006 1767 CCD even numbered bit s GREEN gain level adjusted value for black and white GAINB ER 0006 1768 CCD even numbered bit s RED gain level adjusted value for black and white...

Page 1037: ...S DENS S Y M C K 0001 0157 Use it to check the density value Y M C Bk detected of the sample image formed at time of ATR control D Y M C K TRGT 0005 9757 target value Y M C Bk of developer concentration DEV DC Y M C K 0001 0156 Use it to check the output value of the developing DC voltage Y M C Bk generated last CHG DC Y M C K 0001 0155 Use it to check the output value of the primary DC voltage Y ...

Page 1038: ...red for market service are described on the next page F 18 16 Reading the screen F 18 17 Adjust Function Option Test Counter I O Display DC CON R CON FEEDER SORTER MN CONT Adjust Function Option Test Counter I O Display P001 P002 P003 P004 P005 P006 P007 P008 DC CON 1 3 READY xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx 0 7 ...

Page 1039: ...ction 1 6 Cassette 2 size detection 2 7 Cassette 2 size detection 3 8 PS14 Cassette 1 remaining volume sensor A 1 Remaining volume is roughly half or less 9 PS15 Cassette 1 remaining volume sensor B 1 Remaining volume is roughly 50 sheets or less 10 PS20 Cassette 2 remaining volume sensor A 1 Remaining volume is roughly half or less 11 PS18 Cassette 2 remaining volume sensor B 1 Remaining volume i...

Page 1040: ...0 1 0 11 B5 R 0 0 0 1 12 B4 0 0 0 0 13 12 18 1 0 0 0 14 U1 1 1 0 0 15 U2 1 1 1 0 16 No cassette 1 1 1 1 0 Actuator pressed Address Bit Symbol Display Remarks P002 0 Developing bias mode Y 0 Rectangular wave output 1 Developing bias mode M 0 Rectangular wave 2 Developing bias mode C 0 Rectangular wave 3 Developing bias mode K 0 Rectangular wave 4 For R D 5 For R D 6 For R D 7 For R D 8 High pressur...

Page 1041: ...output 1 Cassette 2 paper feed solenoid 1 ON 2 Manual paper feed unit paper feed solenoid 1 ON 3 Paper delivery path switching solenoid 1 0 Back side paper delivery 1 Front side paper delivery 4 For R D 5 For R D 6 For R D 7 For R D 8 Transparency detection LED 1 ON 9 For R D 10 For R D 11 For R D 12 For R D 13 For R D 14 For R D 15 For R D P004 0 For R D input 1 For R D 2 For R D 3 For R D 4 For ...

Page 1042: ...or R D input 1 For R D 2 Cassette pedestal connection 0 Connected 3 Cassette pedestal power ready 0 Ready 4 PS5 Fixing conveyor unit OPEN CLOSED detection 1 CLOSED 5 Fixing heater enable 0 Enabled 6 For R D 7 PS13 Delivery vertical path cover detection 0 OPEN 1 CLOSED 8 PS28 Manual feed unit OPEN CLOSED detection 1 CLOSED 9 PS8 Center paper delivery tray full sensor 1 Full 10 PS11 Paper feed verti...

Page 1043: ...ier exhaust heat fan full speed 1 Full speed during output when temperature inside copier is 30 C or more P007 0 PS17 Cassette 2 retry paper sensor 1 ON input 1 PS16 Cassette 1 retry paper sensor 1 ON 2 PS26 Resist sensor 1 ON 3 PS27 Fixing inlet sensor 1 ON 4 PS25 Fixing paper delivery sensor 1 ON 5 PS12 Face down paper delivery sensor 1 1 ON 6 PS21 Two sided resist sensor 1 ON 7 PS24 Two sided p...

Page 1044: ...ing fan 1 ON 5 Cleaner fan 1 ON 6 Fixing exhaust heat fan 1 ON 7 Power cooling fan 0 ON 8 Transparency sensor front gain switching 1 Gain large 0 Gain small 9 Transparency sensor inner gain switching 1 Gain large 0 Gain small 10 For R D 11 For R D 12 For R D 13 For R D 14 For R D 15 For R D P009 0 Two sided resist clutch 1 ON two sided input output 1 Two sided paper feed clutch 1 ON two sided 2 Pa...

Page 1045: ...ze detection 3 4 Cassette 4 size detection 0 Size detection 0 to 3 enable 16 settings see Table T05 401 01 5 Cassette 4 size detection 1 6 Cassette 4 size detection 2 7 Cassette 4 size detection 3 P020 0 Cassette 3 remaining volume detection A 1 Remaining volume is roughly half or less input 1 Cassette 3 remaining volume detection B 1 Remaining volume is roughly 50 sheets or less 2 Cassette 4 rema...

Page 1046: ...ached upper limit 4 PS7D Deck paper volume sensor bottom 0 No paper 5 PS6D Deck paper feed sensor 1 Paper 6 Deck lifter lower limit sensor 1 Lifter has reached lower limit 7 PS9D Deck open sensor 0 Storage compartment is open P022 0 Paper feed 3 solenoid 1 ON output 1 Paper feed 4 solenoid 1 ON 2 CL2D Deck paper feed clutch 1 ON 3 SL1D Deck paper feed solenoid 1 ON 4 Deck lifter motor 0 Lifter mot...

Page 1047: ...d current switching signal 0 See pulse motor current setting input output table Table T05 401 08 1 Cassette 3 paper feed current switching signal 1 2 Cassette 4 paper feed current switching signal 0 See pulse motor current setting table Table T05 401 08 3 Cassette 4 paper feed current switching signal 1 4 For R D 5 For R D 6 For R D 7 For R D P029 0 Cassette 3 retry sensor 1 Paper input output 1 C...

Page 1048: ...0 100 1 0 70 0 1 31 1 1 0 0 1 Paper deck pulse motor current setting 0 0 100 1 0 70 0 1 50 1 1 35 Address Bit Symbol Display Remarks P001 0 Image leading edge signal 0 Image leading edge detected input 1 12 V 24 V 0 12 V supply output 1 24 V supply 2 For R D 3 Optical motor clock signal input 1 Optical motor running 4 Optical motor clock signal output 1 Optical motor running 5 For R D 6 For R D Ad...

Page 1049: ...004 0 For R D input 1 For R D 2 For R D 3 For R D 4 Pressure platen CLOSED detection signal 1 Detect pressure platen closed 30 5 Optical home position detection signal 1 Detect optical home position 6 For R D 7 For R D P005 to P007 For R D P008 0 Document illumination lamp lit signal 1 Document illumination lamp lit output 1 CCD drive signal 1 CCD drive 2 For R D 3 For R D 4 For R D 5 For R D 6 Fo...

Page 1050: ...on sensor 1 ON 3 4 5 6 7 P002 0 to 7 for R D P003 0 U505 Reverse outlet sensor 1 ON input 1 U502 Resist front sensor 1 ON 2 U503 Document set sensor 1 ON 3 U504 Final document detection sensor 1 ON 4 5 6 7 P004 0 input 1 SR1 Conveyor motor clock sensor Alternates between 1 and 0 when motor is running 2 SR7 Reverse paper delivery motor clock sensor Alternates between 1 and 0 when motor is running 3...

Page 1051: ... LED 1 Lit 2 LED1 0 Lit flashes when paper doesn t go through 3 LED2 0 Lit 4 Conveyor motor reverse operation 1 ON 5 Conveyor motor forward operation 1 ON 6 Paper delivery motor reverse operation 1 ON 7 Paper delivery motor forward operation 1 ON P008 0 input 1 2 Push switch 1 ON 3 SR8 Reverse paper delivery unit cover sensor 0 OPEN 4 SR2 Paper feed unit cover sensor 0 OPEN 5 SR6 ADF OPEN CLOSED s...

Page 1052: ...osition input 1 S2D Inlet paper detection 1 Paper 2 S12D Stack tray lower limit detection 1 Lower limit 3 S13D Stack tray upper limit detection 1 Upper limit 4 S11D Stack tray paper detection 1 Paper 5 S4D Copier finisher connection detection 1 Connection released 6 S5D Processing tray paper detection 1 Paper 7 S6D Return roller home position detection 1 Home position P002 0 to 7 for R D P003 0 S6...

Page 1053: ...5 S15D Staple detection 1 No staples 6 S17D Stapling home position detection 0 Home position 7 S16D Staple leading edge detection 1 No staple leading edge P004 0 S1D Paperdeliverymotor clock detection 1 Startup detection input 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P005 0 M5D1 Stack tray UP DOWN motor operation 1 output 1 UP input output 1 2 M5D2 Stack tray UP DOWN motor reverse operation 1 output 1 DOWN 3 Address Bit Sym...

Page 1054: ...mission signal output 1 Permit 4 5 6 M6DA Staple motor operation 2 output 0 Forward 7 M6DB Staple motor reverse operation 2 output 0 Reverse P007 0 M6DA Staple motor operation 1 output 0 Forward output 1 M6DB Staple motor reverse operation 1 output 0 Reverse 2 M5D1 Stack tray UP DOWN motor reverse operation 2 output 1 UP 3 M5D2 Stack motor UP DOWN motor reverse operation 2 output 1 DOWN 4 5 6 Addr...

Page 1055: ...utput 1 Bundle processing motor current switching 1 output 1 Current low 0 Current high 2 Bundle processing motor current switching 2 output 1 Current low 0 Current medium 3 Front matching motor current switching output 1 Current low 0 Current high 4 Rearmatchingmotor current switching output 1 Current low 0 Current high 5 LED1 0 ON 6 LED2 0 ON 7 LED3 0 ON P011 0 DIPSW1 bit 1 0 ON input 1 DIPSW1 b...

Page 1056: ... P001 0 output 1 2 M8 Second feed motor A phase output 3 M8 Second feed motor B phase output 4 M4 Staple mover motor B phase output 5 M4 Staple mover motor A phase output 6 M3 Matching motor B phase output 7 M3 Matching motor A phase output 8 to 15 P002 0 M5 Tray UP DOWN motor PWM output 1 M2 Paperdelivery motor PWM 2 M7 Rotary motor PWM 3 4 5 Address Bit Symbol Display Remarks ...

Page 1057: ...D2lightingsignal output 0 Lit 2 3 PS1 Height sensor input 4 LED1lightingsignal output 1 Lit 5 PS1 Height sensor external clock input 6 7 8 to 15 P004 0 output 1 24 V output interruption detection signal 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 to 15 P005 0 M9 Inlet feed motor A phase output output 1 M9 Inlet feed motor B phase output Address Bit Symbol Display Remarks ...

Page 1058: ...irst feed motor B phase output 4 M8 Second feed motor clock input 5 M9 Inlet feed motor clock input 6 M1 First feed motor clock input 7 Paperdelivery motor clock detection signal 8 to 15 P007 0 output 1 2 3 4 5 M5 Tray UP DOWN motor clock detection signal 1 6 M5 Tray UP DOWN motor clock detection signal 2 Address Bit Symbol Display Remarks ...

Page 1059: ...t output 5 RD input output 6 AS input output 7 Stacker unit EEPROM data input input 8 to 15 P009 0 Buffer path input paper detection signal 0 Paper output 1 Paper delivery paper detection signal 1 Paper 2 Buffer path paper detection signal 0 Paper 3 Input detection signal 0 Paper 4 PI7 Staple drive home position detection signal 1 Home position 5 6 7 8 to 15 Address Bit Symbol Display Remarks ...

Page 1060: ...tection signal 1 Paper 6 PI12 Tray 2 detection signal 1 Paper 7 8 to 15 P013 0 to 15 not used P014 0 to 15 not used P015 0 Push switch 3 output 1 Push switch 2 2 3 PI22 Staple mover position detection signal 1 Home position 4 PI6 Matchingplatehome position detection signal 1 Home position 5 PI8 Tray home position detection signal 1 Home position 6 PI5 Shutter OPEN detection signal 1 OPEN Address B...

Page 1061: ... signal 1 Connected output 1 Front top cover OPEN CLOSED detection signal 1 CLOSED 2 MS5 Saddle unit connection detection signal 3 MS5 Tray upper limit detection switch signal 1 Upper limit 4 MS3 Tray safety switch signal 0 Safe 5 Front top cover OPEN CLOSED detection signal 0 CLOSED 6 MS4 Shutter CLOSED detection switch signal 1 CLOSED 7 MS2 Rotary guide CLOSED detection switch signal 8 to 15 P01...

Page 1062: ...orward 8 to 15 P019 0 First feed motor OFF 1 OFF output 1 2 M9 Inlet feed motor connectivity switching 2 0 During drive 3 M9 Inlet feed motor connectivity switching 1 0 During drive 4 M8 Second feed motor current switching 2 0 During drive 5 M8 Second feed motor current switching 1 0 During drive 6 M1 First feed motor current switching 2 0 During drive 7 M1 First feed motor current switching 1 0 D...

Page 1063: ...1 ON 4 Flapper solenoid drive signal 1 ON 5 Paddle solenoid drive signal 1 ON 6 Solenoid timer output 7 Retraction solenoid drive signal 1 ON 8 to 15 Address Bit Symbol Display Remarks P023 0 M6S Stitch motor inner forward drive output 0 Forward output 1 M6S Stitch motor inner reverse drive output 0 Reverse 2 M7S Stitch motor front forward drive output 0 Forward 3 M7S Stitch motor front reverse dr...

Page 1064: ... to 15 P024 0 output 1 2 3 4 5 Conveyor plate adjoining solenoid drive signal 1 ON 6 7 Paper positioning plate motor current switching 0 During drive 8to 15 P025 0 24 V output interruption detection signal 1 Down output 1 PI15S Paper push plate leading edge position signal 0 Leading edge 2 PI11S Paper delivery detection signal 0 Paper 3 4 5 6 7 8 to 15 Address Bit Symbol Display Remarks ...

Page 1065: ...ition detection signal 0 Home position 4 5 6 7 8 to 15 P027 0 Paper positioning plate home position detection signal 0 Home position output 1 PI16S Stitcher storage detection signal 0 Stored 2 PUSH SW2 ON OFF 3 PI17S Vertical path paper detection signal 1 Paper 4 PI12S Crescent roller phase detection signal 0 Home position 5 PI13S Guide home position detection signal 0 Home position 6 7 8 to 15 Ad...

Page 1066: ...otor B phase output 6 7 M8S Paper push plate motor reverse drive output 0 Reverse 8 to 15 P029 0 M5S Matching motor A phase output output 1 M5S Matching motor B phase output 2 M2S Paper folder motor PWM 3 M8S Paper push plate motor forward drive output 0 Forward 4 M3S Guide motor A phase output 5 M3S Guide motorB phase output 6 M3S Guide motor current switching 0 Drive 7 M5S Matching motor current...

Page 1067: ...ion 4 MS8S Paper positioning plate paper detection signal 0 Paper 5 MS6S Tray paper detection signal 0 Paper 6 MS18S First paper sensor paper detection signal 0 Paper 7 8 to 15 P031 0 Matchingplatehome position sensor 1 Connected output connector connection detection 1 Paper fold home position sensor 1 Connection connector connection detection 2 Paper delivery cover sensor connector 1 Connected co...

Page 1068: ...put 1 MS6S No staple detection signal 1 1 Staple 2 MS1S Inlet cover OPEN detection switch signal 0 CLOSED 3 Front bottom cover OPEN detection switch signal 0 CLOSED 4 PI3S Paper delivery cover OPEN switch signal 0 CLOSED 5 Front bottom cover OPEN detection signal 1 CLOSED 6 PI9S Inlet cover OPEN detection signal 1 CLOSED 7 MS3S Paper delivery cover OPEN detection switch signal 1 CLOSED 8 to 15 P03...

Page 1069: ...n output 1 PWR2 1 During normal operation 2 For R D Alternates between 1 and 0 every 50 msec 3 For R D 4 Cooling fan ON Cooling fan control P002 0 to 16 For R D P003 10 GPO Paper feed count for coin vendor assistance output 11 Paper delivery count for coin vendor assistance 12 LCD backlight control 0 OFF 1 ON P004 0 GPI SRAM board detection 0 YES 1 NO input 1 For R D 2 For R D 3 Operation permissi...

Page 1070: ...1 11 For R D 12 For R D 13 For R D 14 Open interface board detection 0 YES 1 NO 15 Open interface board control CRDY 0 Ready 1 Not ready P007 16 Fax option 0 Connected 1 Not connected input P008 4 Printer power ready 0 Ready 1 Not ready input 5 For R D 6 For R D 7 For R D 8 For R D 9 Scanner power ready 0 Ready 1 Not ready P009 5 PCPRDY 0 Ready 1 Not ready output 6 For R D 7 For R D 8 For R D 9 Fo...

Page 1071: ...ves in the direction of the trailing edge If you have cleared the reader controller PCB s RAM or replaced the reader controller PCB enter the value on the service label Adjustment range 220 to 320 Value at time of factory shipment Factory adjusted value Value after RAM clear 265 Caution 1 After changing the setting value of this item execute the following COPIER FUNCTION CCD SH PS ST Caution 2 Aft...

Page 1072: ...by 1 moves the image read start position by 0 1 mm toward you The image read range moves toward you If you have cleared the reader controller PCB s RAM or replaced the reader controller PCB enter the value on the service label Adjustment range 0 to 1000 Value at time of factory shipment Factory adjusted value Value after RAM clear 58 Caution After changing the setting value of this item enter the ...

Page 1073: ...B s RAM or replaced the reader controller PCB enter the value on the service label Adjustment range 120 to 150 Value at time of factory shipment Factory adjusted value Value after RAM clear 150 Caution When adjusting the optical shading measurement position use the following mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD SH PS ST Used to enter white level data for standard white plate Adjustment method If you have clea...

Page 1074: ...by the read optics the amount dependent on the CCD unit lens is compensated by adjusting the 3 line CCD sensor s compensation amount between R and G Image compensation is performed by image processing by the main controller PCB Used to enter the color shift compensation value during normal reading in color mode in the sub scanning direction Adjustment method If you have cleared the reader controll...

Page 1075: ...djusting the 3 line CCD sensor s compensation amount between R and G G and B Image compensation is performed by image processing by the main controller PCB Used to enter the color shift compensation value during high speed reading in color mode in the sub scanning direction Adjustment method If you have cleared the reader controller PCB s RAM or replaced the reader controller PCB enter the value o...

Page 1076: ...value Value after RAM clear 0 Note Of the color shift in the sub scanning direction generated by the read optics the amount dependent on the CCD unit lens is compensated by adjusting the 3 line CCD sensor s compensation amount between G and B Image compensation is performed by image processing by the main controller PCB Used to adjust magnification of the Bk image s main scanning direction Adjustm...

Page 1077: ...y shipment value after RAM clear 59 Used to enter adjusted value of image blank width left edge Adjustment method If you have cleared the main controller PCB s RAM or replaced the SRAM PCB enter the value on the service label Adjustment range 0 to 1000 Value at time of factory shipment value after RAM clear 47 Used to enter adjusted value of image blank width right edge Adjustment method If you ha...

Page 1078: ...gnal for PASCAL control during automatic gradation compensation full compensation Adjustment method Increasing the value makes the image after automatic gradation compensation full compensation denser Adjustment range 128 to 128 Value at time of factory shipment value after RAM clear 0 Used to adjust the registration roller clutch ON timing Adjustment method Increasing the value by 1 moves the ima...

Page 1079: ...per width detection VR or registering a new value execute the following service mode FUNCTION CST Adjustment range 0 to 255 Value at time of factory shipment Factory adjusted value Value after RAM clear 141 Used to adjust the text and photo separation level for text photo map mode Adjustment method To make documents more easily recognized as photo documents increase the setting value To make docum...

Page 1080: ...deliver the document Operation method 1 Place the document on the ADF document tray 2 Select the item use the numeric keypad to change the setting value then press the OK key to set it 3 Press the OK key again to deliver the document and stop it aligned left on the platen glass 4 Open the ADF carefully and check the stop position of the document Standard Stop position L4 0 1 mm L4 Distance from ve...

Page 1081: ...ecrease the value the leading edge blank is made larger 5 Carefully close the ADF and press the OK button to deliver the document to the document tray Horizontal size plate Document position alignment mark Paper Increase value of DOCST Horizontal size plate Document position alignment mark Paper Decrease value of DOCST ...

Page 1082: ... Adjustment method Enter a value of the service label when RAM of the DC controller PCB has been cleared the DC controller has been replaced Adjustment range 3 to 5 Factory default After RAM clear 0 Adjusting the amount of toner supply C color Adjustment method Enter a value of the service label when RAM of the DC controller PCB has been cleared the DC controller has been replaced Adjustment range...

Page 1083: ...s Color blanking in the highlight area especially on low density image Fogging when making a large number of low density image copies VD LIM M 0007 6166 Adjusting the upper limit of charge DC Adjustment range 10 to 0 1 step 25V Factory default After RAM clear 0 Change a setting value when either of the following faulty images occurs Color blanking in the highlight area especially on low density im...

Page 1084: ...n discharge current control card special paper transparencies Whenever possible avoid using this setting during normal operation 18 4 3 1 5 HV TR Outline 0001 2385 The adjusted offset doesn t become valid unless all of the following 6 items are entered 2TR TGT 2TR SHR TR PPR TR ENV TR CLR and TRDUP The settings entered for all 6 items make up a single pattern 8 patterns can be stored in memory 2TR...

Page 1085: ...lor mode Value at time of factory shipment value after RAM clear 1 2 Monochrome mode TR DUP1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0006 0902 TR DUP1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 one two sided item for secondary transfer offset adjustment 1 One sided Value at time of factory shipment value after RAM clear 1 2 Automatic two sided 3 Manual feed two sided 1TR TGY 0007 6172 Adjusting target current offset of primary transfer ATVC Y Adjustme...

Page 1086: ...at of the brush mark Primary transfer current is high Change a setting value to the direction 1TR TGK1 0007 6178 Adjusting target current offset of primary transfer ATVC K Black monochrome mode Adjustment range 5 to 5 unit 0 5 uA default 0 It is enabled when COPIER OPTION BODY PTATVCSW 1 primary ATVC control is enabled Change a setting value when any of the following faulty images occurs Mottle ma...

Page 1087: ...ue expands the recognition zone ACS CNT 0006 0904 ACS CNT Used to adjust color recognition pixel count zone during ACS recognition Increasing the setting value expands the recognition zone ACS DF 0006 0905 ACS DF Used to adjust ACS recognition zone during DF use Increasing the setting value expands the recognition zone ...

Page 1088: ...item is performed Setting values 1 to 2001 Value at time of factory shipment value after RAM clear 1 Operation method Enter the number of cards to use You can use up to 1 000 cards from the entered number Initialize the card management information Initialize the card name department ID from the entered number Initialize the card s password Adjusts gain of analog processor unit in CCD PCB Operation...

Page 1089: ...n thescreen Note The DC controller uses the photo diode in the laser unit to automatically measure the light quantity when each laser emits its minimum light quantity This operation is used to compensate the time the laser lights during minimum light quantity emission Each laser unit Y M C K is adjusted in sequence Registers basic value of manual feeder s DADF s paper width A4R width 210mm A6R wid...

Page 1090: ...0 seconds then ends automatically Fixing nip width automatic measurement output Operation method 1 If the finisher is connected remove it from the copier and pull out the lattice cable 2 Place A4 LTR size paper in the manual feed tray 3 Press the OK key the paper in the manual feed tray is fed 4 When the fed paper is pressed by the fixing roller it stops and is delivered about 15 seconds later 5 C...

Page 1091: ...ots in LCD Operation method 1 Select this item then press the OK key to start the operation The touch panel s front surface should light repeatedly in the sequence white black red green and blue Check that it does 2 Press the stop key the clear key on printer models to end the operation Used to specify clutch for operation check Range 1 to 10 5 and above are reserved Operation method 1 Select this...

Page 1092: ...01 E002 E003 Operation method 1 Select this item and press the OK key 2 Turn the main power OFF ON Executes document illumination lamp lighting operation Operation method 1 Select this item 2 Press the OK key The document illumination lamp lights for 3 seconds Prints service mode setting values Operation method 1 Select this item 2 Press the OK key to print the setting values Note Printing takes a...

Page 1093: ...emperature and humidity fixing roller surface temperature Reference This mode is to output logs of inside temperature Åé humidity fixing roller surface center temperature Åé variations using signals of the attached temperature humidity environmental sensor and fixing thermistor main Max 100 records Switches to download mode Operation method 1 Select this item 2 Press OK to enter download mode and ...

Page 1094: ...l Operation method 1 Paste black paper solid black on the final document detection sensor in the document tray Make sure the black paper doesn t cover the document placement sensor The document placement display LED must not light 2 Close the ADF select this item then press the OK key 3 After about 15 seconds the document detection LED flashes twice When SERVICE in the display changes to READY aut...

Page 1095: ...ection motor may get locked when the tilt amount in the horizontal scanning direction exceeds the expected range and consequently color displacement cannot be corrected even though automatic registration is conducted When this symptom occurs use this mode to make the tilt correction motor return to the center position automatically If you try to do this operation manually by opening the scanner un...

Page 1096: ... the main power switch is turned OFF ON Setting values 0 AB 6R5E 1 INCH 5R4E 2 A 3R3E 3 AB INCH 6R5E Switching from MEAP Full model to MEAP Base model Settings 0 Base model 1 Full model Selecting screen in response to the external controller Settings 0 The external controller icon is displayed on the control panel of the copier Factory default After RAM clear When the color image server is connect...

Page 1097: ...tting log collection interval to COPIER FUNCTION MISC P ENV PRT and COPIER DISPLAY ENVRNT Settings 0 to 480 min Factory default After RAM clear 60 Reference Log is not collected when 0 is set Used to change upper limit value setting for number of sheets to copy Setting values 1 to 999 sheets Value at time of factory shipment value after RAM clear 999 Used to switch coin vendor setting Setting valu...

Page 1098: ...lues 0 Normal mode no PS print server unit value at time of factory shipment 1 Not used 2 Not used 3 PS print server unit 4 Not used 5 Not used Caution When 1 is selected as the setting value the following user mode items are restored to their initial values System management settings Network settings TCP IP settings IP address settings IP address System management settings Network settings TCP IP...

Page 1099: ...dress settings BOOTP use System management settings Network settings Ethernet driver settings Automatic detection System management settings Network settings Spool function use When 3 or 4 is selected as the setting value the following settings are turned OFF in addition to the items above System management settings Network settings TCP IP settings RAW setting System management settings Network se...

Page 1100: ...es of fold position when saddle stitcher is in use Setting values 0 Normal width 5 mm 1 Large width 10 mm value at time of factory shipment Releases UFR board function Setting values 0 Even without UFR board copier operates as copy model without values displaying E codes 1 UFR board recognition check is performed If no UFR board exists E codes are displayed W ...

Page 1101: ...actory shipment value after RAM clear 500 TC REF 0006 1152 Used to turn ON OFF environmental compensation on ATR sensor output Normally the ATR sensor output value used is the value compensated for the environment 0 Environmental compensation OFF 1 Environmental compensation ON value at time of factory shipment value after RAM clear If fogging occurs in a low humidity environment set this item to ...

Page 1102: ...value after RAM clear UI SEND 0006 1170 Used to select whether to display operation panel send screen 0 Don t display 1 Display value at time of factory shipment value after RAM clear UI FAX 0006 1171 Used to select whether to display operation panel fax screen 0 Don t display 1 Display value at time of factory shipment value after RAM clear UI EXT 0006 1172 Used to select whether to display opera...

Page 1103: ... low dot stability for Y M C Bk LOW DZL 0006 1182 Used to change document illumination lamp lighting document size detection operation time 0 Normal operation value at time of factory shipment value after RAM clear 1 Dazzle reduction mode Document illumination lamp is lit only once momentarily to detect document size D CLN TM 0006 1183 Cleans light sensitive drum surface Whenever possible avoid us...

Page 1104: ...006 1225 Used to select area flag for copy images Whenever possible avoid using this setting during normal operation T LW LVL 0006 1226 Used to switch timing for display of remaining toner volume warning message Whenever possible avoid using this setting during normal operation DVTGT Y M C K 0006 1228 developer concentration target value offsets Whenever possible avoid using these settings during ...

Page 1105: ...S PORT 0006 1240 Used to turn TOT asynchronous status communication port ON OFF For future expansion CMD PORT 0006 1241 Used to turn TOT synchronous command communication port ON OFF For future expansion BK 4CSW 0006 1242 Used to select color mode used in photo mode 0 OFF Use monochrome mode when reading monochrome documents in printed photo or photographic printing paper photo mode 1 ON Use simpl...

Page 1106: ...MTP server 1 disable Use it to set GSSAPI authentication under SMTP authentication setting 0 dependent on SMTP server 1 disable Use it to set NTLM authentication under SMTP authentication setting 0 dependent on SMTP server 1 disable it Use it to set PLAIN LOGIN authentication under SMTP authentication environment in which communication packets are subjected to coding setting 0 dependent on SMTP se...

Page 1107: ...P authentication setting 0 dependent on SMTP server 1 disable Switching the method of entering the Service Mode Setting Values 0 User Mode key Press 2 and 8 simultaneously User Mode key Initial setting upon shipment value after RAM clear 1 User Mode key Press 4 and 9 simultaneously User Mode key Reference Information Support for Siemens Disabling screen transition from the MEAP screen to the stand...

Page 1108: ... charging remaining transfer toner Countermeasures against fogged image However faulty image such as mark of the auxiliary brush and filming may occur as a result Set this mode to 1 if such faulty image occurs LSUB DWC 0007 6215 Switching DC bias voltage of the lower auxiliary brush Settings 0 Bias is standard 1 Bias is reduced Factory default After RAM clear 0 Increasing DC bias of the lower auxi...

Page 1109: ... messages when MEAP application is running Settings 0 Warning messages are displayed Factory default After RAM clear 1 Warning messages are not displayed Setting port for communication with DA Settings 0 Close Factory default After RAM clear 0 1 Open Note The following modes also become ON when COPIER OPTION BODY DA CNCT is set to 1 COPIER OPTION BODY STS PORT COPIER OPTION BODY CMD PORT COPIER OP...

Page 1110: ...rt number for status connection under TUIF over TCP IP Settings 1 65535 Factory default After RAM clear 20010 Setting the port number for command connection under TUIF over TCP IP Settings 1 65535 Factory default After RAM clear 20000 SSH server ON OFF Settings 0 Sever is not started up Factory default After RAM clear 0 1 Server is started up Note The following modes also become ON when COPIER OPT...

Page 1111: ...M clear 1 SSH server key is reproduced Note This mode is enabled only when COPIER OPTION BODY SSH SW is set to 1 Use it to set a level of temperature to serve as a reference for detecting a low temperature error Caution The new setting will not be valid until the power switch has been turned off and then on again Settings 0 to 30 deg C at time of shipment upon RAM initialization 2 Use it to set th...

Page 1112: ...ified temperature when the machine is turned on or recovered from the sleep mode use this mode to make automatic full adjustments during initial multiple rotations At this time the Dhalf control is performed only if the number of outputs accumulated since the last Dhalf control exceeds the value specified in this Service Mode Changing the timing of or canceling the Dhalf control according to the n...

Page 1113: ...play serial number OP SZ DT 0006 1255 Used to turn document size detection when pressure plate is open ON OFF 0 Enter document size in control panel 1 Detect document when start key is turned ON with pressure plate open NW SCAN 0006 1258 Used to select whether to permit network scan function 0 Don t permit 1 Permit Invalid when UFR board or open interface board isn t connected HDCR DSP 0006 1259 U...

Page 1114: ...r 1 Compatible other controller mode not in use 2 Reserved FREG SW 0006 8770 T 18 116 IFAX SZL 0006 8775 T 18 117 IFAX PGD 0006 8777 T 18 118 Switching display nondisplay of a free register area of SEND MEAP counter Settings 0 Nondisplay Factory default After RAM clear 1 Display Switching transmission size limitation during IFAX transmission Only when bypassing server Settings 0 Transmission size ...

Page 1115: ...y setting setting after RAM clear 1 Safe mode Setting the timing to issue an output tray full warning Settings 0 Issues an output tray full warning when all the delivery trays become full initial factory setting setting after RAM clear 1 Issues an output tray full warning when all the specified trays become full Limiting access to the User Mode Settings 0 Normal mode Enters the User Mode without a...

Page 1116: ...digit code Reference Information Support for Siemens Disconnecting the HTTP port when three authentication failures from RUI are recognized Setting Values 0 Invalid Initial setting upon shipment value after RAM clear 1 Valid Reference Information Support for Siemens Setting password deletion from the export file of file transmission address Settings 0 Password is not deleted from the export file F...

Page 1117: ... to specify paper name used by U1 paper size group CST U2 0006 1278 Used to specify paper name used by U2 paper size group 24 FOOLSCAP CST U2 Default 25 Australian FOOLSCAP 26 OFFICIO 27 Ecuador OFFICIO 28 Bolivia OFFICIO 29 Argentine LETTER 30 Argentine LETTER R 31 Government LETTER 32 Government LETTER R 34 Government LEGAL 35 FOLIO 36 Argentine OFFICIO 37 Mexico OFFICIO 38 EXECTIVE CST U2 Defau...

Page 1118: ...tted for all department IDs value at time of factory shipment value after RAM clear 1 Printing refused printing is only possible for specified department ID AP ACCNT 0005 9725 Used to set CPCA department ID for printing print jobs from application PrintMe in PS print server unit 0 to 9999999 Value at time of factory shipment value after RAM clear 0 AP CODE 0006 5130 T 18 126 18 6 4 2 BOARD 18 6 4 ...

Page 1119: ...s connection between copier and network during TCP IP connection only Caution Use this item when checking the connection to the network at time of installation or when there is a network connection problem Counter Option Function I O NETWORK 1 1 READY OK Display Adjust PING IP address input Result display OK NG 0 0 0 0 Test ...

Page 1120: ... the connection and redo Step 5 6 Select the COPIER TEST NETWORK PING service mode item enter the loop back address 127 0 0 1 and press the OK key followed by the start key If NG is displayed there is a problem with the local TCP IP settings Go back to Step 3 and check the settings again If OK is displayed there is no problem with the local TCP IP settings However there could be a problem with the...

Page 1121: ... and smaller paper DRBL 1 DRBL 2 PD PU RL C3 PU RL C4 PU RL Large L size Paper longer than 324 mm in the feed direction Small S size Paper 324 mm or shorter in the feed direction DRBL 2 DF PU RL DF SP PD DF F BLT DF SP RL Large L size Paper longer than the LTR length 216 mm in the feed direction Small S size Paper of the LTR length 216 mm or shorter in the feed direction Reading counters for consu...

Page 1122: ...L 18 8 1 2 1 SERVICE1 0001 2807 Service total counter 1 Incremented when paper is delivered outside the printer Incremented for both large and small size sheets Returns to 00000000 after reaching 99999999 18 8 1 2 2 SERVICE2 0006 1293 Service total counter 2 Incremented when paper is delivered outside the printer Incremented by 2 for large size sheets and by 1 for small size sheets Returns to 0000...

Page 1123: ... loaded Blank sheets are not counted Incremented by 1 for both large and small size sheets Can be cleared Returns to 00000000 after reaching 99999999 18 8 1 2 8 RPT PRT 0006 1303 Report print counter Incremented along with the billing counter when a report print is made when paper is delivered outside the copier and two sided paper is loaded Blank sheets are not counted Incremented by 1 for both l...

Page 1124: ... 18 8 1 3 4 C4 0006 1309 Cassette 4 paper feed total counter Displays number of sheets fed from cassette 4 bottom level of cassette pedestal Returns to 00000000 after reaching 99999999 18 8 1 3 5 MF 0006 1310 Manual paper feed total counter Displays number of sheets fed from manual paper feed unit Returns to 00000000 after reaching 99999999 18 8 1 3 6 DK 0006 1311 Deck paper feed total counter Dis...

Page 1125: ... 1 5 6 C1 0006 1322 Jam counter for cassette 1 18 8 1 5 7 C2 0006 1324 Jam counter for cassette 2 18 8 1 5 8 C3 0006 1326 Jam counter for cassette 3 18 8 1 5 9 C4 0006 1327 Jam counter for cassette 4 18 8 1 5 10 DK 0006 1328 Jam counter for side paper deck 18 8 1 6 DRBL 1 18 8 1 6 1 SCN LMP 0001 2857 Number of sheets document illumination lamp has lit count value is stored in controller 18 8 1 6 2...

Page 1126: ...umber of sheets that have passed through fixing roller count value is stored in controller 18 8 1 6 9 FX LW RL 0006 1339 Number of sheets that have passed through pressure roller count value is stored in controller 18 8 1 6 10 FX UNIT 0006 1341 Number of sheets that have passed through fixing unit count value is stored in controller 18 8 1 6 11 FX UP FR 0006 1343 Number of sheets that have passed ...

Page 1127: ... roller 18 8 1 7 8 SORT 0006 1354 Number of sheets that have passed through sort path Incremented by 1 even for L size sheets 18 8 1 7 9 FIN STPR 0006 1355 Number of staple operations 18 8 1 7 10 FIN PDDL 0006 1356 Number of sheets that have passed through finisher paddle Incremented by 1 even for L size sheets 18 8 1 7 11 SADDLE 0006 1357 Number of saddle operations Incremented by 1 even for L si...

Page 1128: ...Chapter 18 18 122 ...

Page 1129: ...Chapter 19 Upgrading ...

Page 1130: ......

Page 1131: ... 19 4 1 Downloading the System Software 19 27 19 4 1 1 Outline 19 27 19 4 1 2 Downloading Procedure 19 28 19 4 2 Downloading the RUI and Language Module 19 35 19 4 2 1 Outline 19 35 19 4 2 2 Downloading Procedure 19 36 19 4 3 Downloading the BOOT Software 19 42 19 4 3 1 Outline 19 42 19 4 3 2 Downloading Procedure 19 44 19 4 4 Downloading the Dcon and Rcon Software 19 50 19 4 4 1 Outline 19 50 19 ...

Page 1132: ......

Page 1133: ...f the system as a whole HDD Language Display of control panel screens HDD RUI Display of the RUI HDD Boot Startup of the machine BootROM DIMM G3FAX Control of the G3 FAX Board G3 FAX Board DIMM Dcon ROM Control of DC controller DC controller PCB Soldered to a flash ROM Rcon ROM Control of the reader controller Reader controller PCB Soldered to a flash ROM Main controller PCB DC controller PCB Flas...

Page 1134: ...e consists of 2 types selected by pressing a combination of appropriate keys keypad when starting up the machine 1 normal mode 1 7 after startup start service mode and make the following selections COPIER Function SYSTEM DOWNLOAD 2 safe mode 2 8 Initializing the HDD Downloading firmware Uploading backup data Downloading backup data Backup data SST HDD Flash ROM Back up RAM PC for servicing work iR...

Page 1135: ...ls to operate normally E602 0001 0002 Main power switch ON on keypad 2 8 on keypad 1 7 Boot ROM Download control program safe mode Boot program Download mode safe mode Download mode normal mode Download control program normal mode HDD COPIER Function SYSTEM DOWNLOAD System program In service mode ...

Page 1136: ...ode T 19 2 Function Download mode Normal mode Safe mode Formatting the HDD DOSDEV FSTDEV DOSDEV2 FSTPDEV DOSDEV3 PDLDEV DOSDEV4 DOSDEV5 All inclusive BOOTDEV Downloading firmware System Language RUI Boot G3Fax Dcon Rcon System Language RUI Boot Uploading backup data SramImg SramDCON SramRCON SramImg Downloading backup data SramImg SramDCON SramRCON SramImg ...

Page 1137: ...r environment settings are retained while the service settings are selected You need not change the user mode network settings before or after the use of the SST F 19 4 iRC3200 iRC3200 iRC3200 SST in use Power OFF Power ON in response to 1 7 or 2 8 on keypad Power OFF Normal power ON User network environment User network environment Service PC Ethernet I F Ethernet I F Ethernet I F Service network...

Page 1138: ...Chapter 19 19 6 If you start up the machine by pressing 1 7 the machine indicates FIXIP in the upper right of the LCD to distinguish its state from normal F 19 5 ...

Page 1139: ...enRing interface will be disabled while the Ethernet interface remains enabled thus you need not remove the TokenRing board when connecting the SST F 19 6 iRC3200 TokenRing I F disabled Ethernet I F enabled TokenRing I F disabled Ethernet I F enabled iRC3200 SST in use Power OFF Power ON by s1 7 or 2 8 on keypad User network environment TokenRing PC for service ...

Page 1140: ...the system CD to the SST Before Starting the Work Keep the following on hand PC to which SST v1 61 or later has been installed system CD for iRC3200 in the case of Netware support iRC3200N system CD Registering the Firmware 1 Start up the PC 2 Set the system CD to the PC 3 Start up the SST 4 Click Next under Data management F 19 7 ...

Page 1141: ...Chapter 19 19 9 5 Click Register Firmware F 19 8 6 Click Register from selected folder F 19 9 ...

Page 1142: ... 19 10 7 Select the drive in which you have set the system CD and click Search F 19 10 8 When the list of firmware items contained on the system CD has appeared click Register All when it becomes enabled F 19 11 ...

Page 1143: ...ater has been installed and iRC3200 firmware has been registered Twisted pair 10Base T category 3 or 5 Cross cable 100Base TX category 5 Procedure 1 Start up the PC 2 Check the network settings of the PC Type IPCONFIG in response to the command prompt and press the Return key Check to see that the network settings are as follows IP address 172 16 1 160 other than 172 16 1 0 172 16 1 100 172 16 1 2...

Page 1144: ... i c r o s o f t W i n d ow s 2 0 0 0 Ve r s i o n 5 0 0 2 1 9 5 C C o py r i g h t 1 9 8 5 1 9 9 9 M i n c r o s o f t C o r p E t h e r n e t a d a p t e r L o c a l A r e a C o n n e c t i o n C o n n e c t i o n s p e c i f i c D N S S u f f i x I P A d d r e s s 1 7 2 1 6 1 1 6 0 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 D e fa u l t G a t eway C C i p c o n f i g Command Prompt IP address 172 16 1 100 Subne...

Page 1145: ...WNLOAD if safe mode 2 8 6 Start up the SST If you are connecting your PC to a different network after using the SST you must be sure to change the PC network settings to suit the settings of the new network If you connect to a different network using the IP address you used for the SST the possible presence of the same IP address on the network can cause serious problems to the network functions 7...

Page 1146: ...Chapter 19 19 14 8 Select the model of the machine F 19 16 9 Select the unit you want and click Connect F 19 17 ...

Page 1147: ...Chapter 19 19 15 10 Click Set host name F 19 18 11 The machine s IP address is entered automatically click OK F 19 19 ...

Page 1148: ...Chapter 19 19 16 12 Click OK so that the machine makes a connection F 19 20 13 When the machine has made a connection and brings up the following screen click OK F 19 21 ...

Page 1149: ...2 0001 Indicates that the BOOTDEV partition in which the system program are stored cannot be found at time of start up To correct format all partitions in safe mode and download the following system language RUI HDD FSTDEV DOSDEV2 DOSDEV DOSDEV3 PDLDEV DOSDEV4 DOSDEV5 BOOTDEV Formatting all partitions only if in safe mode HDD after formatting HDD offered as service part partitions are not set up F...

Page 1150: ...ay data of image data E602 0301 FSTPDEV Storage of image data E602 0101 DOSDEV3 Temporary storage of PDL job E602 0501 PDLDEV PDL processing E602 0601 DOSDEV4 Storage of address book filter E602 0701 BOOTDEV System area stores system language RUI E602 0801 DOSDEV5 Reserved E602 0901 HDD FSTPDEV FSTDEV DOSDEV2 DOSDEV DOSDEV3 PDLDEV DOSDEV4 DOSDEV5 BOOTDEV Partitions on HDD May be formatted in norma...

Page 1151: ...ST The actual formatting of FSTDEV and PDLDEV takes place when the machine is started up the next time and it takes as long as the following FSTDEV 2 min approx PDLDEV 5 min approx all partitions 7 min approx i e FSTDEV PDLDEV The times vary according to the state of the HDD and the progress of formatting is indicated by means of a progress bar Formatting of DOSDEV4 requires the use of the SST Nam...

Page 1152: ...Chapter 19 19 20 19 3 3 Formatting the Partitions 0000 5456 1 Click To Next under Download upload F 19 24 2 Select HD Format and click Connect F 19 25 ...

Page 1153: ...Chapter 19 19 21 3 Click Set host name F 19 26 4 The machine s IP address is entered automatically click OK F 19 27 ...

Page 1154: ...Chapter 19 19 22 5 Click OK to start connection F 19 28 6 When the machine has made a connection and brings up the following screen click OK F 19 29 ...

Page 1155: ...apter 19 19 23 7 Click Format F 19 30 8 Select the partition you want to format form the list and click Start To format all partitions click Start shown for all partitions enabled if in safe mode F 19 31 ...

Page 1156: ...Chapter 19 19 24 T 19 5 F 19 32 T 19 6 Normal Mode Safe Mode ...

Page 1157: ...apter 19 19 25 9 When the machine indicates the message for confirmation for the last time click Start F 19 33 10 When the machine indicates the message to indicate the end of formatting click OK F 19 34 ...

Page 1158: ...takes place when the main power is turned on the next time Although varying according to the state of the HDD formatting lasts as long as the following for all partitions about 7 min for PDLDEV about 5 min for DOSDEV2 about 2 min The progress bar indicated at time of power on will advance gradually while formatting is taking place Turning off the power at this time prevents access to the HDD causi...

Page 1159: ...of support for NetWare T 19 7 Country SST installation model Firmware NetWare Remarks Japan iRC3200 System JP ja Not supported Installed at time of shipment to iRC3200 3200S iRC3200N System JP ja Supported Installed at time of shipment to iRC3200N Other iRC3200 System USen Supported Installed at time of shipment Download iRC3200 System System Main System Sub ICC Profile System Main System Sub ICC ...

Page 1160: ...achine is started up to correct download the system software 19 4 1 2 Downloading Procedure 0000 5458 Making Checks in Advance only in Japan Check the type of system software installed to the machine support of NetWare in service mode COPIER Display ACC STS NETWARE NetWare not supported 0 NetWare Supported 1 Select the type of system software to download using the name of the model iRC3200 System ...

Page 1161: ...19 29 1 Click To next under Download upload F 19 36 2 Select the system software of the iRC3200 and click Connect In Japan and if NetWare is supported be sure to select the system software of the iRC3200N F 19 37 ...

Page 1162: ...Chapter 19 19 30 3 Click Set host name F 19 38 4 The machine s IP address is entered automatically Click OK F 19 39 ...

Page 1163: ...Chapter 19 19 31 5 Click OK to start connection F 19 40 6 When a connection has been made and the following screen has appeared click OK F 19 41 ...

Page 1164: ...Chapter 19 19 32 7 Click System Software Download F 19 42 8 Select the version to download and click Start F 19 43 ...

Page 1165: ...ults of the downloading are indicated click OK F 19 44 10 Click To Unit Selection Screen Never turn off the machine while the following screen is shown Otherwise writing to the HDD will be suspended preventing the machine to start up ...

Page 1166: ...Chapter 19 19 34 F 19 45 If the machine fails to start up execute formatting BOOTDEV using HDFormat and download the following system software language files and RUI files ...

Page 1167: ...specific language may be selected for a specific PC user mode common specifications settings display language switchover If the versions are not correct E744 will be indicated Turn off and then on the main power so that the system language will be used System Language System JP ja Japanese inside Japan System USen English outside Japan LCD Network PC Language RUI System RUI en RUI it RUI ja System...

Page 1168: ...ading Procedure 0000 5460 Procedure Downloading may take place when the machine is in normal or in safe mode The following describes downloading of the language files both language and RUI files may be downloaded in common among models here the iRC3200 is selected Language code Language Language code Language de German it Italian en English ja Japanese fr French Download iRC3200 Language XXen XXja...

Page 1169: ...Chapter 19 19 37 1 Click To Next under Download upload F 19 48 2 Select language for the iRC3200 and click Connect F 19 49 ...

Page 1170: ...Chapter 19 19 38 3 Click Set host name F 19 50 4 The machine s IP address will be entered automatically click OK F 19 51 ...

Page 1171: ...Chapter 19 19 39 5 Click OK to start making a connection F 19 52 6 When a connection has been made and the following screen has appeared click OK F 19 53 ...

Page 1172: ...Chapter 19 19 40 7 Click Language Download F 19 54 8 Select the version to download and click Start F 19 55 ...

Page 1173: ...t of downloading is indicated click OK F 19 56 10 Click To Unit Selection Screen Never turn off the machine while the following screen is indicated Otherwise writing to the HDD will be suspended preventing the machine from starting up ...

Page 1174: ... system software language files RUI files 19 4 3 Downloading the BOOT Software 19 4 3 1 Outline 0000 5461 The boot ROM differs according to the machine s functions T 19 11 Boot ROM type Service mode indication Country Machine function Copy xx yyC Worldwide Copy LIPS xx yyL Japan Copy LIPS PSPCL xx yyN Outside Japan Copy PSPCL ...

Page 1175: ...SION BOOT ROM Copy xx yyC LIPS xx yyL Japan PSPCL xx yyN outside Japan SST PC for service iRC3200 Main controller block Select a function suited to the type of boot ROM Download Only if boot of same type Boot ROM Flash ROM DIMM Boot ROM Flash ROM DIMM May be upgraded by DIMM replacement iRC3200 Boot COPY iRC3200L Boot LIPS Japan iRC3200N Boot PSPCL Outside Japan iRC3200 Boot COPY ...

Page 1176: ...Chapter 19 19 44 19 4 3 2 Downloading Procedure 0000 5462 Downloading may take place in normal mode or in safe mode 1 Click next under Downloading Uploading F 19 59 ...

Page 1177: ...Chapter 19 19 45 2 Select Boot for the iRC3200 if a LIPS model select iRC3200L if a PSPCL model select iRC3200N then click Connect F 19 60 3 Click Set host name F 19 61 ...

Page 1178: ...Chapter 19 19 46 4 The machine s IP address will be entered automatically click OK F 19 62 5 Click OK to start making a connection F 19 63 ...

Page 1179: ...9 19 47 6 When a connection has been made and the following screen has appeared click OK F 19 64 If the wrong type of boot ROM has been selected the following screen will appear select the correct model F 19 65 ...

Page 1180: ...Chapter 19 19 48 7 Click Boot ROM Download F 19 66 8 Select the version to download and click Start F 19 67 ...

Page 1181: ... screen After Downloading When you have upgraded the boot ROM be sure to turn off and then on the machine s main power switch so that the new version will be validated Never turn off the machine while the following screen is indicated Otherwise the machine will fail writting to the boot ROM and may not start up ...

Page 1182: ...4 4 Downloading the Dcon and Rcon Software 19 4 4 1 Outline 0000 5463 The DC controller reader controller files are downloaded by way of the main controller block Both DC controller PCB and the reader controller PCB are equipped with boot ROMs permitting retries if downloading fails ...

Page 1183: ...e Checks F 19 71 SST PC for service Reader unit iRC3200 Dcon Rcon Main controller block DC controller PCB Download Downloading possible only in normal mode Power supply control signal Signal cable Power cable CPU Reader controller PCB CPU Power supply cable iRC3200 Boot ROM Flash ROM Boot ROM Flash ROM Printer unit Signal cable Power cable No error code must be indicated In the case of downloading...

Page 1184: ...re The following describes downloading of DC controller files both DC controller and reader controller files are shared in common among models herein the iRC3200 is selected 1 Click To Next under Downloading Uploading F 19 72 ...

Page 1185: ...Chapter 19 19 53 2 Select DCON and click Connect F 19 73 3 Click Set host name F 19 74 ...

Page 1186: ...Chapter 19 19 54 4 The machine s IP address is entered automatically click OK F 19 75 5 Click OK to start making a connection F 19 76 ...

Page 1187: ...Chapter 19 19 55 6 When a connection has been made and the following screen has appeared click OK F 19 77 7 Click DCON Download F 19 78 ...

Page 1188: ...Chapter 19 19 56 8 Select the version to download and click Start F 19 79 9 When the result of downloading is indicated click OK F 19 80 ...

Page 1189: ...and then on the main power switch You cannot download the DC controller and reader controller files in succession Never turn off the machine while the following screen is indicated Otherwise writing to DCON RCON can fail indicated by the following error codes DCON E733 RCON E732 F 19 81 If an error code is indicated be sure to download the appropriate firmware ...

Page 1190: ...ed by way of the main controller block F 19 82 If downloading fails the flash ROM DIMM must be replaced iRC3200 G3Fax PC for service iRC3200 G3 fax board Downloading Downloading possible only in normal mode G3Fax Flash ROM DIMM G3Fax Flash ROM DIMM Upgrading may be by DIMM replacement Main controller PCB CPU SST ...

Page 1191: ...Chapter 19 19 59 19 4 5 2 Downloading Procedure 0000 5466 Procedure Use normal mode for downloading 1 Click To Next under Downloading Uploading F 19 83 ...

Page 1192: ...Chapter 19 19 60 2 Select G3FAX and click Connect F 19 84 3 Click Set host name F 19 85 ...

Page 1193: ...Chapter 19 19 61 4 The machine s IP address is entered automatically click OK F 19 86 5 Click OK to start making a connection F 19 87 ...

Page 1194: ...Chapter 19 19 62 6 When a connection has been made and the following screen has appeared click OK F 19 88 7 Click G3Fax Download F 19 89 ...

Page 1195: ...Chapter 19 19 63 8 Select the version to download and click Start F 19 90 9 When the result of downloading is indicated click OK F 19 91 ...

Page 1196: ...3Fax files twice in succession Once downloading ends the G3 fax board will be reset leaving download mode Never turn off the machine while the following screen is indicated Writing to the flash ROM DIMM of the G3 fax board will fail preventing the G3 fax board functions from operating normally F 19 92 If the G3 fax board fails to operate be sure to replace the flash ROM DIMM on the G3 fax board ...

Page 1197: ...ata in advance and download it after replacement so that parts counter readings and the like may be retained F 19 93 Backup data File name selected at time of uploading SRAM PCB main controller block SramImg bin DC controller PCB SramDCON bin Reader controller PCB SramRCON bin PC for service Main controller block Main controller PCB SRAM PCB DC controller PCB SramImg bin SramRCON bin iRC3200 SramI...

Page 1198: ... with a different serial number the image data user mode settings and service mode settings stored in Box or the like will all be lost Be sure not to download the SramImg data to any other machine 19 5 2 Uploading Procedure 0000 5468 Procedure Use normal mode for downloading 1 Click To Next under Download Upload F 19 94 ...

Page 1199: ...Chapter 19 19 67 2 Select SYSTEM under iRC3200 and click Connect F 19 95 3 Click Set host name F 19 96 ...

Page 1200: ...Chapter 19 19 68 4 The machine s IP address is entered automatically click OK F 19 97 5 Click OK to start making a connection F 19 98 ...

Page 1201: ...Chapter 19 19 69 6 When a connection has been made and the following screen has appeared click OK F 19 99 7 Click Upload the Backup Data F 19 100 ...

Page 1202: ...Chapter 19 19 70 8 Select the data to upload and click Start Storing SRAM PCB SramImg bin DC controller PCB SramDCON bin Reader controller PCB SramRCON bin F 19 101 ...

Page 1203: ...Chapter 19 19 71 9 When uploading has ended enter a file name to use an click Save F 19 102 10 When the file has been saved click OK F 19 103 ...

Page 1204: ...Chapter 19 19 72 11 Click return to unit select screen 19 5 3 Downloading Procedure 0000 5469 Procedure Use normal mode to download 1 Click To Next under Download Upload F 19 104 ...

Page 1205: ...Chapter 19 19 73 2 Select SYSTEM under iRC3200 and click Connect F 19 105 3 Click Set host name F 19 106 ...

Page 1206: ...Chapter 19 19 74 4 The machine s IP address is entered automatically click OK F 19 107 5 Click OK to start a connection F 19 108 ...

Page 1207: ...Chapter 19 19 75 6 When a connection has been made and the following screen has appeared click OK F 19 109 7 Click Download the Backup Data F 19 110 ...

Page 1208: ...Chapter 19 19 76 8 Select the file to download and click Start Writing F 19 111 9 When downloading has ended click OK F 19 112 10 Click return to unit selection screen ...

Page 1209: ...Chapter 20 Service Tools ...

Page 1210: ......

Page 1211: ...Contents Contents 20 1 Special Tools 20 1 20 2 Solvents and Oils 20 2 ...

Page 1212: ......

Page 1213: ...lectrical checks for adjustment of laser power in com bination with the laser power checker 2 Cover switch TKN 0093 A 3 Tester extension pin FY9 3038 A 4 Tester extension pin L shaped FY9 3039 A Used as a probe ex tension when makingelectrical checks 5 Mirror positioning tool front rear FY9 3040 000 B Used for adjusting the distance between No 1 and No 2 mirrors used in combination 8 CA1 Test Shee...

Page 1214: ...ydrocarbon Alcohol Do not bring near fire Procure locally Substitute MEK 3 Heat resisting grease Lubrication e g fixing drive areas Mineral oil family lithium soap Molybdenum disulfide MO 138S Tool No CK 0427 500 g can 4 Lubricating oil Mineral oil paraffin family Tool No CK 0524 100 cc 5 Lubricating oil Lubrication i e drive areas friction areas Silicone oil Tool No CK 0551 20 g 6 Lubricating oil...

Page 1215: ...Dec 3 2004 ...

Page 1216: ......

Reviews:

No comments